Home
        Digi Passport 4
         Contents
1.                                                                    Protocol  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet    Telnet    Configure Master Slave Port Clustering    226    Configure Master Slave Port Clustering    Access the Cluster Ports  Connect to the slave port using the web interface  Telnet  or SSH client   Either access the port access menu or custom menu of each slave device  or connect directly to each slave port     From the Web Interface   1  Clustered Ports appear in the Web user interface  and can be sorted by  Port Title or Port Number  If there are more ports than will display on the  screen  use the Move To pager feature on the upper right of the Port  list    2  To adjust the number of ports that display on a page  go to Network  gt   Webserver Configuration and adjust the Serial ports count on  connection page setting  See  Configure Authentication for the Web  Server  on page 152     From the Command Line Interface    From the Ports Menu  select R to see a list of peered units or S to see a list  of Slave units     Chapter 15 Port Clustering 227    Configure peer to peer Clustering  Configure peer to peer Clustering  Configure Peer to peer Mode    1  Access the Digi Passport unit through the 
2.            seeeeeeeseseeeeneeeeterrrntttttttrtrtttettetttnnnnnsensttnnnnnnnnnt 267  Set Date and  TIME renro a E met aed megan  268  Access the Boot Loader Progranmii s    ssiseeveccsotearesassudactcheonavehayesbededaanttebatinseenenees 269  Hardware Test Menu  lt icccccieeieaceatietetsnis sstencndevens aseedacsthclgvaadesstanenaecedials deste 270  PIREA C FROCOVCRY E eds havedeceday atete T 270  Restore Digi Passport to Factory Default Settings            ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 270  Gonfigmenu SCMOTIG ca ccna het Gc dedicat woud ae canon stan a ua teed aay 272    Chapter 17 Command Line Interface    Back Up All Configuration Files Before Using Command6                  ccccceeeeeeeees 276  Linux Comma NAS a a a aA e a R E a a EA REE ES 277  Commands for Saving and Applying Changes                 cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 277  Commands for accessing and configuring Passport unit and serial ports    277  Dual Network Options isd  ivesses cannes cadevede Yecseweudeneesncdecolaxiaesbatecagyaceeeeeieipeaticsmeunise 278  Source Based Routing  asaceitie ean oes cowie ceased cen chasy  cated tenes em thgaanad ecm 278  Ethernet Bridging aanrennen Ne daicona dase Wags vent ones baie one pantera 279  Shell and Shell Utilities 2 0 0 0    eeccccecceeecssseneeeeeeeeesssenceeeeeeessessssseeeeeeeees 280  File and Disk Utilities 22 0 0    ceeecescceeeceneeaeeeaeeeeceaeeeaeceeeeeaeeeaeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 280  System UMMISS asente e band exes daceebasleeatabaniactaGpauetsv eRe  280  Network  Utili
3.           Chapter 14 Power Controller 219    About Port Clustering    Chapter 15 Port Clustering    About Port Clustering    Port clustering is the ability to coherently manage serial ports across  multiple devices  Digi Passport supports two methods of port clustering   both of which can be used concurrently     e Master Slave Clustering  e Peer to Peer Clustering    Master Slave Clustering    Master slave clustering allows serial ports on one or multiple slave devices  to be managed from one master device using a single IP address  One unit  is defined as the master and the other units as slaves     For example  the Digi Passport unit can manage up to 48 slaves or a  maximum of 2352 serial ports with one Master device  Ports can be  configured either collectively or individually depending on user preference   Each master and slave device is configured separately  they cannot be  configured from one master console  A secondary IP address can be  specified to put all slaves on a private network  The secondary IP option  can be found under Network  gt  IP configuration     Remote PC    Master  Ports 7000 7031   Local    8000 8031   Slave 1  9000 9031   Slave 2 Telnet 211 112 67 34 8005    IP 211 112 67 34       SS Internet    Slave 1 Slave 2  192 168 1 102 192 168 1 103       While it is possible to define multiple units as masters for a common set of  slaves  a unit cannot be both a master and a slave at the same time  If a  Digi Passport unit has Master Slave clustering conf
4.          root Digi_Passport4     configmenu  help       Usage   configmenu  OPTION                 Opeiom s   help   display this help and exit       Script file name    read command from script file  get  XML_PATH1 XML_PATH2        get value of XML_PATH  set  XML_PATH1 VALUE1 XML_PATH2 VALUE2        set value to  XML_PATH    del rport  remote port number        add rport  listening port number   save   save change configuration  apply   apply change configuration    Rules for these options include        get    and    set    options can have multiple values      save    and    apply    commands should be appended to set values     Add the remote port first using    add rport    before setting other  parameters     Listening TCP port number should be provided if adding a new remote  port but remote port number is required if deleting a remote port     All commands should be in one line     The configmenu supports configuration setting getting with parameter s  XML path  amp  value as argument     Each XML path is defined in each configuration file under the  tmp cnf   directory     Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface 272    Configmenu scripting    For example  you can find the XML paths related with IP configuration in  file tmp cnf sys network ip cnf as follows     root Digi_Passport     more  tmp cnf sys network ip cnf   network ip dns1 206 13 28 12    network ip dns2 0 0 0 0   network ip ipconfl ipconfl gateway 10 0 0 1    meicwnouels  aljey  aljorexoumut l   sljererou
5.         LCD Management        Currently displayed message    Shows the message currently displayed on the LCD display        Erase    Clears the LCD display  The saved message stays saved to flash        Save    Save currently displayed message to flash memory        Show saved LCD message  upon startup    The first columns shows the current status  Yes or No     This parameter defines which message is displayed upon startup of the  server  either the saved message or the standard     Rackable Systems  Phantom Vx xx           Contrast    Sets a contrast for the LCD panel   The default is 50  the range is 0     100        Rackable Systems Mgmt Card    properties       Temperature    Indicates current temperature inside the Rackable Systems Server        Power on characteristics        Power delay    Time in seconds before the server starts up after applying power  0 98  seconds  99 means no power on delay         Power sense    The power sense option toggles between sensing server power on the reset  header or on the J7 connector  Most applications will use the    Reset    option   This option should be set before shipping from Rackable Systems  but may  need to be reset if somehow changed after shipping        Communication parameters           Baud Rate       Configures the baud rate used to communicate with the Rackable Systems  Management Card  For this change to become effective reset or power   cycle the Management card  and be sure to switch the port settings in the  Di
6.        Trap Location    Trap Name    Function       Port access menu    Port login trap    Notify about any login action to the port access  menu  succeed and fail         Alert configuration    Port login trap    Notify about login to this specific port  succeed and  fail   only available if host mode is set to  Console  server          Alert configuration    Device connection trap    Notify about a change of the DTR signal line  only  available if host mode is set to  Console server          Alert configuration    Active detection trap    Notify about changes in the device s response to  the probe string  see also  Discovering and  Configuring the Digi Passport unit  on page 14   only available if host mode is set to  Console  server          Alert configuration    Dial in modem test trap    Notify about modem test  succeed and fail   only  available if host mode is set to  Dial in modem          Port event handling       Keyword notification trap          Notify about the occurrence of a keyword in the  port log  only available if host mode is set to   Console server             The MIBs for applicable to the Digi Passport unit are on the Passport CD  and at http   www digi com support  under Digi Passport utilities     Chapter 6 Alerts and Notifications    110    Configure SNMP v1 or v2    Configure SNMP v1 or v2   To configure the Digi Passport unit for SNMP do the following   Access the Digi Passport unit   s web interface   2  Select Network  gt  SNMP configuration    
7.       Save to flash Save  amp  apply    Chapter 5 Configure Ports 88    Configure Physical Serial Ports    6  A list of serial ports is displayed  Select the serial ports to add to the port  group  If Login on each port is enabled  then a login will be performed for  all selected ports        Port group configuration   1       serial   serial_config   portgrp      1 w           Group name   Test Group       Login on each port  Enable v   Ports   a anil    Check all   _ Uncheck all_     Port Title  1 CO Port Title  2 C  Port Title  3  O Port Title  5  O Port Title  9  O Port Title  13          Port Title  4  O Port Title  6 C  Port Title  7 Port Title  8  M  Port Title  10 Port Title  11 Port Title  12  O Port Title  14 Port Title  15 Port Title  16  O Port Title  17 CO Port Title  18 Port Title  19 Port Title  20  O Port Title  21 O Port Title  22 Port Title  23 Port Title  24  O Port Title  25 O Port Title  26 Port Title  27 Port Title  28  Oo   a  o  o  Oo       K                O Port Title  29 Port Title  30 Port Title  31 Port Title  32  O Port Title  33 Port Title  34 Port Title  35 Port Title  36  C Port Title  37 Port Title  38 C  Port Title  39 Port Title  40  O Port Title  41 Port Title  42 Port Title  43 Port Title  44  Port Title  45 Port Title  46 C Port Title  47 Port Title  48                                        Save to flash Save  amp  apply Cancel    After adding the serial ports to the group  they are listed on the Port group  configuration page in the Po
8.     Automatically Upgrade Firmware or Configuration using TFTP    Upgrade any file action  The syntax for action 3  file upgrade  is     action   file name  options  destination    Where     action    The action number to be performed  which is 3     file name   The path and the filename of the file on the TFTP server   options   Actions performed on the file     F  Forced copy  override existing file     Xx   Decompress file   Z   Unzip file     U  Upload file  this is the default option     destination  The directory on the Digi Passport unit in which to put the file     The specified files are downloaded every time the Digi Passport unit boots  and there is no reboot after downloading     For example   3 snmpd conf FU  tmp cnf    The file snmpd conf is copied from the TFTP server and placed into   tmp cnf  The file is used as is and the previous version is overwritten     Execute command action  The syntax for action 4  execute a command  is   action   command parameters    Where     action    The action number to be performed  which is 4     command  Any application on the Digi Passport unit that can be executed by the root  user     parameter   All parameters required by the application   For example   4 touch  tmp test    Chapter 18 System Administration 295    Reset the Digi Passport unit to Factory Defaults    Reset the Digi Passport unit to Factory Defaults    There are several ways to reset the Digi Passport unit to the factory  defaults  using the Factory reset but
9.     Enable D    Port Title   Port Title    Host Mode Configuration    Serial Port Parameters    Port Logging    IP Filtering  Authentication  Control  SNMP Trap Configuration    Port acc menu configuration   lt ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh   gt           3  Enter the desired parameters for each menu item     Port Parameters  1  Access the configuration menu     2  Select Serial Port Configuration  gt  port number or 0 or 0  Zero  for all  ports     Port Title  11 192  ois 7611 SSH RS232 9666 N 8   1    No  Port Title  12 192    7012 SSH RS232 9600 N 8 1 No  Port Title  13 192  7013 SSH RS232 9608 N 8 1 No  Port Title  14 192  7014 SSH RS232 9600 N 8 1 No  Port Title  15 192    7015 SSH RS232 9600 N 8 1 No  Port Title  16 192   1  7616 SSH RS232 9600 N 8 1 No    Enter port number to confiugre    t all port configuration  gt    lt ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh      Enable D     Port Title       Host Mode Configuration    Serial Port Parameters    Port Logging     IP Filtering     Authentication     User Access Control      SNMP Trap Configuration  Port access menu configuration       3  Enter the desired parameters for each menu item     Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface 242    Port Access Menu    Port Access Menu    Another default menu is the Port Access Menu  which is available to all  users     1  Access the configuration menu    2  Select Serial Port Configuration    3  Select 0 for all ports    4  Select Port access menu configuration     Select menu   
10.     Usage Notes    Xmanager software is available for a free 30 day evaluation download  from  http   www netsarang com download main html    Install the client software in a directory in the PATH of the Windows system   otherwise  update the path to include the base directory for the Xmanager  software     Make sure the X Window System is configured to allow for remote  connections from the Client workstation   s IP address     Full documentation of Xmanager capabilities is included with the evaluation  download     Chapter 11 Configure and Use freeKVM 180    About the Rackable Systems Management Card    Chapter 12 Rackable   Systems Management Card    About the Rackable Systems Management Card    Rackable   Systems manufactures a management card that is built into  some of their servers  This card interfaces between the Digi Passport unit  and the server   s serial port  In normal mode  it allows transparent  communication between the Digi Passport unit and the server  After  detecting an escape sequence  the card allows control functions from the  server independently of the main processor  including    Switching power on or off   Rebooting   Turning the status LED on or off   Programming the LCD panel   Reading the temperature from inside the server  Setting the power on delay    The Digi Passport unit offers a graphical web based user interface to  manage the Rackable Systems Management Card     Chapter 12 Rackable   Systems Management Card 181    Rackable Systems Manage
11.    8 bits None 1bit       Save 8 apply    Chapter 5 Configure Ports 82    Configure Physical Serial Ports    3  Set the Automatic Detection state  Off  Active  or Passive  for all or  selected ports     In the serial ports view  Serial Port  gt  Configuration   click All or  port number  Change the Automatic Detection setting from Off to Active     There are several other automatic detection parameters on the page  After  selecting Active or Passive for Automatic detection on the   Basic configuration page  these parameters are set to their defaults  as  shown below  the one exception from the defaults in this example is the  parameters below Use detected serial parameters  The default is an  empty list  but the example shows the port automatic detection list created  in step 2    For descriptions of the automatic detection options from Initial delay  through Use detected serial parameters  see  Advanced Automatic  Detection Settings  on page 93     Automatic detection  Device detection method     Active     Initial delay  5 minutes  Recheck interval  every  1440 minutes  Start time  hh mm ss    Probe string   x0D  Detected OS   Use detected port title  Enable     Port naming rule   OSS SHOSTNAMES ponts    Use detected type of console server  Enable    Use detected freeKVM  Enable v  Use detected serial parameters  Enable     Baudrate Data bit Parity bit Stop bit Probe string Wait time  All 8 bits None 1 bit  x0D 0  9600 8 bits Even 1 bit  x0D 3  4800 8 bits None 1 bit  xOD 3
12.    New    ronk    _   Add    Synchronization configuration    Save  amp  apply             7  Click Save  amp  apply     For more information about configuring access rights for specific users   see  Configure User Access Privileges  on page 144     To change the privileges of an Access list  see  Change the Privileges of  an Access List  on page 145     Chapter 2 Getting Started 41    Chapter 3    Compatible PC Cards  Install and Configure PC Cards    This chapter includes information on adding and configuring PC cards for   the Digi Passport 8  16  32  and 48 port units  PC card devices that can be  added to the the Digi Passport unit include a serial modem  compact flash  card  wireless LAN card  and a network LAN card     Compatible PC Cards    Chapter 3    All compact flash  and most simple serial modem cards should work with  the Digi Passport  but not all LAN  wireless LAN  or combo cards will  To  see a list of compatible cards that have been tested with the Digi Passport  unit  visit the Digi support site at http  Awww digi com passport      Install and Configure PC Cards 42    Add a Compact flash Card    Add a Compact flash Card    A PC card slot is located on the front panel of the Digi Passport unit  The  arrow in the following graphic indicates the PC card slot     Important  Before removing a PC card  always click the Stop card service  button  then Save  amp  apply        DIGI PASSPORT  gt     I TERMATEO omame sewven    PC card slot    Digi Passport 32 showr   
13.    To connect the Digi RPM power controller to the Digi Passport unit use the  straight thru cable provided with the Digi RPM unit  Plug one side into the     Console    port of the Digi RPM unit and the other into any port of the Digi  Passport unit  If connecting multiple power controllers  set up all of them as  described before proceeding  For details configuring the Digi RPM unit for  cascading  see  Cascading Multiple Digi RPM Units  on page 202    If using any other manufacturer of power controllers  see  Serial Port  Cabling  on page 302 for more information     Before proceeding  plug the power controller into an appropriate power  source and turn it on    The DIP switches on the Digi RPM unit are used for cascading  Make sure  that the dip switches of the first unit are set to off  For more information  about cascading  see  Cascading Multiple Digi RPM Units  on page 202     Chapter 14 Power Controller 193    Configure Power Controller    Configure Power Controller    Only system administrators can add a power controller although authorized  users may reconfigure outlets or serial ports     Configure the Serial Port Parameters to Match the Power Controller  1  Log in to the Digi Passport unit  username root  password dbps      2  Click Serial port  gt  Configuration   3  Select the port number of the serial port to connect to the power    controller   4  Select the Serial port parameters  Default serial port parameters are   Baud rate 9600  Data bits 8  Parity None 
14.    connect to a power controller    close current connection to port       Type p to power device off or r to reboot device   The Hot Key by default is Ctrl Z     This can be changed by going to Configuration  gt  Serial Ports  gt   Port    or All   gt  Host mode configuration  gt   set the Port Escape Sequence   gt   Save  amp  Apply     Note  This is also what is displayed when connecting directly to the port  using ssh or telnet without going through the web interface     Chapter 14 Power Controller 217    Pinouts for Third Party Power Controllers and Digi Passport    Pinouts for Third Party Power Controllers and Digi Passport  Pinouts for supported power controllers and the Digi Passport follow     An Ethernet cable can be used to connect the ServerTech Sentry Power  Controller to the the Digi Passport unit     Pinouts for RS 232 Port of ServerTech Sentry Power Controller       EIA 232    Pin Number Signal       1 RTS  DTR          Tx  GND  GND  Rx  DSR  CTS                   CO  N O  oO  A  WY  N                Pinouts for RS232 Port of BayTech RPC series       EIA 232    Pin Number Signal       1 DTR  GND  RTS  TX                Rx  N C  GND  DCD             CO  NI O  oO  A  WY  N                Chapter 14 Power Controller 218    Pinouts for Third Party Power Controllers and Digi Passport    Pinouts for console port of Digi Passport       EIA 232    Pin Number Signal       1 CTS  DSR  RxD  GND  DCD  TxD                      DTR  RTS       ooi NI    oO  BR  WwW  DY      
15.    cp  etc ssh sshd_config  usr2  3  In the in the  usr2 rc user script  add the following commands just above  exit 0   cp  a  usr2 inetd conf  etc inetd conf  while killall inetd 2 gt  dev null   do sleep 5   done   usr sbin inetd  4  Reboot   reboot    If the Digi Passport unit is reset to factory defaults the script file  usr2 rc user  is moved to  usr2 rc user old  and the default file rc user is restored     Send break from existing session with the Digi Passport unit    From a Telnet session    If the Telnet session was initiated from a UNIX command line Telnet client   issuing the Telnet escape sequence     control right_square_bracket  displays  the telnet gt  prompt     telnet gt send brk  Other Telnet clients often have a  send break  option     From an ssh session    If the session was initiated from an SSH session  enter the SSH break  character sequence  The default is  break  tilde break       break    To change the SSH break character sequence  go to Serial ports  gt   Configuration  gt  Host mode configuration  gt  SSH break sequence    Chapter 17 Command Line Interface 285    User Administration    User Administration    Add a user    Delete a user    Add  edit or delete users with the Digi Passport unit   s command line interface        The syntax for adding a user is    adduser  username   h  tmp   g groupid    s shellprogram   Where   groupid  Is an identifier for the three types of groups supported by the Digi Passport   500 or vadmin   Sys admin group I
16.    m Take over main session  read write   Presented only to users with read write  access upon entering a session    s Enter as a slave session  read only   Presented only to users with read write  access upon entering a session    b Send break  Not functional for sniff users    l Show last 100 lines of log buffer  Must enable logging for this option    d Disconnect a sniff session  Only functional to admin    a Send message to port user s   Not available to sniff users    r Reboot device using power switch  Only if power management is available on  this port    p Power device on off   Show only on or off  only if power  management is available on this port    x Close current connection to port  Closes the sniff session connection             Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface    255       Authentication    Authentication  1  Access the configuration menu   2  Select Serial port configuration     3  Select an individual port number or 0  zero  for all ports  gt   Authentication     4  Select Authentication type     Select menu    Network Configuration  Serial Po onf iguration  Clustering nf iguration  Power Controller  PC Card Configuration  System Status  amp  Log   em Administration  Save Changes  Exit without Saving  Exit and Apply Changes    Exit and Reboot  ENTER gt  Refresh    we CONTOUR     fAssignedIP Port   Title     Title RS232 9600 N 8 1 No  Title RS232 9600 N 8 1 No  Title RS232 9600 N 8 1 No  Title RS232 9600 N 8 1 No  Title RS232 9600 N 8 1 No  Title RS232 
17.    root             Chapter 1    Network  IP configuration  SNMP configuration  Dynamic DNS configuration  SMTP configuration  IP filtering configuration  NFS server configuration  Web server configuration  Ethernet configuration  TCP serivce configuration  PPP configuration  NIS configuration    Serial port   Clustering   Power controller  Peripherals   Custom menu   System status  amp  log  System administration    System statistics    Start device locating  Apply Changes   Login as a different user  Logout   Reboot    Introduction    IP configuration     network   ip        DIG  PASSPORT D gt        IPv6 Enable Disable   IP configuration  1    IP mode    IP address   Subnet mask   Default gateway     Enable Disable secondary IP   IP configuration  2    IP mode     Disable 9     static IP      10 4 102 55  255 255 0 0  10411    Disable E    Disable          Reuse old IP at bootup time on DHCP  failure     Use Manual DNS     Primary DNS   Secondary DNS  optional         Disable E  Enable H  10 10 8 62  10 10 8 64          Save to flash   Save  amp  apply       Cancel             15    Configuration User Interface Options for Digi Passport    Configuration Menu    The root user and system administrator have full access to the  configuration menu from a Telnet or SSH session or a serial connection  through the console port  Functionality is similar to the web interface  with  the exception of custom menus  which can be created only from the web  interface  The configuration me
18.    serial   serial_connect  Peer  Allpeers    Port title      Port access menu connection   Port access menu connection  Individual port connection   Status Port  Title  of User Comments    Port Title  1  Port Title  2  Port Title  3  Port Title  4     lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt     PUNE  9000    Serial Terminal Connection   V  View Port Log    5 Port Title  5  6 Port Title  6  7 Port Title  7  8 Port Title  8  9 Port Title  9  10 Port Title  10  11 Port Title  11  12 Port Title  12  13 Port Title  13  14 Port Title  14  15 Port Title  15  16 Port Title  16     lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt        ge00000000000    3  Click on the title of the port to which the Windows Server 2003 console  port is connected     If support for  Windows Server 2003  and  Rackable Systems Manage   ment Card  is selected  a menu for selecting one of the two functions is  displayed    4  Use the Digi Passport unit   s GUI to perform SAC functions  The  following table describes attributes of the controls on the GUI                 Field Description  Connect Connects to the SAC console port via the command line interface   Restart Reboots the Microsoft Server 2003   Shutdown Shuts down the Microsoft Server 2003     Caution  Selecting Shutdown swit
19.   115200 8 bits None 1 bit 30  57600 8 bits None 1 bit  x0D 30       4  Click Save  amp  apply     Chapter 5 Configure Ports    83    Configure Physical Serial Ports    5  Start automatic detection on one or all ports     If the Device detection method was set to Active  automatic detection  is performed with the output messages of device  The Digi Passport  unit performs serial parameter detection using the settings in the port  automatic detection list     If the Device detection method was set to Passive  automatic  detection is performed using the port log     Important  Passive detection first detects parameters using the port  log  Before setting the Device detection method to Passive  make sure  the serial port parameters are correctly set and to enable Port logging   see  Configure Port Logging  on page 57     To start automatic detection manually  go to the Advanced Automatic  detection settings  select Serial port  gt  Configuration  gt  All or   port number  gt  Advanced Configuration  gt  Automatic detection   Click the Start Now button at the bottom of Automatic detection page   In this case  automatic detection is performed according to the selected  Device detection method     Automatic detection       Chapter 5 Configure Ports      serial   serial_config   ports    All       auto_detect    Apply all ports in a group  All ports      Basic configuration   Port management   Automatic detection  Device detection method  Active     Initial delay  5 minutes  Recheck
20.   2  Under the Serial Port heading  click Configuration     3  On the Ports configuration page  go to the Port title and Listening TCP  port settings at the bottom of the page  as shown below  Enter the Port title  and the Listening TCP port to use  and click Add     Configuration    serial   serial_config    Port access menu configuration    Port group configuration    Port automatic detection configuration    Ports configuration  No  Group Title  NONE Port Title  NONE Port Title    NONE Port Title    NONE Port Title  3  NONE Port Title  4    Configure Remote Ports    Mode Port Protocol Serial Settings    c5  cs  cs  cs  CS    7001 Telnet  7001 Telnet  7002 Telnet  7003 Telnet  7004 Telnet       Port title   PortServer TS2       Listening TCP port   7051             Save  amp  apply    Chapter 5 Configure Ports    9600 N 8 1 NO  9600 N 8 1 NO  9600 N 8 1 NO  9600 N 8 1 NO  9600 N 8 1 NO   To add a remote port     fill in these fields and  click Add     103    Configure Remote Ports    4  The serial port Basic configuration page is displayed  with several  additional parameters for configuring remote ports     Basic configuration      serial   serial_config   ports   5      basic    Basic configuration                Enable Disable this port     Enable v   Host mode     Console server v     Listening TCP port  1024 65535     7051   Protocol     Telnet v   Automatic detection     Off  vi   Port title   PortServer TS 2   Remote port destination IP   0 0 00 aoa por       Remote 
21.   Circuit breaker condition  RMS voltage  RMS  current  and Max current detected     The Clear button resets the Max current detected to 0 0 amps  From this  screen click Outlets     3  Select the outlet number to manage  This screen shows that all the  outlets are powered on and outlet 3 is rebooting  Therefore  the Backup  Tape Device is power cycling     Power controller management   DIGI RPM on Port 8    Power controller  Outlets    Outlet Port  ON 1 1  ON 2 2  Rebooting 3    Title Unit  Outlet   Sun Server 0 1  Sun Server Backup 0 2  Backup Tape Device 0 3    Power off   Reboot      Power on    Environmental Sensor  None  None  None  None       4  Select the desired action for the outlet  Power on  Power off  or Reboot     Chapter 14 Power Controller 201    Cascading Multiple Digi RPM Units    Cascading Multiple Digi RPM Units    The Digi RPM power controllers can be cascaded when used with the Digi  Passport unit    The DIP switches on the front panel of the Digi RPM allow configuring  unique identities  ID  to the Digi RPMs so they can be identified  In a  cascaded environment each unit has to be configured to a unique ID    To cascade the Digi RPM units  connect a serial port of the Digi Passport  unit to the Console Port of the first Digi RPM unit using a straight thru  cable  Connect the    Cascade    Port of the first Digi RPM unit to the     Console    Port of the second     Here is an example of two cascaded Digi RPM units connected to a Digi    Passport unit  No
22.   ON  ON    Port    48  48  48  48  48  48  48  48  48  48  48  48  48  48       Outlet Port Title o ean   3 None None Oo   4 None None Oo   5 None None Oo     6 None None Oo   7 None None Oo   8 None None Oo   9 9 Port Title  9 o     10 None None Oo   11 None None Oo   12 None None Oo    13 None None Oo     14 None None Oo   15 None None Oo   16 None None Oo    From this page you can manage individual outlets or manage a group of  outlets     Manage individual outlets    1  Select the outlets from the list   2  Select Power on  Power off or Reboot     Manage a group of outlets    1  Select the power group from the drop down list   2  Select Power on  Power off or Reboot     Associate Power outlets with specific serial ports    Go to Serial Port  gt  Configuration    1  Choose Advanced Power Control Configuration    Choose the serial port that you want associated with a power outlet   Choose the power outlet to associate    Click Add    If there are multiple outlets  add the next outlet     woe ey    Chapter 14 Power Controller 214    Third Party Power Controllers    6  Click Save  amp  Apply        serial   serial_config   ports      19  gt      power    Basic configuration       Port management   Apply all ports settings  Automatic detection  Port title   Host mode configuration  freekVM configuration  Serial port parameters  Port logging  Authentication   User access control  Alert configuration  Power control configuration       Port  Manufacturer Title Action  No power c
23.   System Security  Password Security  Force heightened     System Security Settings    System security settings include     SNMP  The Digi Passport unit allows using Get and Set commands for  easy remote configuration and monitoring  Get and Set commands are  configured individually using the Network  gt  SNMP Configuration  interface     This option provides a simple method for globally disabling any SNMP  queries   Traps always can be sent if they are configured   In the Default  configuration  SNMP is disabled    Discovery  ADDP   Enables disables the Advanced Digi Discovery  Protocol  ADDP   While this is convenient for initial discovery of units on  the network  this service is often disabled when the system is ready for  production  unless the system is deployed on a controlled LAN     Telnet  Disabled by default  this feature can be enabled afterward if the  customer does not require encrypted connections     SSH  Usually remains enabled  in some environments  however   access is allowed only by a totally out of band connection  hard wired  serial  dial up modem  or both   In such situations  the Ethernet  connection is used only for reports and alerts     SSHv1  SSHv1  Secure Shell Version 1   SSHv1 uses server and host  keys to authenticate systems  This service is disabled by default     HTTP  Enables disables access to the Digi Passport using the Web  interface  By default  HTTP is redirected to HTTPS     HTTPS  Enables disables access to the Digi Passport using th
24.   and by Port Designator  p    Connections  made via the t  construction will be made to the first port with that title  in  the case of duplicate titles  Connections made via the p  construction will  allow explicit connection to any port   The p  option can designate ports in the following format    Rpeer_number   Sunit_number   P  port_number  where peer_number is the peer number  unit_number is the slave unit  number  and port_number is port number   For example     http   192 168 12 8 connect asp t any unique port title   anywhere in the cluster     ttp   192 168 12 8 connect asp p 1  This Peer   Port 1   ttp   192 168 12 8 connect asp p R2P1  Peer 2   Port 1     tp   192 168 12 8 connect asp p R2SOP1  Peer 2   Port 1     lave 0 means the master     ttp   192 168 12 8 connect asp p R2S4P1  Peer 2   Slave unit 4  Port 1                                         h  h  h  S  h          Chapter 15 Port Clustering 234    Connect to a Port via SSH  Users can also access ports using ssh console by including the t  or p     Connect to Peers          option    For example    ssh root t any unique port title 192 168 12 8  where 192 168 12 8 is any  peer    ssh root p 1 192 168 12 8  192 168 12 8   s local port 1    ssh root p R2P1 192 168 12 8  Peer 2 port 1    ssh root p R2S0P1 192 168 12 8   ssh root p R2S4P1 192 168 12 8  Peer 2 Slave 4 port 1    ssh root 15064 192 168 12 8  Socket  including socket on a slave via peer        Add Ports of Peers or Slaves to the Custom Menu    Use
25.   apply Cancel    v  v          Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface 249    IP Filtering Rules    Configure Network IP Filtering    This table describes the IP filtering rules                                                        IP  Filtering Description  Rule   1 Defines SSH access to the Digi Passport unit  port 22    The Normal option specifies that the rule applies to all addresses listed   The rule says to Accept traffic from these addresses for Port 22    2 Defines Telnet access to the Digi Passport unit  port23    The Invert option specifies that the rule applies to all addresses except  those listed   The rule says to Drop traffic from all addresses not listed    3  4 5 Define access to the Digi Passport unit using HTTP  port 80    Rule 3 blocks all traffic   Rule 4 allows access from IP address 192 168 1 0   Rule 5 allows access from IP address 192 168 2 0   Input format  Allowable Hosts B Host IP  aria Subnet mask  Address  Any host 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0  192 168 1 120 192 168 1 120 255 255 255 255  192 168 1 1   192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0  192 168 1 254  192 168 0 1   192 168 0 0 255 255 0 0  192 168 255 254  192 168 1 1   192 168 1 0 255 255 255 128  192 168 1 126  192 168 1 129   192 168 1 128 255 255 255 128  192 168 1 254    Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface    250    Configure Network IP Filtering from the Configuration Menu    Configure Network IP Filtering    To configure the Digi Passport unit for Network IP filtering  do the following     1  Access the
26.   available  Other alternatives include custom menus and direct access to the  port via IP address or socket number  For more details about custom menus   see  Custom and Default Menus  on page 157     In the web interface  the Port Access menu configuration page configures  the basic options for the Port Access Menu  including the socket  protocol  and  authentication for using this feature  To access this page  go to   Serial port  gt  Configuration  gt  Port access menu configuration     The Login on port access setting controls whether a login is forced whenever  a user accesses the port  Enable means a login is forced  Disable means that  the access rights from the user logged to the port access menu are inherited     Port access menu configuration    serial   serial_config   pam    Port Access Menu    Enable v   Enable Disable assigned IP address  Disable vi  Listening TCP port  1024 65535   7000       Protocol  Telnet            Inactivity timeout  1 3600 seconds  O for  499   second s   unlimited    Quick connect via  Web applet            Web applet encoding  English  latin1   v   Web applet size  Columns lo    Rows  Login on port access  Enable  vi    Authentication  Authentication method  Local             Alert configuration  Email alert configuration  Email alert for port login  Disable          SNMP trap configuration  Port login trap  Disable                   Save  amp  apply    Chapter 5 Configure Ports 86    Configure Physical Serial Ports    Port Group Conf
27.   gt Config  gt  Port   gt Copy config       Port logging    Authentication    User access control    Alert configuration  Copy port configuration  Update port title    Disable     Update assigned IP address  Disable wl  Update listening port   Disable   al  Update port log file name   Disable     Copy to   es ood 2  O Port Title  2 C Port Title  3 O Port Title  4 C Port Title  5  C Port Title  6 Port Title  7 OPort Title  8 Port Title  9    Chapter 5 Configure Ports    Copy port configuration     C Port Title  10  C Port Title  14    C Port Title  11  Port Title  15    C Port Title  12  Port Title  16    Port Title  13    65    Configure Physical Serial Ports    About Basic and Advanced Serial Port Settings    Basic configuration settings     Basic configuration  ena terial   Basic configuration  Enable Orsable thes port  RealPort support    Host mode    Listerung TCP port  1024 AAS  ass 700    Automatic Getechon  Port ttle   Serial port parameters  freeKVM configuration  Authenicabpon   User access control    Advanced configuration         Save to fash    Save  amp  apply    Besides using the quick start procedure that applies to all serial ports   serial port settings can be modified from their factory defaults  The Digi  Passport unit has two levels of serial port configuration settings     e Basic configuration  Basic serial port settings needed for all ports   e Advanced configuration  The complete set of serial port settings     To Illustrate  here are examples of the 
28.   line     e If logging in as admin  the configuration menu is automatically  displayed   2  At the command prompt  enter configmenu  The configuration menu  follows the layout of the web interface      root Digi_Passport    J   configmenu    Welcome to Digi Passport 16 configuration page   Current time   64 18 2606 14 21 48 F W REU      Serial No    ppi6proto   6616 6661 MAC addr Ceth  gt   66 46 9D 22 DE  IP addr   Ceth  gt    16 4 162 55      Network     Serial port     Clustering     Power controller      Peripherals     System status  amp  log     System administration    Stop device locating    Chlelp   slave   Lalpply   el xlit  OMMAND  lt Display HELP   help gt  gt        Navigating in the Configuration Menu    To choose items from the configuration menu  enter the number of the  menu item  To move back a menu  press the ESC key  Sometimes only  one menu item is presented  however  that single menu item has two or  more options that have to be configured     Saving Changes  The save command   s ave  saves changes to flash memory only     Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface 239    Configure SSH    1  Select Serial Port Configuration  gt  port number or 0  zero  for all    ports     Configure SSH    2  Select Host mode configuration  gt  Protocol  gt  SSH     Title i Al CS 6 6  Title 2  Title 3  Title 4  Title S   Tit let6  Title    Title 8  Title    Title i    Title i1  Title i2  Title i3  Title i4  Title iS   A Title i6   ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  More  Chlelp  
29.   y  1 out of 1 certificate requests certified  commit   y nly       Write out database with 1 new entries  Data Base Updated  Certificate   Data   Version  3  0x2   Serial Number  1  0x1   Signature Algorithm  md5WithRSAEncryption    Issuer  C US  ST Minnesota  L Minneapolis  O Digi International   CN Digi International    Validity  Not Before  Oct 6 09 39 59 2003 GMT  Not After   Oct 6 09 39 59 2013 GMT    Subject  C US  ST Minnesota  L Minneapolis  O Digi International   CN Digi Passport    Subject Public Key Info        Public Key Algorithm  rsaEncryption  RSA Public Key   1024 bit        Signed certificate is in newcert pem    Certificate Management    5  Verify that the signed certificate  newcert pem  is generated       ls  demoCA key pem newcert pem newreq pem req pem    Make Certificate for the Digi Passport Unit    1     Remove headings in newcert pem file      cd  work openssl 0 9 7c CA     cp newcert pem server pem     vi server pem   Certificate    Data    Version  3  0x2    Serial Number  1  0x1    Signature Algorithm  md5WithRSAEncryption    Issuer  C US  ST Minnesota  L Minneapolis  O Digi International   CN Digi Passport    Validity  Not Before  Oct 6 09 39 59 2003 GMT  Not After   Oct 6 09 39 59 2013 GMT  Subject  C US  ST Minnesota  L Minneapolis  O Digi    ao    International  CN Digi Passport  Subject Public Key Info              Public Key Algorithm  rsaEncryption  RSA Public Key   1024 bit           Removing above lines        Concatenate file key pem t
30.  0 0 0 TCP     22  2   all  Normal     0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TCP     443 ACCEPT y   Remove    all Normal     0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TCP     80 ACCEPT Y    Remove    all Normal     0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TCP     23 DROP    Remove    ACCEPT       3  4    all Normal    TCP v          Save to flash Save  amp  apply Cancel    Settings include     Interface  The name of the network interface through which a packet is  received  The name can be one of these values     e ethO  The default Ethernet interface of the Digi Passport unit   e eth1  The secondary interface added by using a PC card or wireless  e all  Both interfaces   Option  Determines that the rule will be applied to the IP address Mask  specified or its inverse  that is  the rule will be applied to all except those  specified    e Normal  applied to the hosts that are included   e Invert  applied to the hosts that are excluded    IP address Mask  Specifies the host range by entering base host IP  address followed by   and subnet mask  The host range can be one of  the following scenarios by changing the value     e Only one host of a specific IP address  e Hosts on a specific subnet  e Any host       Specified host range Input format       Any host 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0       192 168 1 120    192 168 1 120 255 255 255 255       192 168 1 1   192 168 1 254    192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0       192 168 0 1   192 168 255 254    192 168 0 0 255 255 0 0       192 168 1 1   192 168 1 126    192 168 1 0 255 255 255 128          192 168 1 129   192 168 1 25
31.  1 NO       62    Configure Physical Serial Ports    2  Before connecting any serial devices to the Digi Passport unit   configure the automatic detection feature     Automatic detection allows the Digi Passport unit to automatically detect  and recognize attached devices  The Digi Passport unit sends a set of  automatic detection criteria  including sets of serial parameters anda  probe string  default is  lt  Enter  gt    and analyzes the response     On the Configuration page  click Port automatic detection configura   tion  Create a port automatic detection list  which is a set of entries of  common serial port characteristics such as baud rate  data  parity  stop  bits  and other values for the devices that are attached to the Digi Pass   port unit  The entries in the port automatic detection list are used as  probe criteria when Automatic Device Recognition is activated and the  serial ports are tested  For more information on Automatic Detection set   tings  see  Configure Automatic Detection  on page 77     Here is a sample port automatic detection list     Port automatic detection configuration      serial   serial_config   port_autodetect       Port automatic detection list    Baudrate Databit Parity bit Stop bit Probe string Wait time sec     115200      8bits   None    Iba   30 Remove    57600    8bits    None    iba    30 Remove    9600   Sbit     None   Ibi   30 Remove    All v S8bits    None    iba    30    Remove    New  All v Sbits    None    Ibi    Add      
32.  168 for more information     Advanced Serial Port Parameters  Serial port parameters is a link to the serial parameters for a port  When  attaching a serial device to the Digi Passport unit   s serial port  the serial port  parameters must match  The serial ports by default are enabled  allowing full  access to the port     Advanced serial port parameters include     UART type  The type of UART  Universal Asynchronous Receiver   Transmitter  in use to control the the Digi Passport unit   s interface to its  attached serial devices  On this page  UART type is read only     Baudrate  The baud rate for the serial port in bits per second  The default  is 9600     Data bit  The bits that make up the transmitted data over the serial port   Usually  seven or eight data bits are grouped together  Each group of data  bits in a transmission is preceded by a start bit and followed by an optional  parity bit as well as one or more stop bits  The default is 8 bits     Parity bit  The parity used with transmitted data over the serial port   e None  No parity    e Even  Even parity    e Odd  Odd parity    The default is none     Stop bit  The number of stop bits per character to use on the serial port   The value used here must match the setting on the device connected to  this port  Use 1 or 2 stop bits  The default is 1 bit     Flow control  The kind of flow control is used on the serial port   e None  No flow control    e XON XOFF  Software flow control  Xon Xoff    e Hardware  Hardware
33.  17 test 0  lt  Not used  gt     5  From the freeKVM connection pulldown list  select Enable     Then  from the Client program pulldown list  select the VNC Client  program     6  Adjust the VNC socket screen number  if necessary  The default is 1   7  Click Save  amp  apply     Chapter 11 Configure and Use freeKVM 174    Use freeKVM with VNC Protocol    Connect to a System through freeKVM using VNC    When connecting through the Connection window  and a freeKVM  connection is configured  these things are displayed     e The terminal monitor button  which connects to the serial console     e A mouse button  next to the monitor icon   which connects to the  freeKVM graphical interface        serial   serial_connect    Serial port connection    Peer   All peers    port title      Port access menu connection  Port access menu connection  Individual port connection  Status Port  Title  of User Comments  1 Port Title  1 o  lt  Not used  gt   2 Port Title  2 in   lt  Not used  gt   3 Port Title  3 in   lt  Not used  gt   4 Port Title  4 0  lt  Not used  gt   5 Port Title  5 in   lt  Not used  gt   6 Port Title  6 in   lt  Not used  gt      serial Terminal Connection  E freekvm     V  View Port Log    Port Title  7    7  lt  Not used  gt   8 Port Title  8   9   1     lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt     Port Title  9  A Pnrt Tite  10    BO    To connect through freeKVM using VNC   1  Click on the mouse button   2  Click OK in each of the three Java confirmati
34.  3  Click Save  amp  apply     4  Enable Automatic Detection for all ports  In the serial ports view   Serial Port  gt  Configuration   click All to select all ports  Change the  Automatic Detection setting from Off to Active  See  Apply All Ports  Settings  on page 64 for more information on this feature of applying  configuration changes to all ports     5  Click Save  amp  apply     Chapter 5 Configure Ports 63    Configure Physical Serial Ports    Apply All Ports Settings  As another aid in configuring serial ports  the Digi Passport unit supports  managing all ports simultaneously  This feature is referred to as  Apply all ports settings  If configuration changes are made to a port and  Apply all ports settings is enabled  the changes are automatically applied  to all ports  Ports can also be excluded from this Apply all ports settings  feature  When changing a parameter for all ports  all settings of the  complete page are applied to all ports     Enable disable the Apply all port settings feature for all ports  To enable or disable the Apply all ports settings feature for a port     1  Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface     2  Under the Serial Port heading  click Configuration     On the Ports configuration page  select All     4  Atthe top of the Basic configuration page  for the Apply all ports ina  group setting  select Enable to enable the Apply all ports settings  feature for all ports  o
35.  D 3   0 4    Environmental Sensor   None      Environmental Sensor    Action    Remove      Add    Port    Serial port     Outlet title     User access control    User Power access    lt  lt Everyone gt  gt  IV    Gilligan B    Iv  Save to flash   Save  amp  apply   Cancel      None  None  None  None    None  None  None  None    200    Power Controller Management    Power Controller Management    The Power Controller Management option changes outlet settings and  provides a quick update of the power controller status     1  Under Power Control click Management     Power controller management    Power controller  Port  Manufacturer  8 DIGI RPM    Title Outlets  DIGI RPM on Port 8 8    Status  Connected       The Power controller management screen gives a quick view of all the  power controllers and the current status of the connection  The Port    and Manufacturer fields are a link to the specific power controller  statistic page  which displays information for the power controller  If the  status is Disconnected  the links are inactive     2  Click either the Port   or the power controller title     Power controller management   DIGI RPM on Port 8    Power controller    Model   RPMS   Alarm threshold   30 0 amps   Temperature   86 0   F  30 0   C    Circuit breaker   Good   RMS voltage   120 0 volts   RMS current   0 0 amps   Max current detected   0 0 amps Clear      Outlets       The Power controller statistics screen is displayed to show the Alarm  threshold  Current temp
36.  Date time       modem cnf    Internal modem         network          Directory with all network config files       Chapter 17 Command Line Interface    282                            File Name Description  ccard cnf PC Card  security cnf Security profile  syslog ng cnf Syslog ng  system cnf System log       User Storage Space    The Digi Passport unit comes with 16 megabytes of user storage space  This  storage space can be used to store custom scripts  The location is    usr2  Custom scripts such as simple commands  are simply dropped into   usr2  If a file needs to be edited  copy the file into usr2 rc usr  kill the  process  then restart the process from the new file  Scripts from the user  storage may be created to run during boot after the network is up  The  following are some examples of various ways to create a script stored in the    user storage space       Saving IP tables options permanently  e Changing RADIUS socket ports    e Limiting root access to the console on Digi Passport products    e Sending a break       Example Scripts  Example Scripts    Save IP tables options permanently  Add the following command in the  usr2 rc user script file just above exit 0   Disabling Telnet is just shown as one example     1  Create a new script file  usr2 run user that includes the desired  commands     iptables  A INPUT  p tcp   dport 23  j DROP  2  Run the following command to make the script executable  chmod 755  usr2 run user  3  Add the following command in the  usr2
37.  Digi Passport unit  a compact flash card  a syslog server  or an NFS server   If the memory is used for port logging  all data is cleared when the system   s  power is turned off  Alarm keywords can be defined for each serial port  for  sending email alerts or SNMP traps to enable unattended serial data  monitoring  To configure a serial port for port logging in console server  mode  follow these steps     1     oo  gt  oS    Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface     Under the Serial port heading  click Configuration   Select All or the desired port number    Click Advanced    For the Port logging setting  select Enable    The port logging settings are displayed     Port logging      serial   serial_config   ports    4      partlog          Port management   Apply all ports settings  Automatic detection  Port title   Host mode configuration  freeKVM configuration  Serial port parameters    Port logging       Part logging  Enable     Logging direction  Server output  v  Port log storage location  Memory      Port log to SYSLOG server  Disable v   Port log buffer size  50 KB  Port logging filename option  Specify below  g    Port logging filename  null as default file t  name portxxdata    port  data  Time stamp to port log  Disable      Show last 10 lines of a log upon connect    Disable      Port log view      Port event handling  Authentication  User access control    Alert configuration    Chapter 4 
38.  Digi Passport unit assumes the serial  port is connected to an external modem and is waiting for a dial in connection  from a remote site  When dialing in using terminal applications  the Digi  Passport unit accepts the connection as a Telnet or SSH client to a pre defined  server  This mode is most frequently used to use modems to access servers  on a network     Connection request    age ae terminal  y  gt  w    terminal     lt A            PC Modem       Chapter 5 Configure Ports 74    Configure Physical Serial Ports    PPP Mode    PPP  Point to Point Protocol  host mode configures the Digi Passport unit to  support dial in PPP connections to it     pi icit Y       Listening TCP Port    The listening TCP port is the TCP network port specified when connecting  directly to the port using Telnet or SSH     Chapter 5 Configure Ports 75    Protocol setting    Configure Physical Serial Ports    The Protocol setting configures the communication protocol used over the  serial port  There are three protocol options  RawTCP  SSH  and Telnet     e Select SSH when logging in from an SSH client program to access a port   e Select RawTCP when connecting directly to a TCP socket   e Select Telnet when logging in from a Telnet client program and accessing    the ports     To select the correct protocol  use the Host mode configuration page in the    web interface     Host mode configuration         serial   serial_config   ports   4  y     hostmode       Port management   Apply all ports
39.  In the MIB II system objects section  enter MIB II information as needed  and enable authentication traps by selecting Yes under  EnableAuthenTrap  Enable other SNMP traps as needed    Important  Trap values override all other configuration information     meaning all other authentication failure traps can be disabled with this  setting     1     3     sysContact  Identity of the contact person managing the MIB II  system     sysName  The name identifying the system  By convention  this is  the fully qualified domain name of the Digi Passport unit  for  example  DigiPassport companyname com    sysLocation  The physical location of the unit  for example  Room  264 or Engineering Lab     sysService  Read only   A series of values  separated by commas   indicating the set of services the system provides  By default  the  Digi Passport unit only supports Application  7  service level     EnablePowerOnTrap  Whether the SNMP agent generates a trap  each time the Digi Passport unit is started    EnableAuthenTrap  Whether the SNMP agent process is permitted  to generate authentication failure traps    EnableLinkUpTrap  Whether the SNMP agent generates a trap  each time the network connection comes up     EnableLinkDownTrap  Whether the SNMP agent generates a trap  each time the network connection goes down     EnableLoginTrap  Whether the SNMP agent generates a trap for  each login     Enter Access control settings     IP Address  Defines what applications can access the Digi  Passp
40.  Jall    9666    N 8    1 NO  9666 N 8    1 NO  9666 N 8   1 NO  9666 N 8    1 NO  9666 N 8    1 NO  9666 N 8    1    NO  9666 N 8    1 NO  9666    N 8    1 NO  9666 N 8    1 NO  9666 N 8   1 NO  9666 N 8   1 NO  9666 N 8   1 NO  9666 N 8    1 NO  9666    N 8    1 NO  9666    N 8    1 NO  9666 N 8    1    NO       3  Use the ESC key to return to the main configuration menu   4  Select Exit and apply changes     Add  Edit  and Remove Users    1  Select System administration  gt  User administration and then    choose an operation to perform  Add  Remove  or Edit   2  Configure the user as required     Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface    240    Add and Configure a PC Card    Add and Configure a PC Card    To add a modem card  compact flash card  wireless LAN card  or network  card to the Digi Passport unit using the configuration menu  do the    following     1  Access the configuration menu   1 Network Configuration  5    Peripherals      2  Select PC Card configuration       Power Controller      PC Card Configuration    System Sta    System Administration    Save Changes    Exit without Saving    Exit and Apply Changes    Exit and Reboot   lt ENTER gt  Refresh    gt 5    Currently configured PC card      Select menu  1  Change card configuration    2  Stop the card service to disable or remove card      Configuring a new card    Insert new card and then press     lt none gt       CENTER  key    Now configuring card type  Please wait ttt  Press  ESC  key to stop card c
41.  Management Card  Disable v    Service processor   DRAC v    Enable Disable assigned IP address  Disable v    Listening TCP port  1024 65535   7050   Protocol   Telnet v    Inactivity timeout  1 3600 seconds  O for  100     second s   unlimited       i  Display port information  Disable v   Enable Disable port escape sequence   Enable il   Port escape sequence  Ci  z g    Port break sequence   break   Use comment  No w    Quick connect via  Web applet v    Web applet encoding  English  latint  x   web applet size  Columns  80   Rows  24    freeKYM configuration    Chapter 7 Service Processors       136    Dell Remote Access Controller  DRAC     6  Select Remote port parameters     Remote port parameters                      Destination IP address   192 168 1 16   Destination port  0 65535    59   Protocol   sso wy   SMASH     Enable v   Allow unattended continuous connection   Enable w     Automatic login  Enable v   User name  root   Password  new   PFF   Password  confirm    icussi   Reestablishment interval  5 seconds   Use a customizable script  Disable v    Port logging    Enter the remote port parameters    e Destination IP address  The address of the server to monitor   Generally this will be the address assigned to the DRAC  management channel    e Destination port  normally 22 for SSH or 23 for Telnet  but these  may vary on individual servers    e Protocol  The protocol to be used on the port  Normally  the  protocol is SSH  but Telnet or RawTCP can be used if enabl
42.  Mi    Connectto slave unit   Port access menu configuration  No  Enable Source port Destination port Protocol  1 V  50200  7000 Telnet   Individual port configuration       No  Enable Title at master unit Source port Dest port  i z Port Title  1    50201  7001  2 z Port Title  2 50202   7002  3 z Port Title  3  50203  7o03  4 z Port Title  4  50204  7004  5 z Port Title  5  50205 7005  6 7 Port Title  6 50206     7006  7 z Port Title  7  50207  7007  8 z Part Title  8  50208  7008  9 z Port Title  9  502093  7o09  10 v Port Title  10 50210 7010  11 7 Port Title  11 on Joun  12 z Port Title  12  o2 Jo  3    PotThe 3 bors  on  14 z Port Tite  14  50214 7014  15 wy PorTile i5 si  50215      75  16 a Port Title  16  5o16 7o  7  Pon Tite  17 borz  7o17  18 7 Port Title  18  50218  7o18  19 7 Port Title  19  50219 7019  20 z Port Title  20  50220  7o20  21 z Port Title  21 on Joz  22 7 Port Title  22  50222   sd 7022  23 7 Port Title  23  50223 7023  24 7 Port Title  24  5o24  7024  25 z Port Title  25  50225      7oz5  26 z Part Title  26  50226  702  27 z Port Title  27  50227  7027  28 7 Port Title  28  50228  7028  29 A Port Title  29  50223 7o29  30 z Port Title  30  50230 7o30  31 z PortTile 31  50231  7o31  32 v  PonTite 32      7032  33 v Port Title  33 7033  34 a Port Title  34 7034  35 7 Port Title  35 7035  36 z Port Title  36   7036  a7 7 Port Title  37  7037  38 7 Port Title  38 7038  39 7 Port Title  39 7039                                                            
43.  Pack  None  System date time  04 30 2003 20 31 04  GMT   Time since last restart  2 seconds   Control  Connect   Connect to Microsoft SAC console  Restart   Restart system  Shutdown   Shutdown system  Performance  Processes  Serial Port Log  IP Settings    Chapter 10 Microsoft SAC Support 163    Process for Setting Up Microsoft SAC Support    Process for Setting Up Microsoft SAC Support   Setup for the Digi Passport unit SAC support is a three step process    1  Set up the Windows Server 2003 for SAC support  To do this  ensure  that the COM port used for console traffic is properly set up  This  includes designating a COM port for console communication and  setting the port speed  baud  appropriately  For further information  please refer to Set Up the Windows Server 2003 Port below     2  Cable the console port on the Windows Server 2003 to the Digi  Passport unit   s port     3  Setup the Digi Passport unit for SAC support  See Set Up the Digi  Passport Unit for SAC Support Set Up the Digi Passport Unit for SAC  Support  on page 166     Chapter 10 Microsoft SAC Support 164    Set Up the Windows Server 2003 Port    Set Up the Windows Server 2003 Port  1  Sign on to the Windows Server 2003 as the administrator   2  Access the command line     3  Use the bootcfg command to redirect console traffic to the correct  COM port  The following is the command syntax and an example  See  the Microsoft documentation for additional information on the SAC  feature     Command Syntax  bo
44.  Search  Current local users    User name User group Shell  1 admin System admin Configuration menu  2 root Root CLI  Add Remove Unlock       4  Select the checkbox next to the user to be removed   5  Click Remove     6  Click OK at the prompt     Unlock a User Account    For users with the Enforce max password attempts setting enabled  in  System administration  gt  Security profile  gt  Enforce max password  attempts   and the user account was locked because the maximum  password attempts were entered  the user account can be unlocked     Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface     Log in as root or admin  The default password for root is dbps  for  admin  admin     3  Under System administration  select User administration  The  following screen is displayed     User administration     admin   user_admin                                     User name     User group   All group ag Locked  Search  Current local users    User name User group Shell  1 admin System admin Configuration menu  2 root Root CLI         Add J   Remove   Unlock            Chapter 2 Getting Started 39    User Administration    Add an Access List and Add Users to It    Chapter 2    Access lists are used to add rights to a single user or to multiple users at  the same time  In addition  multiple users can be grouped and assigned  one  some  or all these rights        Port access rights  e Port monitor rights     Power management right
45.  Stop bits 1  Flow control None    DTR behavior High when open  5  Click Save  amp  apply   6  Continue by adding the power controller     Add the Power Controller  1  Log in to the Digi Passport unit  username root  password dbps    2  Click Power Controller  gt  Configuration     Power controller configuration    Add power controller  Port   27  Manufacturer   DIGI RPM v    The number of cascaded units   1 x     Add controller      Power controllers  Port  Manufacturer Title Outlets Action  No power controller added          3  Select the port number of the serial port to connect to the power  controller s   manufacturer of the power controller  and the number of  units to be cascaded  1 means that one unit will be connected  that is   no cascading  The number of cascaded units cannot be changed later   Make sure all power controllers are connected before proceeding  The  default title is the manufacturer brand and the port number to which it is  connected  This title can be changed in step 5 if needed     4  Click Add controller     5  After the controller is detected automatically  correct the number of  ports  or edit the port title as needed     6  Click Save  amp  apply     7  Continue by setting the alarms and thresholds     Chapter 14 Power Controller 194    Set Alarms and Thresholds    Set Alarms and Thresholds  The Power Controller can be set to issue an alert via E mail notification or  an SNMP trap when environmental conditions exceed specifications        Power 
46.  Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  13 Port Title  13 cs 0 0 0 0 7013 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No    Remote port configuration  Title Mode Assigned IP Port Proto Remote settings                No remote port found       Click  Remove  button to remove the checked remote port profile     Add       Remote port title      3  Select the port to configure  then click the freeKVM link   In this  example  port 1 is selected   A window similar to this one opens   showing the serial port number and title            Move to           Serial port configuration   1  Windows Server  RDP        Enable Disable this port    Enable Disable this port   Enable    RealPort support   Disable v    Save to flash   Save  amp  apply   Cancel      Reset this port    Set this port as factory default      Port title   Apply all ports settings  Host mode configuration  Virtual KVM configuration  Serial port parameters  Port logging   Port IP filtering  Authentication   User access control  Alert configuration          Chapter 11 Configure and Use freeKVM 170    Use freeKVM with Remote Desktop Protocol    4  Click freeKVM configuration  This window is displayed     freeK  M configuration      serial   serial_config   ports    6 x     virtual_kym       Port management  Apply all ports settings  Automatic detection  Port title  Host mode configuration  freekVM configuration   No  Connection IP address Client Program Program path   Nothing   New Enable         User defined vi Add    Serial port parameters  Port logging  Authent
47.  The  card is automatically discovered and a configuration menu is displayed     PC card configuration    Currently configured PC card    Card type    PC card service    Configure the detected card    Detected PC card  Card type   Serial Modem Card  Model   Zoom PCMCIA V92 DataFax  New PC card is detected     Save to flash Save  amp  apply Cancel          3  Click Configure the detected card     PC card configuration  Currently configured PC card    Card type   Serial Modem Card Serial Modem Card  Model   Zoom PCMCIA V92 DataFax    Serial Modem Card configuration    Init string   qle0s0 2    Inactivity timeout  1 3600 sec  0 for    unlimited    0    PC card service       Stop card service       Detected PC card  Card type   Serial Modem Card  Model   Zoom PCMCIA V92 DataFax  Card service is successfully configured  Save the PC card service configurations     Save to flash Save  amp  apply       4  Edit any appropriate parameters and click Save  amp  apply     Chapter 3 Install and Configure PC Cards 46    Available options for system status an port logs  Chapter 4 System Status and Port Logging    This chapter describes the system status and port logs available for the  Digi Passport     Available options for system status an port logs    The Digi Passport unit provides four options for saving system status and  and port logs     e A syslog server   e An NFS server   e A removable flash storage device  PC card or USB   e The Digi Passport units memory    When memory is select
48.  The log file sizes shown in the    following table are maximum settings  See also  Configure System  Logging  on page 55                                               Digi System Port Log Total Memory  Passport Log  per port  Used  4 300K 800K 3 5M  8 400K  16 200K  32 100K  48 66K          Chapter 4 System Status and Port Logging    54    Configure System Logging    Configure System Logging  To configure the Digi Passport unit for system logging     1  Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface     2  Select System status  amp  log  gt  System logging  The system logging  settings are displayed        System logging     system   systemlog       System log storage location  enn     SYSLOG facility for system logging  Localo   System log buffer max size  300   System log buffer size  100 Ke  System log filename  messages  Automatic backup on mounting   Disable    Send system log by Email  Disable       System log view      Ec         Save to flash lI Save  amp  apply J   Cancel         3  Enter system log settings     System log storage location  Select the desired location for the  system log  The choices depend on what is enabled and or installed   The Digi Passport units memory choice is always available     System logging  Enable or Disable     System log storage location  Memory  Flash Media  or NFS  server     System log to SYSLOG server  Enable to store system logs to a  SYSLOG server     System log b
49.  Title  Port Title  Port Title  Port Title  Port Title  Port Title     G    G    G    G    G    G    G   a    Enter port number to conf iugre   lt ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh    gt          Enable Disable Port   Enable    Port Title   Port Title    Host Mode Configuration    Serial Port Parameters    Port Logging    IP Filtering    Authentication    User Access Control    Alert Configuration    Port access menu configuration   lt ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh   gt  8    Serial configuration      gt  All ports    User Permissions      Enable Disable Sniff Mode   Disable   lt ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh       Select enable disable sniff mode  lt  1   Enable  2   Disable  gt       Select a menu item and enter the desired parameters     When all parameters are entered  use the ESC key to return to the main  menu     Select Save changes     For information on entering a sniff session  see  View a Sniff Session  on  page 254     Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface 253    Configure and View Sniff Sessions    View a Sniff Session    A sniff user enters a sniff session by starting a Telnet session on a  specified port  In the following example  a sniff user uses Telnet to connect  to port 7 of the Digi Passport unit  From the command prompt enter the  following command     telnet 192 168 100 42 7007    1  Log in and enter your password   2  Enter the port escape sequence     Port Menu        b send break  d disconnect a sniff session  a send message to port u
50.  To install and configure the compact flash card on the Digi Passport unit     1   2        Insert the card into the PC card slot     Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface     Under the PC card heading  click Configuration   Click Configure the detected card  These settings are displayed      ATA IDE Fixed Disk Card configuration    e Total data size to be used  Enter the amount of memory to assign  to the compact flash card for configuration files     e Delete all files in ATA IDE Fixed Disk Card  Click Delete to clear  the compact flash card of all files        Format ATA IDE Fixed Disk Card  The options are EXT2 or FAT    formats  If it is necessary to format the card  select this option and  click the Format button     PC card configuration  Currently configured PC card    Card type   ATA IDE Fixed Disk Card  Model   TOSHIBA THNCF256MM  4   Size   256 MB   File system   vfat    ATA IDE Fixed Disk Card configuration       Total data size to be used  0 237 MB    237    Delete all files in ATA IDE Fixed Disk Card    Format ATA IDE Fixed Disk Card   EXT2 v    PC card service    Configure the detected card Stop card service                  Save to flash f Save  amp  apply f Cancel      5  Click Save to flash or Save  amp  apply     Chapter 3 Install and Configure PC Cards 43    Add a Network Card    Add a Network Card  To install and configure a network card on the Digi Passport unit  do the    Chapter 
51.  VNC Protocol             cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeneeeteeees 173  Connect to a System through freeKVM using VNC           ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 175   Use freeKVM with X Window System Protocol and XManager Software            176  Configure freeKVM with X Window System Protocol               ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 176  Connect to a system through freeKVM using Xmanager            ceceeeeeeeeeee 178   Web  Red irectioninic ccs cide Pe ees os et a et 178   Installing  Programs for freeKVM issssscnccectstinsse cece any teralycredent caedteaeptiand tedreedaeasete 179  Check software levels and install software as needed               ceeeeeeeeeee eee 179  Remote Desktop Protocol sec sicscdsise doc een sadeeady tenes ede tues Aectees eeenteeenteeaaee  179  MING ViIGWOR eee ok tere AOS ok el NN OS PN EA EE 180  PRITV APPA ON  sree iie Ree evens sas A aa de meena enone 180   Chapter 12 Rackable   Systems Management Card   About the Rackable Systems Management Card               cccceeeecseceeeeeeeesesnneaeees 181   Rackable Systems Management Card Configuration                 cccesssseeeeeeeeeeeeees 182   Configure Serial Port Communication Settings                 ccccssseeceeeeesseseeteeeeeeeeeees 182   Assign a POM NaM ercer ar T E E E E 182   Access Rackable Systems Management Card from Digi Passport GUI              183  Rackable Systems Management Card Properties and Controls                  185    Chapter 13 Configure Remote Dial In Access    Configure for Dial In Modem 
52.  by the SNMPv3 software  Delete  the spaces from the original engine ID     Trap receiver settings   1      network   snmp   trap     1         Trap receiver enable disable  M       IP address   10 9 101 2  User name  A    Security level    Auth Priv E      Authentication protocol    MD5 v    Authentication password  new    Authentication password  confirm    Privacy protocol    Privacy password  new     Privacy password  confirm    Engine ID     Version     Chapter 6 Alerts and Notifications       A      0x800x000x050x230x010     v3 vl       116    Configure Port Event Handling    Once an SMTP or SNMP server has been configured  it can be used to  send port related alerts and notifications  To configure a port for port event  handling  follow these steps  This procedure assumes that SMTP is  configured first  If not  see  Configure SMTP Alerts  on page 108     Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface     Select Serial port  gt  Configuration     Select a port to configure  then Advanced configuration  gt   Port logging  The port logging settings are displayed     For Port logging  select Enable     For Logging direction  select which port events should be included in  the log and how they are displayed     1     Click Save  amp  apply     Port logging      serial   serial_config   ports nk        portlog    Configure Port Event Handling    Server output  Output from the server only   User input  User inpu
53.  configuration   1  Port Title  1    Enable Disable this port  Port title   Apply all ports settings  Host mode configuration  Serial port parameters  Alert configuration     Email alert configuration     Email alert for dial in modem test     Enable S     Title of email   Modem test port 1  Recipient s email address   modemtest example com     SNMP trap configuration     Dial in modem test trap   Disable       Use global SNMP configuration   Disable  gt    Trap receiver settings      IP Address Community     0 0 0 0 public   0 0 0 0 public    Save to flash Save  amp  apply   Cancel      The title of the e mail and the address can be configured     To configure e mail notifications  a primary SMTP server must be  configured under Network  gt  SMTP configuration     By SNMP configuration       It is also possible to receive notifications using SNMP traps  When    using SNMP traps the global settings for IP address  Community    and Version can be used  or specified separately  The Trap MIB can  be downloaded from support digi com  select the product and go to    Diagnostics  Utilities and MIBs    6  Click Save  amp  apply     Chapter 13 Configure Remote Dial In Access    189    Add a PC Modem    Add a PC Modem    A PC card slot is provided on the front panel of the Digi Passport unit  To  install and configure the PC modem on the Digi Passport unit  do the  following     1   2     Insert the card into the PC slot located on the front of the device     Enter the IP address of t
54.  configuration menu     2  Select Network configuration  gt  IP filtering     s         S    1     2   3   4   5   6   re  8   9   a     lt ESC gt  Back   gt     we ODDANA WN e    elect menu   Network Configuration  Serial Port Configuration  Clustering Configuration  Power Controller   PC Card Configuration  System Status  amp  Log  System Administration  Save Changes   Exit without Saving   Exit and Apply Changes     Exit and Reboot    lt ENTER gt  Refresh    elect menu   IP configuration     SNMP configuration   Dynamic DNS configuration   SMTP configuration   IP filtering   SYSLOG server configuration   NFS server configuration  mver configuration   rnet configuration  TCP service configuration    Option  Invert  Invert  Normal  Normal  Normal  Normal      Telnet Console    Enabled    SSH Console    Enabled      Web Configuration   HTTP Disabled        Add a Rule    Remove a Rule  Edit a Rule      lt ENTER gt  Refresh       3  Select a menu item and enter the desired parameters for the menu    items     4  Use the ESC key to return to the main menu     5  Select    Save changes     Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface    251    Configure Port IP Filtering    Configure Port IP Filtering    To configure the Digi Passport unit for Port IP filtering  do the following     1     Access the configuration menu     2  Select Serial port configuration   3  Select port number or 0  zero  for all ports  gt  IP filtering     ex Telnet 143 191 3 9    Port Title  Port Title  Port Tit
55.  connection    Disable v    Port logging   Authentication    User access control  Alert configuration  IPMI configuration    e Destination IP  The address of the server to monitor  Generally  this  is the address assigned to the BMC  Baseboard Management  Controller      e Destination port  Normally  623 is the port used for IPMI  but this  may vary on individual servers     e Protocol  Select the protocol  RMCP  is the protocol used for SOL     e OEM type  Set to None in most cases  Use Intel IPMI 2 0 BMC only  if the server has an actual Intel 2 0 BMC     When done  click Save to Flash     Chapter 7 Service Processors 123    Intelligent Platform Management Interface  IPMI     4  From the main configuration page  select IPMI Configuration  The  IPMI configuration settings are displayed     IPMI configuration      serial   serial_config   ports   17     ipmi    Port management   Apply all ports settings  Port title   Host mode configuration  freeKVM configuration  Remote port parameters  Port logging  Authentication   User access control  Alert configuration   IPMI configuration    Destination IP  71 216 228 121  Destination port  623  User name  ljeffn    Password  new      Password  confirm      Sensor alert configuration       No  Sensor type Email alert SNMP alert  Nothing  New   El El    e Destination IP  The address of the server to monitor  Generally  this  is the address assigned to the BMC  Baseboard Management  Controller   For a remote port  this value is supplied 
56.  detection recheck  This  value is not a specific time of day  but rather the time elapsed after the  device is detected     Probe string  An ASCII string sent to the device to detect the operating  system and host name in use for the device  when automatic detection is  enabled set to the Active state  To include special characters in the probe  string  see page 96  If the automatic detection state is Passive  scripts are  run instead of sending a probe string  see page 96     Detected OS  When the operating system for the device connected to the  serial port is detected  it is displayed in this field     Use detected port title  If this option is enabled  the Port title will be set  automatically by the rules defined in the scripts   tmp cnf bin active_detect or  tmp cnf bin passive_detect script  See  page 96 for information about these scripts     Port naming rule  The naming convention for the port when the device is  detected  The default naming convention is  0S  HOSTNAME  port      This convention can be modified as needed     Use detected type of console server  If this option is enabled  the  Passport will detect the type of console and set the Type of console  server parameter to MS SAC console or Other automatically  The default  is Enable     Chapter 5 Configure Ports 93    Configure Physical Serial Ports    e Use detected freeKVM  If enabled  the Digi Passport unit detects the IP  address of the server connected to the serial port automatically and sets  paramet
57.  device is running   Find Blinks when the Activate Passport Locator LED  option is selected in the the Digi Passport unit   s  Web interface   On when firmware is being updated   Ethernet 100Mbps On when 100Base TX connection is detected   LINK On when connected to an Ethernet network   Act Blinks when there is activity on the Ethernet port        Chapter 19 Specifications and Certifications    301          Serial Port Cabling    Serial Port Cabling    The Digi Passport unit simplifies cabling  The RJ 45 8 pin configuration  matches all SUN and Cisco RJ 45 console port configurations  enabling  CAT 5 cabling without pinout concerns  Three DB 25 and one DB 9  adapters come in the package  A DB 25 male  a DB 25 female  and a DB 9  adapter support console management applications  A DB 25 male adapter  provides a modem connection  See the cable adapter information that  follows later in this chapter     Note  The cable length restrictions common to RS 232 cables apply to the  Digi Passport serial cable as well     Serial Port Pinouts    The Digi Passport unit uses an RJ 45 connector for serial ports  Pin  assignments are listed in the following table                       Pin Description  1 CTS  2 DSR  3 RxD  4 GND  5 DCD    Note  Inbound signal can also be  used as a second ground              6 TxD  7 DTR  8 RTS                Chapter 19 Specifications and Certifications 302    Cable Adapters and Pinouts    Cable Adapters and Pinouts    The Digi Passport unit comes with four ca
58.  flow control  RTS CTS    The default is None     DTR option  DTR  Data Terminal Ready  can be set on the serial port to  one of three settings  Always HIGH  Always LOW  or High when open   Setting the DTR to High when open keeps the DTR high if a TCP  connection is established  The default is High when open  When the host  mode is configured for dial in modem or dial in terminal server mode  the  DTR setting cannot be set by a user     Inter character Timeout  This setting is only available when the host  mode protocol is set for RawTCP  The parameter sets the time value for the  Digi Passport unit to transfer data stored in the buffer  The Digi Passport  unit transfers data when the buffer is full using the TCP IP protocol   However  if it is not full  the Digi Passport unit will also transfer data  dependent on the timeout value selected     Chapter 5 Configure Ports 98    Configure Physical Serial Ports    Special Use of Serial Port when Data is Processed in Chunks   Some applications are written to process only chunks of data rather than  continuous streams of data  The Digi Passport unit supports chunking  or  holding back data from the serial device to the application on the network until  it detects a delimiter   at which point it sends the data to the application     To configure a port for this mode     ae og oY a    Open a web connection to the Digi Passport unit   Select Serial Port  gt  Configuration    Select All ports to configure    Select Host Mode configurat
59.  for all ports     Select menu    1  Enable Disable unit cluster    2  Slave Unit IP   None  3  No  of Ports      4  Port configuration  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh    ve unit IP   143 191     Select menu    1  Enable Disable unit cluster    ing      4 161    ing      2  Slave Unit IP   143 191 4 161    3  No  of Ports 6  4  Port configuration   lt ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh    Le  2 1D  os G E P A    Select menu    1  Enable Disable unit cluster    ing       2  Slave Unit IP   143 191 4 161    3  No  of Ports   32  4  Port configuration   lt ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh    wm  3  oor    bi   Secesesessseeqgceg    Ci                                      3     Enter port number to confiugre      for all port configuration  gt     UNKNOW  UNKNOW  UNKNOW  UNKNOW  UNKNOW  UNKNOW  UNKNOW  UNKNOW  UNKNOW  UNKNOW  UNKNOW  UNKNOW  UNKNOW  UNKNOW    8  Select Enable configuration     9  Select Auto Configuration     10  Select Exit and apply changes     Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface    Enable    Seqeeegogeggggeggggf    Seeceqceqceceqcecse      i i     UNKNOW  UNKNOW  UNKNOW  UNKNOW  UNKNOW  UNKNOW  UNKNOW  UNKNOW  UNKNOW  UNKNOW  UNKNOW  UNKNOW  UNKNOW  UNKNOW       Clustering    265    Upgrade Firmware    Upgrade Firmware    Before upgrading firmware from the configuration menu     Download the firmware to a system on the same subnet     Set up a terminal emulation program that supports the Zmodem transfer  protocol     To upgrade the firmware with the confi
60.  for the wireless card are not known  contact the network admin     istrator   e SSID  Set Service Identifier and is the name of the wireless LAN  network     e Use WEP key  Enable or disable the WEP key      WEP mode  Encrypted or unencrypted     e WEP key length  If the WEP key is enabled  the options are 40 or  128 bits        WEP key string  Refer to the wireless network administrator for the  wireless encryption key string     PC card configuration    Currently configured PC card    Card type   Wireless Network Card  Model   Cisco Systems 350 Series Wireless LAN    Adapter    Network configuration  IP mode   DHCP       IP address         Subnet mask         Default gateway      Primary DNS   192 168 1 1  Secondary DNS   0 0 0 0  Reuse old IP at bootup time on DHCP failure    Disable      wireless network card configuration    SSID  fet      Use WEP key   Enable  gt     WEP mode    Encrypt  gt     WEP key length   126 bits v   WEP key string   pee O    PC card service    Configure the detected card Stop card service  Save to flash   Save  amp  apply   Cancel    6  Click Save to flash        Chapter 3 Install and Configure PC Cards 45    Add a Serial Modem  Add a Serial Modem    The modem must first be inserted and installed before it can be used  To  configure the modem do the following     1  Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface     2  From the menu  select Configuration under the PC card heading 
61.  information to make a Telnet or SSH connection to a port  The example  assumes that the Listening TCP port is 7003  the default for port 3                    Type Command Syntax Example  Connection to Port 3  Telnet telnet jp address tcp port telnet 192 168 15 7 7003  where jp address is the Digi Passport units  7000 is the default socket port for both  IP address and tcp port is the Listening TCP Telnet and SSH   port for a port  SSH ssh user name  ip address tcp port ssh admin  192 168 15 7  p 7003  where user name is a user   s name   7000 is the default socket port for both  ip address is the Digi Passport unit   s IP Telnet and SSH   on a the Listening TCP ssh sunadmin    p 25  Digi12  ssh user name    p port number    ip address Ssineiscoadming Ciso maln Digiie  or  ssh user name    t port title  ip address  WEB http   ip address connect asp t port title http   passportdemo digi com  http   ip address connect asp p port  connect asp t CISCO Router port3  number  the port name is case sensitive   where ip address is the Digi Passport unit  IP address or DNS name  port number is the  number of the serial port and port title is the  name of the port as assigned in serial port   port title                 Custom Menus    Custom menus are created by either root or the system administrator to  limit access to specific ports  For more information  see  Recommended  Process for Implementing Custom Menus  on page 157     Chapter 1 Introduction 22    Port Escape Menu    Options 
62.  interval  every 1440 minutes  Start time  hh mm ss    Probe string  oD  Detected OS   Use detected port title  Enable v  Port naming rule   OS  SHOSTNAMES ports    Use detected type of console server  Enable    Use detected freeKVM  Enable v  Use detected serial parameters  Enable     Baudrate Data bit Parity bit Stop bit Probe string Wait time  All 8 bits None 1 bit  x0D 0  9600 8 bits Even 1 bit  x0D 3  4800 8 bits None 1 bit  x0D 3  115200 8 bits None 1 bit 30  57600 8 bits None 1 bit  x0D 30    Automatic detection     84    Configure Physical Serial Ports    freeKVM Configuration    freeKVM configuration is a link to the settings for configuring the freeKVM  feature  See  Configure and Use freeKVM  on page 168 for more information     Authentication    Authentication is a link to the settings for configuring any user authentication  desired or required for users accessing ports  See  Configure Authentication  Methods for Port Access  on page 151 for more information     User Access Control    User access control is a link to the settings for configuring user access rights  to ports  See  Configure User Access Control  on page 142 for more  information     Chapter 5 Configure Ports 85    Configure Physical Serial Ports    Port Access Menu Configuration  The Port Access Menu provides a menu driven command line interface for  Digi Passport users to access equipment through a standardized interface  without using the Web interface  It is one of several alternative mechanisms
63.  jefin digi com    Access control settings  NMS   No  IP address Community Permission   192 168 100 101    digipassport   Read Only x        3 a  4 opoo   po    Access control settings  SNMP V3        No  User Security level Auth Priv Permission  test Auth Priv MD5 DES Read Write    1 m   2 o  3 O  a o  Trap receiver settings  No  IP address       m  1091012             o  0 0 00 public             5  Configure the Trap receiver settings  From the list  select number 1     The trap receiver settings are displayed     Trap receiver settings   1      network   snmp   trap    1 x        Trap receiver enable disable   IP address     Community     Version     Chapter 6 Alerts and Notifications       115    Manage SNMP configuration    6  Select the Trap receiver enable disable checkbox  then select v3  from the Version menu  The Trap receiver settings  1 page is  displayed     Trap receiver settings   1      network   snmp   trap   1              Trap receiver enable disable   IP address              User name   Security level   Engine ID     Version        Enter settings       IP address  Enter the IP address of the Trap receiver    e User name  Fill in the User name  this value is the same user from  the SNMPv8 software    e Select the Security level  Additional security level settings are  displayed  shown below  Use the same steps as in the Access  control settings section for the Authentication and Privacy  Protocols and their passwords     e Engine ID  This value is supplied
64.  log view            Chapter 4 System Status and Port Logging 52    Enable Log Storage Location    Enable a Compact flash Card    The compact flash card must be installed and configured on the Digi  Passport unit before it can be used for system logging or storing the Digi  Passport unit   s configuration information  When storing log files to an  external flash card  the size of the available storage is dependent on both  the size of the card and the port count of the Digi Passport unit used  The  maximum settings for log file sizes are listed in the following table  See also   Add a Compact flash Card  on page 43                                                        cl ane System   PortLog erat  Card Size POT Sed ey MESH BOW iced  32 8 4 6 3 1M 29M  16 4 6 1 53M  32 4 6 762K  48 4 6 500K  64 8 9 2 6 2M 58M  16 9 2 3 1M  32 9 2 1 53M  48 9 2 1 02M  128 8 18 4 12 3M 118M  16 18 4 6 2M  32 18 4 3 1M  48 18 4 2 0M  256 8 36 8 24 6M 236M  16 36 8 12 3M  32 36 8 6 2M  48 36 8 4 1M                         Chapter 4 System Status and Port Logging 53    File Size and Memory Use for System and Port Logs    Enable Log Storage Location    The Digi Passport unit   s memory is already enabled for port logging  It only    needs to be configured to accommodate the system and port log files   When storing log files to the Digi Passport unit   s local memory  a total of  3 5M is available  The amount of memory per serial port is dependent on    the port count of the Digi Passport unit used 
65.  menu for Service processor  select iLO  Click    Save to flash     Host mode configuration  Host mode   Type of console server   Rackable System Management Card   Service processor   Enable Disable assigned IP   Listening TCP port  1024 65535    Protocol     Inactivity timeout  1 3600 seconds  0 for  unlimited    Display port information     Enable Disable port escape sequence   Port escape sequence    Port break sequence    Use comment    Quick connect via    Web applet encoding    web applet size     freekVM configuration   Remote port parameters   Port logging   Port event handling  Authentication   User access control   Alert configuration   Service processor configuration    Console server v     Other v      Disable v   io E   Disable v    7050     Telnet w     100                  second s        Disable v   Enable v     Ctrl   z           break    No  x   Web applet v       English  latint             Columns  80   Rows  24       5  Click Remote port parameters  Remote port parameters are    displayed     Chapter 7 Service Processors    129    Integrated Lights Out  iLO  iLO2     Remote port parameters    Destination IP  192 168 118  Destination port  0 65535   9   Protocol   SSH m   SMASH     Enable v   Allow unattended continuous connection   Enable v  Automatic login   Enable v       User name   Administrator      Password  new   ecccccee      Password  confirm   leeecece      Reestablishment interval  5 seconds    Use a customizable script   Disable v     Port log
66.  no forced air  make sure the air in between  devices does not get warmer than 55  C by providing space between  the devices  controlling the ambient temperature on the rack   distributing weight evenly in the rack to avoid overloading  checking  equipment nameplate ratings before connecting to the supply circuit   and maintaining reliable earthing of the rack mounted equipment     Chapter 19 Specifications and Certifications 309    Rack Mounting    e Power and wiring     This equipment is for indoor use and all the communication wirings  are limited to inside of the building     Locate the DC supply source within the same premises as the  equipment     Check equipment nameplate ratings before connecting to the supply  circuit to avoid overloads that may damage over current protection  devices and supply wiring     Maintain reliable earthing of rack mounted equipment  Pay  particular attention to supply connections other than direct  connections to the branch circuit     Connect equipment to a DC supply source  reliably earthed  that is  electrically isolated from the AC source     Directly connect the equipment chassis to the DC supply system   grounding electrode conductor or a bonding jumper from a  grounding terminal bar  or bus  that is connected to the DC supply  system grounding electrode conductor     Contain equipment that has a connection between the grounded  conductor of the same DC supply circuit  the grounding conductor   and also the point of grounding of the D
67.  on secondary NFS server     Secondary NFS mount retrying interval   sec  5 3600     Enable Disable encrypted secondary NFS   Disable      server       Email alert configuration  Enable Disable email alert for NFS   Disable      disconnection  e    SNMP trap configuration  Enable Disable NFS disconnection trap  Enable  y   Use global SNMP configuration    Enable              Save to flash Save  amp  apply Cancel    Chapter 4 System Status and Port Logging       Secondary NFS timeout  sec  5 3600      49    Enable Log Storage Location    3  Set or change the NFS Configuration parameters as needed     NFS service  Enabled or disabled     Primary NFS server name  IP address of NFS server or DNS  name     Mounting path on primary NFS server  Directory to primary NFS  server     Primary NFS timeout  Interval in seconds before timeout  5 3600      Primary NFS mount retrying interval  Interval in second between  attempts to connect  5 3600      Enable Disable encrypted primary NFS server  If server supports  encrypted NFS server     Encrypted primary NFS server user  User name of server   Encrypted primary NFS server password  Password     Confirm Encrypted primary NFS server password  Re enter the  password     Secondary NFS service  Enabled or Disabled   Secondary NFS server name  Name of server     Mounting path on secondary NFS server  Directory path to the  NFS server     Secondary NFS timeout  sec  5 3600   Timeout  in seconds     Secondary NFS mount retrying interval  sec  5 
68.  performed on the  ports to detect the devices that are attached to the Digi Passport unit     1  In the Web interface for the the Digi Passport unit  go to  Serial Port  gt  Configuration  The Ports configuration page is  displayed     Chapter 5 Configure Ports    Configuration      serial   serial_config    Port access menu configuration    Port group configuration    Port automatic detection configuration    Ports configuration    Group  NONE    NONE  NONE  NONE  NONE  NONE  NONE  NONE  NONE  NONE  NONE  NONE  NONE  NONE  NONE  NONE  16 NONE    1  2  3  4  5  6  7  8  9    pi p            pi p p  w  amp  WN    Port title     Title   Port Title  Port Title  1  Port Title   Port Title  Port Title   Port Title   Port Title   Port Title  7  Port Title  8  Port Title  9  Port Title  10  Port Title  11  Port Title  12  Port Title  13  Port Title  14  Port Title  15  Port Title  16    Listening TCP port     Mode Port Protocol Serial Settings    cs    cs  cs  cs  cs  cs  cs  cs  cs  cs  cs  cs  cs  cs  cs  cs  c5    7001 Telnet    7001 Telnet  7002 Telnet  7003 Telnet  7004 Telnet  7005 Telnet  7006 Telnet  7007 Telnet  7008 Telnet  7009 Telnet  7010 Telnet  7011 Telnet  7012 Telnet  7013 Telnet  7014 Telnet  7015 Telnet  7016 Telnet    9600 N 8 1 NO  9600 N 8 1 NO  9600 N 8 1 NO  9600 N 8 1 NO  9600 N 8 1 NO  9600 N 8 1 NO  9600 N 8 1 NO  9600 N 8 1 NO  9600 N 8 1 NO  9600 N 8 1 NO  9600 N 8 1 NO  9600 N 8 1 NO  9600 N 8 1 NO  9600 N 8 1 NO  9600 N 8 1 NO  9600 N 8 1 NO  9600 N 8
69.  rc user script  just above exit 0   In  s  usr2 run user  etc rc d rc2 d S60runuser  4  Reboot   reboot    If the Digi Passport unit is reset to factory defaults  the file  usr2 rc user script  file is moved to file  usr2 rc user old  and the default file rc user is restored     Change RADIUS socket ports    The radius client obtains the radius socket ports to use via the file   etc services  The client only looks up the lines starting with radius and  radacct     1  In file  etc services  change lines starting with radius and radacct to the  desired socket numbers  For example     radius 1645 tcp  radius 1645 ucp  radacct 1646 tcp  radacct 1646 ucp    2  After editing  etc services  copy it to  usr2   cp  etc services  usr2   3  Edit  usr2 rc user and add this line just above exit 0   cp  a  usr2 services  etc services   4  Reboot   reboot    If the Digi Passport unit is reset to factory defaults  the script file   usr2 rc user is moved to  usr2 rc user old  and the default file re user is  restored     Chapter 17 Command Line Interface 284    Example Scripts    Limit root access to the console on Digi Passport products  for SSH only     Limiting root access to the console prevents root access from any means  except physically logging in on the Digi Passport console  To limit root access     1  Modify file  etc inetd conf and append  f  usr2 sshd_config to the sshd  line     cp  etc inetd conf  usr2 inetd conf  2  Edit file  etc ssh sshd_config  Change PermitRootLogin to no
70.  settings   Automatic detection   Port title   Host mode configuration  Host mode   Type of console server   Rackable System Management Card   Enable Disable assigned IP   Listening TCP port  1024 65535      Protocol   Inactivity timeout  1 3600 sec  0 for  limited      unlimit  Enable Disable port escape sequence   Port escape sequence   Port break sequence   Use comment   Quick connect via   Web applet encoding    Virtual KVM configuration   Serial port parameters   Port logging   Port event handling   Authentication   User access control   Alert configuration    Console server       onr B  Disable E   Disable      7001o O   ssH   a  Enable E    Ctrl   Z      break    o B    Web applet              English  atin  E       Save to flash Save  amp  apply Cancel    Chapter 5 Configure Ports    76    Configure Physical Serial Ports  Configure Automatic Detection    Automatic detection and its role in Automatic Device Recognition    The Automatic Device Recognition feature allows the Digi Passport unit to  automatically detect and recognize attached devices and the serial parameters  for the devices  The port configuration settings for automatic detection are  used to determine the baud rate and other serial characteristics for the serial  port  based on a user defined list  Automatic Device Recognition takes this  device recognition a step further  to determine the operating system and host  name of the attached equipment     There are several elements to automatic detection set
71.  space character before        n    line 97  COMMAND  lt password gt  lt cr gt    gt  COMMAND admin lt cr gt   Then save the switch inf file    17 On the Properties window  click OK    18 On Dial up connection  double click the Connect icon    19  Enter the User name and Password  then click the Dial button              Chapter 2 Getting Started 34    Configure Access to Digi Passport via PPP    Configure PPP from a Linux Client    1     aR ON    o NOD    9     From the command line of a Linux client on a Redhat 9 machine  run  the kppp utility       kppp      On the KPPP window  click Setup     On the Accounts tab of the KPPP Configuration window  click New     On the Create New Account window  select Dialog Setup     On the Dial tab of the New Account window  enter the desired name in  the Connection name field  Click Add     Enter the phone number of internal modem and click OK   For Authentication  select PAP CHAP    On the IP tab  select Dynamic IP address    On the Gateway tab  select Default gateway     10 On the DNS tab  select Automatic configuration   11  On the Login Script tab  specify the following under Login Scripts    sequentially    Expect Login     Send admin   Expect Password     Send admin   For Expect Login and Expect Password  note that there is a space  character before the     character    Click OK     12  On the KPPP Configuration window  click the Device tab and check    the parameters  Default values can be used for all device types except  Modem  S
72.  system adminstrator  specific named  access lists must be created     e For port admins  Create the access list title web_padmin and add  all port admins under that     e For system admins  Create the access list title web_admin and add  all system admins under that     Chapter 8 Users  Security  and Authentication 152    Configure Authentication for the CLI    Configure Authentication for the CLI    The CLI configuration is for specifying the authentication method and shell  when accessing the Passport directly  Available options     e Authentication method  Local  Radius  TACACS  LDAP  Kerberos  e Timeout for CLI menu  Specify the idletimeout in minutes        Use CLI auth for serial console access  Authentication method to  be the same  or different  than the Passport console port     When specifying a remote auth method you can specify the shell for them  to use  Shell program  Port access or Custom menu           Network   Serial port   Clustering   Power controller   Peripherals   Custom menu   System status  amp  log   System administration  User administration  Access lists  Change password  Device name  Date and time  Configuration management  Security profile  Firmware upgrade  CLI configuration    CLI configuration              admin   cli_conf    Authentication method  Local v    Timeout for CLI configuration menu  0  10  1440 minutes  0 for unlimited     Use CLI authentication method for serial No     console access     minutes          Save to flash Save  amp  
73.  the Port logging page  or from the location where they have been saved  The following table lists    the file locations of the system logs                 Port Logfile  Log Storage File Location  Digi memory  tmp port data  Compact flash card  mnt flash port data       Syslog server    Must be viewed from the syslog server       NFS server     mnt nfs port data       USB           mnt usb          To view the port logs on the NFS server for port number 5  enter     more  mnt nfs port5data    To view partial logfiles in the web interface  select  Serial port  gt  Configuration  gt  port number  gt  Port logging     Chapter 4 System Status and Port Logging    59    Chapter 5 Configure Ports    This chapter shows how to configure serial ports  both physical serial ports  and remote ports  which are any type of ports that can be accessed using  Telnet  SSH  or Raw TCP protocol  including support for the ALOM  ILOM   iLO  IPMI  DRAC  and SMASH protocols  It presents a quick start method  for configuring all serial ports quickly  It then reviews basic and advanced  serial port settings  which can be modified from the factory default settings  as needed  It also covers configuring remote ports     Key serial port configuration settings include whether the port is enabled or  disabled  the host mode  which defines a type of communication between  the port and a remote host  the protocol  authentication  user access  restrictions  and serial communication attributes  The Digi Passpor
74.  the parameter labels  as  shown on the following screen  The factory default is Enable and empty  port automatic detection list     To create or change port automatic detection list of serial parameters  go to  Serial port  gt  Port automatic detection configuration  gt  Port automatic  detection list     Chapter 5 Configure Ports 94    Configure Physical Serial Ports       Automatic detection          serial   serial_config   ports            auto_detect    Basic configruation  Port management  Apply all ports settings  Automatic detection          Device detection method  Active v  Initial delay  5 minutes  Recheck interval  every  1440   minutes       Start time  hh mm ss            Probe string   weyOD  Detected OS    Use detected port title   Disable v   Use detected type of console server   Disable     Use detected freekVM    Disable v   Use detected serial parameters   Enable w        Baudrate Data bit Parity bit Stop bit Probe string Wait time    No rules  Automatic configuration  Start Now  Port title       Automatic detection          serial   serial_config   ports     i  v  f auto_detect       Basic configruation  Port management  Apply all ports settings  Automatic detection                      Device detection method  Passive  x    Initial delay  5 minutes  Recheck interval  every  1440 minutes  Start time  hh mm ss     Probe string   x 0D   Detected OS    Use detected port title  Enable v   Port naming rule    05   HOSTNAMES por        Use detected type of con
75.  the port  allowing a Telnet connection directly to the serial port using an  IP address  without specifying a TCP port    Listening TCP port  The TCP network port used when connecting directly  to the port using Telnet or SSH    Protocol  The communications protocol used for communications between  serial devices and host  SSH  RawTCP  or Telnet  When RawTCP is  selected  several more options are displayed in the Serial port parameters  to enable and specify the and set the inter character timeout    Inactivity timeout  The time set for inactivity to trigger an action  in  seconds  Setting the timeout to 0  zero  means no timeout   Enable Disable port escape sequence  Allows the port escape sequence  to function     Port escape sequence  The key combination to initiate port escape     Port break sequence  The sequence of characters that sends a break  character to a device     Use comment  Determines whether a port user is prompted to add a  comment each time the port is accessed     Quick connect via  Determines method for connecting to a port when in  console server mode  Available with Telnet     Web applet encoding  Supported languages for Java terminal     Web applet size  Defines the default size of the Terminal Console Web  Applet in rows and columns     Chapter 5 Configure Ports 97    Configure Physical Serial Ports    freeKVM Configuration    freeKVM configuration is a link to the settings for configuring the freeKVM  feature  See  Configure and Use freeKVM  on page
76.  the web interface     2  Select Custom Menu  gt  Configuration     Custom Menu   Menu Name  command      custom    command   Menu Configuration  Menu Title  The Inventory Menu  Sort Items  By Key      Display Items  Automatic E       Save to flash             Menu Items N    Submenus       3  Enter the Menu Name to assign and click the Add Menu button    The menu is added    Click the hyperlink to the menu just created    From the pulldown menu  select the method to Sort and Display items     Click Save  amp  apply   Repeat as required to create additional menus     N o ge    Chapter 9 Custom and Default Menus 159    Add Menu Items    1     Add Menu Items    Select Custom Menu  gt  Configuration  gt menu name link for the menu  to configure     Select Menu Items  gt  Add Item  The Custom Menu Item Configuration  settings are displayed     Custom Menu   Menu Name  Master   Item Configuration  Key   b    Label     C Create new submenu    Submenu Name       Go to an existing submenu  Submenu Name  z   C Connect to serial port    Serial Port  1      C Connect to clustered serial port    Clustered Slave  7    Serial Port  1 z     C Telnet to a remote host    Remote Host   Remote Port        SSH  Secure Shell  to a remote host    Remote Host   Remote User        Execute a custom command    Custom Command   Apply   Cancel      Fill in the desired parameters     Key  Assign any letter or number except a value already used by  another menu item     Label  Assign a label or name for t
77.  thresholds  Outlets  Outlet Port Title Unit   Outlet   1 None None  2 None None  Serial port   None     Outlet title   None  User access control    User or Access list Power access Action   lt  lt Everyone gt  gt  v  z      Select an access list     Y v  Move to Access lists to edit access list   Savetaflash    Save amp apply    Cancel    3 None None  4 None None  5 None None  6 None None  7 None None  8 None None  9 None None  10 None None       3  Select the serial port number that controls the device connected to the  Digi Passport unit  if any   If the port number has a title  it will appear   To add a title or change the existing title  go to  Serial port  gt  Configuration and select the port number to be changed   Enter the title and click Save  amp  apply  To continue  go to Power  Controller  gt  Configuration  gt  Title  gt  Outlets and select the appropriate  outlet    4  If not selecting a serial port number  user access parameters can be  changed on this page  Enter the User Access Control parameters   see   User Access for Power Controller  on page 198     5  Click Save to flash and repeat steps 2  4 for each outlet to configure     Chapter 14 Power Controller 196    6  Click Save  amp  apply     This screen shows that serial port one on the Digi Passport unit is  connected to a Sun Server that is supplied power from outlet 1 on the  power controller  In this example  user tomw has access to the power    outlets     Configure Outlets    Power controller configu
78.  various Linux commands available on the Digi Passport  unit  This is simply a listing of commands and does not detail what the  commands do or give their particular parameters  For more detailed  command information  see the man pages on a Linux system     Commands for Saving and Applying Changes    Two commands that are very important for saving and applying changes to  the configuration files are     e saveconf  Saves the configuration files to flash memory   e applyconf  Immediately applies the configuration changes   The configuration files are located in directory  tmp cnf     Commands for accessing and configuring Passport unit and serial ports    Several commands are used for accessing and configuring the Digi  Passport unit and the serial ports     e configmenu  A menu for system administrators to configure the Digi  Passport unit  It has essentially the same functionality as the web  interface for configuring a unit with the exception of the ability to create  custom menus     e connect  Connects to ports  ether local or slave ports  The syntax is   connect   s slave ip address   serial port     e factory_reset   Restore all configurations   Restore all configurations except user script   usr2 rc user    Restore all configurations except Perl packages   Restore all configurations except user script  amp  Perl packages     e portaccessmenu  A menu that allows access to the serial ports on the  Digi Passport unit     e portset    Resets a specific port and restarts al
79.  ways  Digi Passport supports SMASH CLP for iLO2 and DRAC5   Instructions for configuring SMASH CLP are integrated into the sections for  iLO and DRAC     Integrated Lights Out  iLO  iLO2     Integrated Lights Out  iLO and iLO2  is an HP specification for the  equipment that monitors the physical environment and condition of a  computer hardware server  The specification is intended to cover the  regulation of temperature  voltage and power  and to ensure the proper  operation of the firmware     iLO works with hardware servers regardless of the operating platform or  other software they may run  iLO allows an administrator to manage  multiple servers from a single location by means of a user friendly  interface  Critical system events for each server can be logged  Settings for  each basic input output system  BIOS  can be monitored or changed   Servers can be remotely and independently powered on or off  rebooted   or reset as necessary     iLO2 adds advanced digital video redirection to the specification     Chapter 7 Service Processors 128    Integrated Lights Out  iLO  iLO2     Configure iLO and SMASH CLP on a Remote Port    To configure iLO including SOL  Serial Over LAN  and SMASH CLP ona  remote port  follow these steps     1  In the Web interface  select Serial port configuration and select the    port to configure for iLO     2  From the menu  select Advanced configuration     o    In the next screen displayed  select Host mode configuration     4  From the pulldown
80. 3       following   1  Insert the card into the PC slot   2  Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface   3  Under the PC card heading  click Configuration  The card is  automatically discovered and a configuration menu is displayed   4  Enter the appropriate parameters in the configuration menu   PC card configuration  Currently configured PC card  Card type   Network Card  Model   corega K K  corega FEtherII PCC TXD  Network configuration  IP mode   IP address    Subnet mask    Default gateway    Primary DNS   204 221 114 1  Secondary DNS   168 126 63 2  PC card service  5  Click Save  amp  apply     If DHCP is active  the IP address will appear after Save  amp  apply is  clicked     Install and Configure PC Cards 44    Add a Wireless LAN Card    Add a Wireless LAN Card    To install and configure a wireless LAN card on the Digi Passport unit  do  the following     1  Insert the card into the PC slot     2  Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface     3  Under the PC card heading  click Configuration  The card is  automatically discovered and a configuration menu is displayed    4  Click Configure the detected card    5  Enter the appropriate parameters in the configuration menu     WEP is the acronym for Wired Equivalent Privacy and is a security pro   tocol for wireless LANs using encryption to protect data transfers  If the  settings
81. 3600   Retry  interval  in seconds     Enable Disable encrypted secondary NFS server  Specifies  whether the secondary server supports encrypted NFS server     Encrypted secondary NFS server user  User name   Encrypted secondary NFS server password  Password     Confirm secondary NFS server password  Re enter the  password     4  To activate NFS logging  select Enable     5  Enter the IP address of the primary and secondary  if applicable  NFS  server and the mounting path of each     6  Click Save  amp  apply     Chapter 4 System Status and Port Logging 50    Set Up Alert for NFS Server Disconnect    Enable Log Storage Location    When the NFS server disconnects  an alert in the form of an email  message and or an SNMP trap can be sent  To configure an alert  follow    these steps     1  On the NFS Configuration screen  at the Email alert configuration     select Enable     2  Enter the Title of email and the Recipient s email address   3  Foran SNMP trap configuration  select Enable NFS disconnection    trap     4  Select Enable for Use global SNMP configuration  and enter the IP  information for Trap receiver settings     5  Click Save  amp  apply     NFS server configuration     network   nfs       NFS service   Primary NFS server name   Mounting path on primary NFS server   Primary NFS timeout  sec  5 3600    Primary NFS mount retrying interval  sec   5 3600    Enable Disable encrypted primary NFS  server   Encrypted primary NFS server user   Encryped primary NFS server 
82. 4       192 168 1 128 255 255 255 128          Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface    248    Configure Network IP Filtering    e Protocol  The protocol being accepted on or dropped from the port       TCP    UDP    ICMP       Port  A TCP IP port on the Digi Passport unit that other hosts try to  access  Specify either one port  using a single value  or a range of ports  using this form  port1 port2  where port  defines the lowest port  and  port2 the highest port       Chain rule  Determines whether access from the hosts is allowed   e ACCEPT  Access allowed  e DROP  Access not allowed    To add a new IP filtering rule  enter the values for the parameters and click  the Add button on the right side of the table     To remove a rule  click the Remove button     When finished editing the table  save the settings to flash  Changes must  be applied to make them active     e To save changes  use the Save to flash button   e To save and apply changes  click Save  amp  apply   This screen shows five established IP rules     IP filtering     Interface Option IP address Mask Protocol Port Chain rule Action   1  all     Normal     192 168 0 0 255 255 0 0 TCP  22 ACCEPT      Remove    all     Invet     192 168 0 0 255 255 0 0 TCP     23 DROP     _ Remove    all Normal     0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TCP   ilso DROP      Remove    all Normal     192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0   TCP   80 ACCEPT      Remove      all Normal      192 168 2 0 255 255 255 0    TCP v  80 ACCEPT       Save to flash Save  amp
83. 5535    Protocol     Inactivity timeout  1 3600 seconds  0 for    unlimited    Enable Disable port escape sequence   Port escape sequence   Port break sequence   Use comment   Quick connect via   Web applet encoding   freeKkVM configuration  Serial port parameters  Port logging  Authentication  User access control  Alert configuration    Console server  y  MS SAC console       Disable         Disable       Disable      7004   Telnet      0 second s   Enable v     Ctrl   z      break   No       Web applet     English  latint  SA         Save to flash I Save  amp  apply hl Cancel         6  Set other fields as appropriate     7  Click Save  amp  apply     8  Configure serial port communication settings   e Select Serial port parameters from the menu        e Adjust settings as required  This includes ensuring that the Baud    rate matches the setting on the Windows Server 2003 serial port  and Flow control is set to None  Ignore the DTR behavior field     When done  click Save  amp  apply     Chapter 10 Microsoft SAC Support    166    Access Windows Server 2003 Console Port from Digi Passport Unit   s GUI    Access Windows Server 2003 Console Port from Digi Passport Unit   s GUI  To access the Windows Server 2003 console port  do the following     1  Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface     2  Select Serial port  gt  Connection  A screen similar to the following is  displayed     Serial port connection  
84. 9600 N 8 1 No  Title RS232 9600 N 8 1 No    Enter port number to confiugre  lt    for all port configuration  gt   Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh  i       Enable Disable Port     Port Title   Port Title     Host Mode Configuration     Serial Port Parameters     Port Logging     IP Filtering     Authentication     User Access Control     Alert Configuration     Port access menu configuration  ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh      Authenticaton Type    Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh  1  authentication type   None  1   RADIUS  2   Local  3   RADIUS    Local  4   Local    RADIUS  TACACS    6   TACACS  Local  X Local TACACS    LDAP  9   LDAP Local  1    Local    LDAP  Kerber 12   Kerber Local  13 Local   Kerhberos  RADIUS Down Local       5  To the main menu  use the ESC key   6  Select Save changes     Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface 256    Certificate Management    Certificate Management    Upload a Server Certificate  To upload a server certificate  use either of these methods     Use the Upload Server Certificate menu  This menu is displayed only  when running configmenu on the serial console of the Digi Passport  unit   Running configmenu on CLI via Telnet or SHI does not display  this menu      Use the scp command to copy your server pem file to  tmp cnf etc  To  make this change permanent  run the saveconf command from the  command line interface     Create Use a Server Certificate    To use your server certificate for the Digi Passport unit  after replacing the  origi
85. ACCESS             ccccccsceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeessaeeeeenneees 187  Add a PC Modem s ace satires ecetaactsieecccac pote te exnnncante oc russcuce Seaseauanceh anasienasterancasee 190    Contents    Configure for Dial In Terminal Server ACCESS               cecceseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeee 191    Chapter 14 Power Controller    About the Power Controller Feature            cccccceecceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeteeeeeeeeeeenees 192  Install Power Comtrollers cct cx asm lonndst ines Aton eae tes aga layaaes 193  Configure Power Controller x  ccc yantise a soeaesdadee des escy Ansnscesaddtavaesceaninnadshotienaeceers cs 194  Configure the Serial Port Parameters to Match the Power Controller          194  Add the Power Controller sis  heccessercesevanutedevisetsacteapetiatela et beuesaned neceetneene 194  Set Alarms and Thresholds isiccsscectiieetatceperstediaayedsteastanedeteagvatinsh aihedeettaoenatee 195  GOMIQUIE OUT GIS ssnin naer a navel aan aaa tees let aE 196  User Access for Power Controller               cecccceeeesscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeas 198  Configure to Allow Specific Users ACCESS          eecseceeeetesneeesneeeeneeeeaes 198  Configure to Restrict Specific Users   2 0 2    eeeeeeseceeeeeecetseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeenees 199  Power Controller Management                cccceescceeeeesneceeeesneeeeseeeeaeeeeeeaaaeeeeenaaeeeeneas 201  Cascading Multiple Digi RPM Uniits                ccceccsssscccceeeeesssseneeeeeeeesesseeseeeeeeess 202  Allowe
86. C system in the same  immediate area  Do not ground the equipment elsewhere     Route away and secure all DC input wiring from sharp edges to  prevent chaffing as well as provide strain relief     Provide a readily accessible disconnect device and protective  device a fixed wiring for a DC power supply suitable for the specified  rated voltage and current  Disconnect and protective devices to be  rated 2A Amps maximum     Chapter 19 Specifications and Certifications 310    Lithium Battery Replacement    Lithium Battery Replacement  A 3 Volt CR2032 battery maintains date and time information in the Digi  Passport unit  If resetting the time and date information after turning on the  Digi Passport unit is necessary  replace the battery   Replace the battery with the same or equivalent type recommended by the  manufacturer only   Manufacturer  SONY FUKUSHIMA CORP   Model  CR2032   Toshiba Battery Co  Ltd  Model  CR2032   Caution  A new battery can explode if incorrectly installed  Replace the  3 Volt CR2032 battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended  by the battery manufacturer     Dispose of used batteries according to the battery manufacturer   s  instructions and national code or recycling program     Chapter 19 Specifications and Certifications 311    Certifications    Safety Certifications    Certifications    US  UL1950  Canada  CSA 22 2 No  60950  Europe  EN60950  CB Scheme Report     Working Inside the Digi Passport Unit  NOTICE  Do not attempt to service 
87. Configuration    Here is an example of a Digi Passport managing a Linux SuSE 9 2 system   a Windows 2003 system  and an HPUX system         Serial port connection    serial   serial_connect           Peer  Allpeers    port title        Port access menu connection  Port access menu connection    Individual port connection    Status Port  Title  of User Comments  1 Port Title  1 0  lt  Not used  gt   2 Port Title  2 ia   lt  Not used  gt   3 Port Title  3 0  lt  Not used  gt   4 Port Title  4 in   lt  Not used  gt     Port Title  5 0  lt  Not used  gt   6 Port Title  6 in   lt  Not used  gt     Serial Terminal Connection  Bi freekvm   v  View Port Log    7 Port Title  7  lt  Not used  gt   8 Port Title  8  lt  Not used  gt   9 Port Title  9  lt  Not used  gt     10   Port Title  10  11 Port Title  11  12 Port Title  12  13 Port Title  13  14 Port Title  14     lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt   15 Port Title  15  16 Port Title  16  17    test     lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt     The rest of this chapter describes how to set up freeKVM with each of the  supported methods and connect to a system through freeKVM     o0000000000    Chapter 11 Configure and Use freeKVM 169    Use freeKVM with Remote Desktop Protocol    Use freeKVM with Remote Desktop Protocol  This section describes how to configure freeKVM with Remote Desktop    Protocol  and connect to a system through freeKVM using Remote 
88. Configuration Menu              c cccceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeees 239  Saving CHANGES cseavecase duia dteandenadoaedentedhes EEEE ARa E EEEa E AE EAE E E E a 239  Config  re SSH rarr E e a tae eects 240  Add  Edit  and Remove USEMS   0        cccceceeeececeeeescceeeeeseeeteeesceeeetenceeeeteneesestaneeeeees 240  Add and Configure a PC Cards ci ceieisencevecectagvelecr eases iieeratnteuedatentaead ied 241  Host Mode Confiqurationiccscss  scceccseceeccctaetsagais csavtviadeenchsseieagtiaceeendeecanseeltaenenees 242  POUL PALINIGIONS uisa a aN a N a sass chess SaRaNa 242  Port Access Men   miisi an E aaa EAEE esas 243  SV SLSM Logging anier an aa era a a i han toed ae anes 244  Configure the System Log Device              cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeetenees 244  Configure an NFS or SYSLOG Server          ccccceeecsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeenaas 245  Configure System Logging sxcze cessed edie Lecce teens he eeeereed eae ed eee 245  Configure SNMP szcscuteaceiessncateaniannestenenieansigniads teal aee ep athens AEE AA EEE 246  Configure SMTP seers stdadene toutes Beeenag a Cece See tte seat a e A 246  Configure Network IP Filtering               ceecsecceeeesseceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeensaaeeeneeaees 247  IP Pieri  Settings    iveccrcecedoledediss tivaruetianzesstdesadesbraeded ata piesededaietaveveecnaeeedes 248  PP ORINGTING RUES i sinure sett Sadao itantennectde a a ents deeesdenehe 250  Configure Network IP Filtering from the Configuration 
89. D   501 or padmin   Port admin group ID     502 or users  Standard User group ID     shellprogram  Specifies the type of shell for the Digi Passport device  command line inter   face  CLI   Config menu  Port access menu  or Custom menu      bin bash  Command Line Interface  CLI      bin editconf  Configuration menu      bin cesm master  Port access menu      bin menu  Custom menu   passwd  username   copy passwd and shadow file to  tmp cnf etc  directory  saveconf  applyconf    The syntax for deleting a user definition is   deluserLusername     saveconf   applyconf    Chapter 17 Command Line Interface 286    User Administration    Locator LED Script    The Locator LED on the Digi Passport 48 can be deactivated and reactivated  with the following file and command      bin blinkled   start  stop     For example  use these commands to stop and start Locator LEDS   root mankato     bin blinkled stop   root mankato     bin blinkled start    All other Digi Passport units have the locator feature without a Locator LED  To  identify another Digi Passport unit  all the LEDs blink when the feature is  activated     Chapter 17 Command Line Interface 287    Upgrade Firmware  Chapter 18 System Administration    This chapter describes how to perform system administration tasks for the  Digi Passport unit  when logged in as either the root user or the system  administrator  System administration tasks include firmware upgrades   saving configurations  resetting the Digi Passport unit to def
90. Date  mmfdd yyyy   07 07 2006  Time  hh mm ss   16 53 25    Select  Standard time  and  Daylight saving time  from list    Standard time  Timezone  UTC    Time offset from UTC  UTC    x x Jhours   3    Daylight saving time ae  Enable Disable daylight saving time  Disable               Save to flash J   Save  amp  apply jl Cancel         3  To use an NTP server     Select Enable  the NTP server   s IP address  the Time offset  and the  Date and Time fields     To use the internal battery   Fill in the Date and Time fields only     If the time zone is changed  for the change to be effective  the time for  the time zone must also be reconfigured     4  Click Save  amp  apply     Configure a Host Name    The system administrator can assign a Host name to the Digi Passport  unit  This is often helpful for administration purposes to locate a specific  Digi Passport unit on the network  To assign the Digi Passport unit a device  name  do the following     1     w    Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface     Select System administration  gt  Device name   Enter the name of the Digi Passport unit   Click Save  amp  apply     Chapter 18 System Administration 298    Chapter 19    Hardware Specifications    Specifications and Certifications    This chapter provides information on Digi Passport hardware  including  hardware specifications  LED descriptions  pinouts for Ethernet cable and  cable adapter  and rack mou
91. Desktop  Protocol     Configure freeKVM with Remote Desktop Protocol  To set up freeKVM with Remote Desktop protocol  follow this procedure   Note  When using Remote Desktop configuration and automatic IP  address detection is desired  configure the host mode for the port to MS  SAC console before configuring the freeKVM feature for the port  For  more information  see  Set Up the Digi Passport Unit for SAC Support  on  page 166     1  Access the Digi Passport Web interface and log in   2  Select Serial Port  gt  Configuration  This window opens     Port access menu configuration  Port access menu configuration    All port configuration    Port  Title Mode Base address Port Proto Serial settings   All Port Title cs 0 0 0 0 7001 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  Individual port configuration   Port  Title Mode Dest AssignedIP Port Proto Serial settings  1 Windows Server  RDP  cs 0 0 0 0 7001 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  2 Linux Server  VNC  cs 0 0 0 0 7002 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  3 HPUX  XManager  cs 0 0 0 0 7003 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  4 Port Title  4 cs 0 0 0 0 7004 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  5 Port Title  5 cs 0 0 0 0 7005 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  6 Port Title  6 cs 0 0 0 0 7006 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  7 Port Title  7 cs 0 0 0 0 7007 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  8 Port Title  8 cs 0 0 0 0 7008 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  9 Port Title  9 cs 0 0 0 0 7009 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  10 Port Title  10 cs 0 0 0 0 7010 Telnet 115200 N 8 1 No  11 Port Title  11 cs 0 0 0 0 7011 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  12 Port Title  12 cs 0 0 0 0 7012
92. Dig    Digi Passport User   s Guide    90000767_D       Digi International Inc  2011  All rights reserved     Digi  Digi International  the Digi logo  Digi Passport  Digi One  and RealPort are  trademarks or registered trademarks of Digi International  Inc  in the United States  and other countries worldwide  All other trademarks are the property of their  respective owners    This product contains software licensed under the GNU Public License version 2  and other open source licenses  For information on these licenses  go to     http   www gnu org copyleft gpl htm   An SDK for all open source code used in this product is available free of charge  from Digi International  To request the SDK  go to     http   www digi com support eservice login jsp  Microsoft Windows Server 2003 is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation     Contents    Chapter1 Introduction    Digi  Passport    Model SUppOMt siceintces cesicenaeecdenteadlandinen th oceuteaenedcrbetaedagta Nene 11  Feature OVEMWIOW ccd sascsdvedesctenzntantacdtadebs uezeeetes anaes Mvesacneptendeedtandatepecieeddeaneersnteeed wees 11  Feature SUMMARY  irena reaa a p aiaia Eae AAEE Ea Ea EREE Ra 12  Discovering and Configuring the Digi Passport unit            ssssssessseesssrrrsserrrrerrne 14  Configuration User Interface Options for Digi Passport              ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 15  Web Inter   CE cdc  toc teases ae apai aaa EE EA K A AREEN A send 15  Configuration Menu edars 5a cetacean cate crate eds es cemncace detente e
93. E  oo00000    Serial Terminal Connection  Bireekvm   v  View Port Log    7 Port Title  7  lt  Not used  gt   8 Port Title  8 in   lt  Not used  gt   A Ane Tiha un bi niees tamed i    2300    To connect through freeKVM using X Window System Protocol and  XManager Software     1  Click on the mouse icon   2  Click OK for each of the three Java requests in pop up windows     The application starts  and a message that the connection suc   ceeded is displayed  The freeKVM VNC Connection is displayed     Welcome to TL 71    Please enter your user name    E ox   Start Over   Options               3  Enter user name and password  and click OK     If the application does not start  check to make sure that the application is  in the search path on the server  See  Installing Programs for freeKVM  on  page 179     Web Redirection    It is also possible to use the Web redirection feature to link to a web  configuration or management interface  Choosing Web redirection will  create a link to http    IP  in the connection window  If the remote system  supports https  just change the reference to https    IP   If there is a  specific page or nonstandard socket requirement  modify the connection  accordingly  for example     hitp    IP  8080 specific filename htm    Chapter 11 Configure and Use freeKVM 178    Installing Programs for freeKVM    Installing Programs for freeKVM  freeKVM relies on software installed on the client system to provide access    to the target system  This section is 
94. Eslave   Lalpply  e x lit     add   OMMAND  lt Display HELP    help gt  gt  1    AORWONEK OOS WHO AWN OS  Seeqseeoogogegqqoeqg9eeo  Seegqgeggegqggeegeggggf    Seqeqeoeogqoq00e0oe0o  Seqgegqgqgegqgqgegqgqggggo    Ports configuration  lt i gt    serial serial fig     Port management  Apply all ports settings  Automatic detection  Port title  Host mode configuration  Virtual KUM configuration  Serial port parameters  Port logging  Authentication  User access control  Alert configuration    Chlelp   slave   Lalpply  e xlit  OMMAND  lt Display HELP   help gt  gt  5  t mode configuration  ial serial_conf ig ports  1 hostmode    Host mode    Mode Dest fAssignedIP Port  7001    7002  7003  7004  7005  7006  7007  7008  7009  7616  7611  7012  7013  7014  7015  7016       remove     Console server    Type of console server    Other    Rackable System Management Card  Enable Disable assigned IP    Enable  Disable    Listening TCP port    Protocol    Telnet    Inactivity timeout   166    Enable Disable port escape sequence  Port escape sequence 22  sequence    Port break  Use comment    Quick connect via  Web applet encoding    Chlelp   slave     OMMAND  lt Display HELP      Protocol       break   No   Web applet  English   latini gt     Lalpply  e x lit  help gt  gt  6     serial serial_confi    RawICP  SELECT gt  2    Enable    Protocol Serial Settings    Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet  Telnet     
95. Host mode configuration  Host mode  Dial in terminal server     Terminal server option  Remote connection     Destination IP   Destination port  0 65535     Protocol   Tenet    Inactivity timeout  1 3600 seconds  O for  g i second s   unlimited    Modem init string  qle0s0 28d0   Serial port parameters   Authentication   Alert configuration         Save to flash II Save  amp  apply J   Cancel         5  Configure settings as needed     e Destination IP  The IP address of the system that will be  automatically connected to when the port is accessed     e Destination port  The TCP port that used when the port is  automatically connected to a system on the network     e Protocol  The protocol that will be used to establish the connection  to Destination IP  port  The options are SSH  RawTCP  and Telnet     e Inactivity timeout  The timeout length ranges from 1 to 3600  seconds  0 is unlimited timeout     e Modem init string  Use the default string or enter the desired init  string     6  Click Save  amp  apply     Chapter 13 Configure Remote Dial In Access 191    About the Power Controller Feature    Chapter 14 Power Controller    About the Power Controller Feature    The Power Controller feature allows administrators of the Digi Passport  unit to use console management to control power functions  Power control  consists of three basic functions  on  off  and reboot  power cycle   There  are two typical scenarios when using a power controller  The simplest  scenario is a non ser
96. Menu                0008 251  Configure Port IP Filtering scecsece Gece ores Lech asc cect ose Seca wate ceaaenecde cue ana tee a Saceaaeace 252  Configure and View Sniff SESSIONS   0 00 2    eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeetaeeetenaees 253  View a Sniff Session ia cece shes on rea a a Eaa au LATA Ea aas 254  Escape Sequences for Sniff Sessions           seseeesseensserrrreerrererrerrsserrrrerre 255  Authentication aee otr paean aE E ARAROA EE RA AARAA R AEEA 256  Certificate Management    0            ceeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaaeeeeescaeeseeeeeaes 257  Upload a Server Certificate           onneooneeeeeeneeeoentesotrnrerenrrrtneeserrrnneernn rrene 257  Create Use a Server Certificate            eoenneeeeeeeeeeneeeeenrreserrnternnrrsrrnressrrn nnet 257  Make a Certificate Request  c c iiaiiis nail aden ade 259  Sign a Certificate Request asc2ixetedeec interna ccentnets taeda eiee sen eacpe dedi hese 260  Make Certificate for the Digi Passport Unit  0        ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeees 261  Dali  Modem ACCOSS oann oaiae enna aana aa Raa ENA AANA EDENA AANE Eunet 262  Dial in Terminal Server ACCESS              cccceeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeesneeeeeeeaeeeeeeesaaeeeeneaas 263  CC NUISU STING  oe ae tcl nade Nee a beh dgatgten ot saben Tbs A bath ate 264  Set Up Digi Passport for Clustering           ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteeees 264  Upgrad   FinmWa rere  csciiacethatcncert na ieai a nc sateedan A NESE 266  Restore Factory Defaults  
97. Network Configuration  Serial Port Configuration  Clustering Configuration  Power Controller   PC Card Configuration  System Status  amp  Log  System Administration  Save Changes   Exit without Saving   Exit and Apply Changes     Exit and Reboot    lt ENTER gt  Refresh    a  2   3   4   5   6   Ta  8   od  a   bh    a   80   80   0 N  a RS232 9600 N 8 1 No  a Telnet RS232 9666 N 8 1 No    for all port configuration  gt       Enable Disable Po 5     Port Title   Port Title     Host Mode Configuration     Serial Port Parameters     Port Logging     IP Filtering     Authentication     User Access Control     Alert Configuration     Port access menu configuration    lt ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh   gt  8       Access this menu through a Telnet or SSH session using the IP address of  the Digi Passport unit followed by the port number 7000 as in the following  example     telnet 192 168 100 200 7000       By default  the root user is connected to the command line interface and  the preceding option allows the root user access to the port access menu     Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface 243    System Logging    System Logging  System logging is a two part process  First  the device being used to record  the system logs must be configured  Second  system logging must be  configured for the system under System status and log  System logs can  be saved to the Digi Passport unit   s system memory  there is no need to    configure the memory   a compact flash card  an NFS 
98. O and SMASH CLP on a Remote Pott              ccccccssseeseeeeeeeees 129  Access iLO Port or SMASH CLP Support              cc cecseseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeenee 132  Dell Remote Access Controller  DRAC               ccsscceeeeesseeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeennees 136  Go  nfigure DRAG a tao Sei a eats ere a a a coh cad tate peated tata eet 136  Chapter 8 Users  Security  and Authentication  Methods for Controlling User ACCESS             cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeteeeeeeeeenenaeeees 141  Supported Authentication Methods              ccccccsceeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeees 141  Configure User Access Control              cccecceceeeesnceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeesaeeeteeeees 142  Configure User Access Privileges             ccccccceeessseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeensaeeeeseaes 144  Restrict a User s Privileges  cgccc2 cciceteaciapecenelendvanucas les arreedsenecaegeteis tances  144  Change the Privileges of an Access List             eeccccceeeeceeeeeesteeeeeettaeeetenees 145  Sniff SESSION  ya e e a Sone wetted wakes AEAEE O tee caine 146  Eele 14 a as BOI EEr AA EEE A EAE E E Tene tne errr re ee 148  System Security Settings tii stesdicetencadcetah enna cand eeehn eee tetas 148  Password Security Settings            ceecccceeesseceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeesssnaeeeeeeneaaees 149  PANU gto  gh  fet 16  g lene a a ere eer an er eee eee eee ere 150  Configure Authentication Methods for Port ACCESS                cceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeees 151  Configure Authen
99. OL on another session    BMC hardware information    Device ID     Device Revision    Firmware Revision    IPMI Version    Manufacturer ID    Manufacturer Name    Product ID     Device Available    Provides Device SDRs      Additional Device Support      Aux Firmware Rev Info      Chapter 7 Service Processors       Power off Power reset    32   0   25   2 0   2   Unknown  0x2   7  0x0007    yes   no    Sensor Device   SDR Repository Device  SEL Device   FRU Inventory Device  IPMB Event Receiver  IPMB Event Generator  Chassis Device    OxSa  0x32  0x42  0x54    126    Intelligent Platform Management Interface  IPMI     6  To make an SOL connection to the servers console port  click the  Connect button  The resulting window is displayed  The example  shown below is a console connection to a Windows 2003 servers SAC  port                                         erver port     z for port menu     21 Username   jeffn    sion operational  Use    for help        _ Local echo Connect Disconnect SendBreak    Chapter 7 Service Processors 127    SMASH CLP    SMASH CLP    Systems Management Architecture for Server Hardware Command Line  Protocol  SMASH CLP  is a command response specification transmitted  and received over a text message based transport protocol  It was  developed and released by DMTF  Distributed Management Task Force    SMASH CLP addresses the end user requirement for a common command  line syntax  allowing systems offered by different vendors to be managed in  similar
100. Peer to peer mode configuration    Peer to peer information    Peer to peer status   Joined Refresh    Action     Withdraw Update N    Peer Authen Web port Port access Slave    IP Source port   Action  no  methoc Protocol Source Protocol Source Unit    192 168 12 8 Local HTTPS 15000 Telnet 15001 15002   15010 This  192 168 19 6 Local HTTPS 15011 Telnet 15012 15013   15061 Remove    1  2  3 192 168 12 32 Local HTTPS 15099 Telnet 15100 15101   15132 Remove  4 192 168 12 48 Local HTTPS 15133 Telnet 15134 15135   15181 Remove    Invite peers          Chapter 15 Port Clustering 232    Connect to Peers  Connect to Peers    Link to Web Interface    To link to the web interface of the peer  click the protocol or the source port  of the web port     Link to Port Access Menu    To connect to the port access menu of the peer  click the protocol or the  source port of the port access menu     Use the Digi Passport unit to Connect to Devices on Clustered Systems    Ports on clustered systems appear in the Web UI alongside ports from the  local system  The only limitations are that the number of users attached to  a port and the comments field are not available unless connected from the  local system for that port  However  this information is still available when  connecting to the port     Serial Port connection Page    This figure shows the serial port connection page  If more ports are  configured than will fit on a page  the      Move to      list box can be used to  change the displa
101. Port  Title  of User Comments  1 Port Title 1 Alpha 0  lt  Not used  gt   E serial Terminal Connection   v  view Port Log  ra  Rackable Systems Mgmt Card    2 Port Title 2 0  lt  Not used  gt   3 Port Title 3 0  lt  Not used  gt   4  PortTitle 4 0  lt  Not used  gt   5 Port Title 5 0  lt  Not used  gt   6 Port Title 6 ia   lt  Not used  gt   7 Port Title 7 0  lt  Not used  gt   8 Port Title 8 0  lt  Not used  gt   9 Port Title 9 0  lt  Not used  gt   10 Port Title 10 ia   lt  Not used  gt   11 Port Title 11 0  lt  Not used  gt   12 Port Title 12 0  lt  Not used  gt   13 Port Title 13 0  lt  Not used  gt   14 PortTitle 14 it   lt  Not used  gt   15 Port Title 15 o  lt  Not used  gt   16 Port Title 16 in   lt  Not used  gt     3  Click on the Rackable Server link  A screen similar to the following is  displayed        Rackable Systems Mgmt Card   4  Port Title  4    Control    Manufacturer   Rackable Systems    Connect to Rackable Systems Mgmt Card console      LED LCD management  Rackable Systems Mgmt Card properties    Chapter 12 Rackable   Systems Management Card 183    Access Rackable Systems Management Card from Digi Passport GUI    4  Use the Digi Passport unit   s user interface to perform Rackable  Systems Management Card functions  Attributes of the user interface  controls are shown below and described in the following table     Rackable Systems Mgmt Card   4  Port Title  4  Control  LED LCD management     LED management      LCD management   Currently displayed messa
102. R Connected to   6 DCD  8 DSR  8 RTS Connected to   5 CTS          Chapter 19 Specifications and Certifications    305    Cable Adapters and Pinouts    DB 25 Male Modem Adapter  Digi 8 pack reorder P N 76000670     Pin  13       DB 25 Male Modem to RJ 45 Pin Assignment                               RJ 45 Signal DB 25M   Signal   1 CTS Connected to   5 CTS  2 DSR Connectedto   6 DSR  3 RxD Connectedto   3 RxD   4 GND Connectedto   7 GND  5 DCD Connectedto   8 DCD  6 TxD Connectedto   2 TxD   7 DTR Connected to   20 DTR  8 RTS Connected to   4 RTS                         Chapter 19 Specifications and Certifications 306    Cable Adapters and Pinouts    DB 9 Male Modem Adapter  Digi 8 pack reorder P N 76000702    Available but not included    Pin  5    Pin  1                                  Pin  6  DB 9 Male Modem to RJ 45 Pin Assignment  RJ 45 Signal DB 9M Signal  1 CTS Connected to 8 CTS  2 DSR Connected to 6 DSR  3 RxD Connected to 2 RxD  4 GND Connected to 5 GND  5 DCD Connected to 1 DCD  6 TxD Connected to 3 TxD  7 DTR Connected to 4 DTR  8 RTS Connected to 7 RTS                         Chapter 19 Specifications and Certifications 307    Ethernet Pinouts    Ethernet Pinouts    The Digi Passport unit uses a standard Ethernet connector  that is a    shielded and compliant with AT amp T 258 specifications        Pin    Description       1    TX        Tx        Rx        NC       NC          Rx        NC       CO  N O  oO  BR  WY  DY          NC             Chapter 19 Specific
103. Remote Access Controller  DRAC     DRAC GUI Access is for connecting to a SAC like DRAC user interface  page as shown in the example screens        DRAC  DRAC  on port 49       serial   serial_connect   drac    System Summary    System Model  System BIOS Version    BMC Firmware Version    Service Tag  Host Name  OS Name    Control   Access settings  IP settings  DRAC Event Log    PowerEdge 2900  1 1 0   1 14   HMS10C1  poweredge    Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2  Enterprise  Edition       DRAC  DRAC  on port 49     serial   serial_connect   drac    System Summary    System Model  System BIOS Version  BMC Firmware Version    Control  Connect  Restart  Shutdown    Access settings  IP settings  DRAC Event Log    Chapter 7 Service Processors    PowerEdge 2900  1 1 0   1 14   HMS10C1  poweredge    Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2  Enterprise  Edition    Connect to DRAC Console  Restart system    Shutdown system    139    Dell Remote Access Controller  DRAC     SMASH GUI Access opens the SMASH CLP user interface  as shown in  the example     SMASH  DRAC  on port 49      serial   serial_connect   smash    Connect to SMASH CLP Console  Current Default Target Path     Targets Properties   systemi    Under Targets  click the links to move to the corresponding target path   and SMASH CLP shows sub targets and properties  Any commands that  can be executed on the corresponding target path  such as Start  Stop and  Reset  are displayed     SMASH  DRAC  on port 49      serial f serial_co
104. SSH  2     Save Done     Apply Done               root Digi_Passport4          Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface 274    Current limitations    Configmenu scripting    Configuration commands can be entered and executed in a script file  as  shown below  Each command should be on a separate line and the  save   and  apply  commands should be added at the end of file if you want to  apply your changes                  root Digi_Passport4     more  usr2 rpot2  add rport 7006       set  serial serial_config ports  6 rport_param dest_ip 192 168 1 2    set  serial serial_config ports  6 rport_param dest_port 22             set  serial serial_config ports  6 rport_param protocol 2       save  apply   root Digi_Passport4     configmenu  f  usr2 rpot2                   Add    serial serial_config ports  6       Set    serial serial_config ports  6 hostmode listening_port 7006    Set     serial serial_ conifig ports   6  lt oore_joacem   des cenip  192 168 142          Set    serial serial_config ports  6 rport_param dest_port 22                Set    serial serial_config ports  6 rport_param protocol SSH  2     Save Done     Apply Done                  root Digi_Passport4     To check XML paths and values  see these configuration files     tmp cnf ports port  portinfo cnf  Serial port   configuration   tmp cnf sys   System configuration    tmp cnf sys network  Network configuration    The following menus are not supported in scripting   e Change password  e System status  amp  lo
105. Security Profile including network  port  and  password securities        Authentication and  Certifications    User access per port   Access lists per port   Local user database   TACACS    RADIUS   RSA SecurlD   support using RADIUS   LDAP and Active Directory   Kerberos support for customized PAM Modules  Solaris Ready       Console Access Methods    Direct SSH and Telnet to individual ports   SSH sessions simultaneously on all ports  Web interface  HTTP HTTPS   RemotePorts     extends console management  features to remote devices   Multi level menus   Multiple concurrent users per port  Independent IP addresses per port   Raw TCP   Port escape menu    Service Processors  IPMI 2 0  iLO  DRAC   ALOM       Console Monitoring Capabilities          Automatic Device Recognition  ADR   Port Triggers and Alerts  Local port logging       Chapter 1 Introduction    12       Chapter 1    Feature Summary       Feature Category    Feature       Digi Passport Self Management  Capabilities    Advanced Digi Discovery Protocol  ADDP  for  locating the the Digi Passport unit unit on the  network    Find Me locator light  Telnet SSH   Command line interface   Web interface  HTTP HTTPS  SNMPv3 management interface    Secure Clustering  Single IP address for  multiple Digi Passport devices    TFTP firmware with automated capability and  configuration update upon boot   Custom applications   Perl programming and scripting   USB Export option   Flash upgradable       freeKVM    access    Window
106. Select menu  1   2      Shell Program Path         Host mode   Terminal Server  Terminal Server Option   Shell Program    Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh   gt 1  Host mode      Terminal Server  2   Console Server  3   Dial in modem   Dial In Termimal Server  3    5  To return to the main menu  use the ESC key   6  Select Save changes     Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface    262    Dial in Terminal Server Access    Dial in Terminal Server Access    Individual serial ports on the Digi Passport unit can be configured for dial in  terminal server access  To use dial in terminal server access  an external  modem is attached to a serial port on the Digi Passport unit  then the serial  port is configured for dial in terminal server mode  In the illustration below   port 7 is configured for dial in terminal server mode     Terminal server mode makes a direct connection to a server   To configure a serial port for a dial in terminal server     1   2   3     Access the configuration menu   Select Serial port configuration   Select an individual port number and then Host Mode Configuration     Select menu    Host mode   Dial in modem    Inactivity timeout   100 sec    Modem init string   qie  s   2    Select Host mode     1   Terminal Server  2   Console Server  3   Dial in modem   4   Dial In Termimal Server       Select Dial in Terminal Server and configure the other configuration  parameters     To return to the main menu  use the ESC key   Select Save changes     Chapter 16 Config
107. Serial port configuration   2   Linux Server  VNC     Enable Disable this port  Enable Disable this port    Enable      RealPort support     Disable  v    Save to flash Save  amp  apply Cancel  Reset this port      Set this port as factory default   Set       Port title   Apply all ports settings  Host mode configuration  Virtual KVM configuration  Serial port parameters  Port logging   Port IP filtering  Authentication   User access control  Alert configuration       Chapter 11 Configure and Use freeKVM 173    Use freeKVM with VNC Protocol    4  Select the freeKVM tab  This window is displayed          serial   serial_connect       Peer  Allpeers Y  port title     Search         Port access menu connection  Port access menu connection    Individual port connection    Status Port  Title  of User Comments  1 Port Title  1 0  lt  Not used  gt   2 Port Title  2 0  lt  Not used  gt   3 Port Title  3 0  lt  Not used  gt   4 Port Title  4 0  lt  Not used  gt   2 Port Title  5 0  lt  Not used  gt   6 Port Title  6 0  lt  Not used  gt     Serial Terminal Connection  E freekvm   v  view Port Log    7 Port Title  7 0  lt  Not used  gt   8 Port Title  8 0  lt  Not used  gt   9 Port Title  9 0  lt  Not used  gt   10 Port Title  10 0  lt  Not used  gt   11 Port Title  11 o  lt  Not used  gt   12 Port Title  12 0  lt  Not used  gt   13 Port Title  13 0  lt  Not used  gt   14 Port Title  14 0  lt  Not used  gt   15 Port Title  15 0  lt  Not used  gt   16 Port Title  16 0  lt  Not used  gt  
108. System Status and Port Logging 57    Configure Port Logging    e Logging direction  Specifies what should be logged   Server  Server output only   User  User output only     Both Server and User with without arrows  Server and user out   put with without directional arrows     Default is Server output     Security note  During logging  user output passwords are saved into  the log file     e Port log to SYSLOG server  Enable to store port logs toa  SYSLOG server    e Port logging filename  The name of the port log file  specify a  filename or use the port title as the filename    e Show last 10 lines of a log upon connect  Show previous last 10  lines of log when connecting to this port    e Strip the  M from SYSLOG  For logging to a SYSLOG server  strip  out all instances of the  M character sequence    e Automatic backup on mounting  Defines the action taken if a NFS  partition of a CF card is mounted or re mounted     Enable  Rename the existing log file by adding a  xx with xx being  an incremented number     Disable  Keep writing to the existing log file     e Monitoring interval  The frequency to update the port log in  seconds     7  Click Save  amp  apply     When port logging is enabled  a Port Event Handling page is available  to create alarm keywords and send alerts  See  Alerts and Notifications   on page 107 for more information     Chapter 4 System Status and Port Logging 58    View Port Logs    View Port Logs    Port logs can be viewed from the web interface on
109. TFTP based mechanism  When  booting  the Digi Passport unit can verify a    hash    file and determine if it  needs to download upgrades from the TFTP server  The TFTP upgrade  function can be configured using DHCP or by directly configuring the TFTP  server and the name of the hash file     The DHCP server can automatically assign a TFTP upgrade server and file  to the Digi Passport unit during boot  The options implemented are     e  66  TFTP server address  e  67  TFTP filename  the filename of the hash file     To enable DHCP firmware upgrade   1  Click System administration  gt  Firmware upgrade     2  Set Automatic firmware and configuration upgrade at boot time to  Enable     3  Set Use DHCP option for remote server and hash file to Yes   4  Click Save  amp  apply     The next time the Digi Passport unit reboots  it will analyze the hash file  and upgrade the firmware  configuration  or other files if required     Directly Configure the TFTP Server and the Name of the hash File    To configure the IP address of the TFTP server and the filename of the  hash file on the Digi Passport unit  follow the steps below     1  Click System administration  gt  Firmware upgrade     2  Set Automatic firmware and configuration upgrade at boot time to  Enable     Set Use DHCP option for remote server and hash file to No   Configure the IP address of remote server    Configure the Hash file name    6  Click Save  amp  apply     The next time the Digi Passport unit reboots  it will ana
110. The Digi Passport unit supports RemotePorts     RemotePorts are any type of  port that can be accessed using Telnet  SSH  or Raw TCP protocols  or  through service processors  for detailed information on configuring service  processors  see  Service Processors  on page 120   This type of remote port  access includes connections to Digi PortServer Terminal Servers  Sun ALOM  ports  and iLo  DRAC  and IPMI management ports  The RemotePorts feature  establishes the Digi Passport unit as the central access system for any kind of  text based out of band management     Using the Digi Passport unit as a central access system has multiple  advantages     e Central point of access   e Central user authentication   e Capturing of every user transaction on the remote system  e Keyword monitoring and alarming   e Centralized access to serial based and IPMI consoles    Remote ports also provide the additional capabilities described in the sections  on Port Logging  Alerts and Notifications  and freeKVM     There are two modes of using remote ports  basic and advanced  Basic use is  for ports accessed through Telnet  SSH  and Raw TCP protocols  and is  covered in this chapter  Advanced use is for ports accessed through service  processors  Configuration of remote ports for service processors is covered in   Service Processors  on page 120     Chapter 5 Configure Ports 102    Add and Configure a Remote Port    To configure a remote port     1  Access the Digi Passport unit   s web interface
111. access  to ports and port capabilities    Access Lists manage rights of multiple users at the same time  Multiple    users with the same rights are associated with an access list  This allows  the administrator to simplify the overall administrative process     1  Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface     2  Log in as root or admin  The default password for root is dbps  for  admin  admin     3  Under System administration  select User administration  The User  administration page is displayed     User administration       admin   user_admin       User name     User group   All group    Locked   Search    Current local users                  User name User group Shell                1 admin System admin Configuration menu  2 root Root CLI             Add   Remove II Unlock            4  Click Add  The Add user page is displayed     Add user       admin   user_admin   add       User name   ronk       Select group     User        Password   sooo       Confirm password   scoe       Shell program   Custom menu g  SSH public key authentication Disable E   Select SSH Version   SSH public key file              Add    Cancel             5  Fill in the user attribute fields  as described in the table below  When  done  click Add     Chapter 2 Getting Started 36    User attributes    User Administration       User attribute    Description       User name    Name for the user  Rules for user names include      Use
112. ace for the the Digi Passport unit  go to  Serial Port  gt  Configuration     Before connecting any serial devices to the Digi Passport unit   configure the Automatic Detection feature  On the Configuration page   click Port automatic detection configuration  Create a port automatic  detection list  which is a set of common serial port characteristics used  to determine which kind of device is attached to the Digi Passport unit   such as baud rate  data  parity  stop bits  and a string sent to the device  to detect its operating system and host name  The port automatic  detection list is used as probe criteria when Automatic Device  Recognition is activated and the serial ports are tested  For more  information on Automatic Detection settings  see  Configure Automatic  Detection  on page 77  Here is a typical example of probe criteria     Port automatic detection configuration      serial   serial_config   port_autodetect       Port automatic detection list  Baudrate Databit Parity bit Stop bit Probe string Wait time sec     115200     57600 v    Sbits    None    Ibi   30  Remove    Sbits      None   1 bi 30   Remove    bits      None    1 bat 30  Remove    Sbits      None   1 bit 30  Remove      Sbits    None    1 ba Add          Save to flash Save  amp  apply Cancel    3   4     Click Save  amp  apply     Enable Automatic Detection for all ports  In the serial ports view   Serial Port  gt  Configuration   click All to select all ports  Change the  Automatic Detection settin
113. age to port user  g port group  Test Group   x close current connection to port    To display the Port Group menu  enter g    lt Port Group  Test Group  gt     Cc send command to all ports  S switch to a port    show last 100 lines of log buffer    To send commands to all ports in the same group  enter c   To access any port in a group  enter s     To check the last 100 lines of the log buffer  enter I  Make sure that port logging  is enabled to check last 100 lines of log buffer  see  Configure Port Logging   on page 57   For example      lt Port Group  Test Group  gt     c send command to all ports  S switch to a port    show last 100 lines of log buffer    Select a port to connect       1 4 10       gt  gt  gt  Log buffer is empty      continue       Chapter 5 Configure Ports 91    Advanced Port Configuration Settings    To display and configure more detailed serial port settings  click the Advanced  configuration link  The advanced port configuration settings are displayed     Configure Physical Serial Ports       Port management         serial   serial_config   ports jl B    port_mgmt       Basic configruation   Port management  Enable Disable this port   RealPort support   Group       Enable       Disable x   NONE x        Reset this port     Set this port as factory default     Apply all ports settings  Automatic detection  Port title   Host mode configuration  freeKkVM configuration  Serial port parameters  Port logging  Authentication   User access control  Alert con
114. agesteeecsbncel eu banieteeeeeneteceacaendieeeiaalaas 106    Chapter6 Alerts and Notifications  About Alerts and Notifications ssccuicsi cis tiesei teense aco edateeeccauconeseneet eens 107  Configure SIME PAAlGItS asi ces cee cates 2 da cee es atck oonakal Lact medene dun amthesahanetaeyamnencs 108    Contents    Contents    S  pp  rted SNMP Trap Sics an aee a e I a e eas 109    Setting Additional Traps at the Port Level           sssssssesssenrsserrnnesernnesrnrrrssrrrnserrnn 110  Configure SNMP VIOT V2 rras eea p r a a a aT 111  Manage SNMP configuration              cccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeensaaeeees 113  SNMPv3 Configuration cisticssoes eeietetavisincnmhesdouteiadeelteiavindacd Met oeuedeekieaiaes 113  Configure Port Event Handling vested cecsetice decd of atdenseteeiece  Bleue aed eeeeaa eee 117  Configure Alerts for Automatic Device Recognition  ADR                 eeeeeeeees 119  Chapter 7 Service Processors  Configuring a Service ProCGSSOl cic  3d cecsactne Peteeh ete ee heen ae nde etiantee 120  Intelligent Platform Management Interface  IPM             c cceeeeeeeeeenttteeeeeeeeeeeneee 122  Gontig  reAPMI face aston athe tra Narn Gat neta Reha ana Nl des 122  Connect to a Server via IPMI ou    eeccceeeesccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeensaaeeeeeaes 125  SMASH CEP eet cotectsnese ca E Seah Sacra Nahe Aaah Nas Seeder tr 128  Integrated Lights Out  iLO  iLO2         eee cece eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeneaeeeeneas 128  Configure iL
115. al Server Mode   In terminal server mode  the Digi Passport unit   s serial port is configured to  wait for data from the device connected to the port  If data is detected  the  Digi Passport unit starts a TCP session as a Telnet or SSH client to a pre   defined server  The server must be defined before the port can be  configured for a Telnet or SSH client  This mode is used to access servers  on the network from a serial terminal  RawTCP is also supported with the    Terminal Server Mode     Connection request  cel G              Network  Ethernet        Server    Chapter 5 Configure Ports    72    Configure Physical Serial Ports    Dial In Modem Mode   In dial in modem mode  the Digi Passport unit assumes an external  modem is attached to the serial port and is waiting for a dial in connection  from a remote site  When a user dials in using a terminal application  the  Digi Passport unit accepts the connection and displays the appropriate  prompt or menu  For example  user root would see the command line  interface  CLI   while user admin would see the configuration menu or CLI  depending on the shell for that user     Connection request    ni     pme  i PSTN      gt     w  f PC        yon PC Modem  a Card    Bp  Network  Ethernet       PC        serial             Chapter 5 Configure Ports 73    Configure Physical Serial Ports    Dial In Terminal Server Mode    Dial in terminal server mode is a combination of terminal server mode and  dial in modem mode  In this mode  the
116. ame or a DN             CA s Information   Country Name  2 letter code   AU   US   State or Province Name  full name   Your State   Minnesota  Locality Name  e g   city      Minneapolis   Organization Name  e g   company   Digi International  Organizational Unit Name  e g   section     Enter     Common Name  e g   YOUR name or your server   s hostname      Digi  Passport    Email Address     Enter   Enter the following    extra    attributes to be sent with the certificate request     A challenge password     Press Enter   Do not enter any other  characters    An optional company name     Press Enter   Do not enter any other  characters     Sign a Certificate Request    1     To sign a certificate request  enter the following      cd  work openss1 0 9  c CA     cp req pem newreq pem     sh  usr local ssl misc CA sh  sign   Use the configuration from sample file  usr share ssl openssl cnf    Enter PEM pass phrase  Enter the CA Password created in  Create Use a    Server Certificate  on page 257  in the step that begins  Enter the PEM pass phrase     CA Password   Check that the request matches the signature   Signature ok   The Subjects Distinguished Name is as follows  countryName  PRINTABLE  US    stateOrProvinceName  PRINTABLE   Minnesota   localityName  PRINTABLE   Minneapolis   organizationName  PRINTABLE  Digi International    commonName  PRINTABLE  Digi Passport       Certificate is to be certified until Oct 6 09 39 59 2013 GMT  3653  days     Sign the certificate   y n
117. anges in the Web interface    In the web interface  there are two ways save and apply configuration  changes     Chapter 2 Getting Started    To save and apply changes immediately  click the Save  amp  apply button     To save multiple changes  but apply changes once  click the Save to  flash button  Changes are immediately saved  but they do not take  effect until clicking Apply changes  The Apply changes link is located  on the left navigation menu  Or use the Save  amp  apply button at the  bottom of the page     28    Serial Port Connection Page  Manage and Control Connections    Serial Port Connection Page  Manage and Control Connections    Upon login  a page showing the systems that can be managed and  controlled is displayed                   User  admin   Serial port connection  J      serial   serial_connect  Network  Peer  All peers y  Port title    Serial port  Configuration Port access menu connection  Connection  Port access menu connection  Clustering Individual port connection  Power controller Status Port  Title Comments  Peripherals 1 Port Title  1  lt  Not used  gt   Custom menu 2 Port Title  2  lt  Not used  gt   3 Port Title  3  lt  Not used  gt   System status  amp  log 4 Port Title  4  lt  Not used  gt   System administration 5 Port Title  5  lt  Not used  gt   Oe 6 Port Title  6  lt  Not used  gt   System statistics 7 Port Title  7  lt  Not used  gt   8 Port Title  8  lt  Not used  gt   9 Port Title  9  lt  Not used  gt   Start device locating Port Titl
118. apply Cancel    Chapter 8 Users  Security  and Authentication 153    Configure Authentication for the CLI    LDAP Authentication    The Digi Passport unit supports authenticating against an LDAP based  database  including LDAP systems running on Linux servers  and Microsoft  systems running the Microsoft Active Directory with the LDAP gateway  ADAM  Active Directory Application Mode      If the Digi Passport unit authenticates against an LDAP directory  all users  must be configured in a single container  The Digi Passport unit will extend  the username using the LDAP search base and authenticate the user     For example  consider a domain named dilbert com  The LDAP server is  at 10 1 1 1  All users with access to the Digi Passport unit are located in the  container USA Users     The LDAP authentication for users of the domain is configured as follows   Authentication method  LDAP server   First LDAP Server 10 1 1 1   Second LDAP Server   LDAP search base  ou users ou usa dc dilbert dc com   Domain name for active directory    If the LDAP database resides on a Microsoft system  the Domain name for    the active directory  in the above example  dilbert com  must be  configured     If using a non Microsoft system  do not use this setting  as it changes the  LDAP to comply with Microsoft syntax     Chapter 8 Users  Security  and Authentication 154    Configure Authentication for the CLI    Custom PAM Module    The Digi Passport unit supports custom PAM modules for remote  authe
119. are upgrade   Select menu   Protocol  BOOTP    IP address assigned to Ethernet interface  192 168 161 5   Server   s IP address  192 168 0 128    Default Ethernet interface  ETHERNET1    Firmware File Name  pp bin    Auto firmware Upgrade on next boot OFF    Start firmware upgrade    lt ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh    ON OTF Go NO e    6  Enter the information for the first menu items   e Protocol  The choices are BOOTP or TFTP      IP address assigned  Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport  unit   e Server   s IP address  The IP address of the BOOTP or TFTP  server        Firmware File Name  The filename for the firmware   e Ethernet interface  1 or 2   Use the ESC key to return to earlier menu screens   7  Select Start firmware upgrade   The firmware upgrade will take several minutes to process   The factory default settings will be restored     8  When the upgrade process is complete  press the ESC key to return to  the main menu     9  Select Exit and boot from flash     Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface 271    Configmenu scripting    Configmenu scripting    There are scripting capabilities built into Configmenu as a convenience for  command line users who need to configure multiple devices via scripts     Note  Not all sections of Configmenu support the scripting feature   Clustering and Power Controller do not support scripting      Syntax and examples    The following command line options are supported for scripting to UI   configmenu  in the CLI      
120. at    File Name  The name of the configuration file    Backup interval  The periodic hourly interval to back up the  configuration files    Recipient   s email address  The email address to send the  configuration file     Chapter 18 System Administration 290    Configuration Management    Option for auto backup configuration to use an auto file naming scheme    The following file naming schemes are supported for the auto backup  configuration       HOSTNAMES   Add host name       TIME  lt time format gt     Add current time     For example  config  TIME  m d y  tar gz makes config   052507 tar gz file  For more detailed information about  lt time format gt    please refer to the Linux man pager of    strftime        Configure the automatic backup option  To configure the automatic backup option     1  Select Periodic or 10 minutes after latest change from the pulldown  menu     Select the location to save the file   Select Yes or No to encrypt  and enter the file name   Enter the number of hours for the backup interval  if periodic      Enter the recipient   s email address to send the configuration file  if the  location is sent via email      6  Click Save  amp  apply     Gt   O    Chapter 18 System Administration 291    Automatically Upgrade Firmware or Configuration using TFTP    Automatically Upgrade Firmware or Configuration using TFTP    Using DHCP    The Digi Passport unit supports upgrading the firmware  configuration  or  any other files in the file system using a 
121. atae aks 16  Command Line Interface sc ccccressscteeesieteasecescaceavevsekenseaesndenestecbeeeabsaeeeens duaaeden 17  INP cc A SEEE E EA E AS 17  Users and  User GOUS   ireren a etea eevee E EEE ER 18  Root and Admin Usernames and Passwords            ceceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 18  Adding Port Administrators and Users         cecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennaeeeeeeeneeees 18  User OUD So erein cette sae ieee eet aaah hectobine a BOR ecereaine oe ec as occ Ne 18  ACCESS  LISTS  ts cesncis pisces soprentens eea raea E sete aA Aaaa Eeoa 18  Options for Accessing the Digi Passport POrtS         essssseessserrnssrnrererrersserrrssrrrnne 19  Web Interface Access Menu              cccccceeeeeeeececeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeenegs 19  Port AGCess MOM cceteccteaniotun bclencanceeiiaialaaieel eke Ea KAAT EN AE EEEE eat 21  Direct POM ACCESS ea aaea aa a E AEEA AANE EA Tanai 22  E STON ENa O e EEEE E E EE A ces coe darth aac eat TT 22  POM Es  ape Men   ranis n aean a aAA A e a e a na aes 23  Automatic Device Recognition           seseeesssssesssrrrrstetetttrrritttttttrrnrintnesesrtnnnnnsnssstenn 24  Locator LEDS arrinin ia sakes a a ae E aaa aE EE AAEE a 24  Enable Locator LEDS aoip toane tsesa payaan iae iaia aap uaa iaoeia b ia 24  T  r Off Locator LEDS necere ieee eae daiadig aatanlonke 24  Chapter 2 Getting Started  Assign IP Settings from the Console Port        sssssessssnnnssesrnneennnnennnrssrrrrnerrrnnerrrnee 25  Access the Web interface              sssssssssr
122. ated into the certificate   11  Enter text for a field call Distinguished Name or a DN  Although there  are many fields  some can be left blank  use a default  or enter   and the  field will be left blank           CA s Information  Country Name  2 letter code   AU   US  State or Province Name  full name   Your State   Minnesota  Locality Name  e g   city      Minneapolis  Organization Name  e g   company   Digi International  Organizational Unit Name  e g   section      Enter   Common Name  e g   YOUR name      Bob Alou  Email Address      Enter      12  Verify that the CA key file  demoCA private cakey pem  and CA  certificate  demoCA cacert pem  are generated     1s demoCA   cacert pem certs crl index txt newcerts  private serial      1s demoCA private  cakey pem    Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface 258    Make a Certificate Request  To make new certificates  first  make a certificate request     1     Enter      cd  work openssl 0 9 7c CA   Run the following commands  It is assumed that the sample configuration  file  openssl conf digi  is being used      openssl genrsa  out key pem 1024     openssl req  new  key key pem  out req pem    3  Use the configuration from  usr share ssl openssl cnf     A prompt is displayed to enter information that will be incorporated into the  certificate request    There are many fields  but some can be left blank and some fields have  default values  Entering   leaves the field blank     4  Enter text for a field call Distinguished N
123. ations and Certifications    308    Rack Mounting  Rack Mounting  Rack Mounting Installation    1  Attach enclosed bracket ears to rack as shown in illustration     NS A    i  E        N  E  ia    h   lt  ea x   ba e    no F  Ba        P   Da  amp      LS Rack shown in illustration is not  included with the Digi Passport    unit     2  Follow safety and installation considerations when placing the Digi  Passport unit on the rack     Rack Mounting Safety and Installation Considerations  e Physical location and spacing    e Install equipment in Restricted Access Areas only  dedicated  equipment rooms closets  in accordance with Articles 110 16   110 17  and 110 18 of the National Electrical Code  ANSI NFPA 70     e To ensure proper ventilation and air flow for units  provide at least 12  inches  30 centimeters  of clearance on all sides for each unit     e Distribute weight evenly in the rack to avoid overloading   e Temperature    e Elevated operating ambient temperature  If installed in a closed or  multi unit rack assembly  the operating ambient temperature of the  rack environment may be greater than room ambient temperature   Install rack mounted equipment in an environment compatible with  the manufacturer   s maximum rated ambient temperature  Tmra      e For a rack setup with forced air  the device can run 0 55   C with no  extra space above or below the device  default design of the Digi  Passport Rack provides 1 16      2mm between devices      e For a rack setup with
124. aults  and  disaster recovery procedures     Upgrade Firmware    Web Interface  The latest firmware for the Digi Passport unit is in this location   http   www digi com under Support  Firmware  Passport   To download the latest firmware version to the Digi Passport unit from the  web interface   1  Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface     Select System administration  gt  Firmware upgrade     Select Local machine or CF card  if configured     Click Browse and locate the firmware download     Click Upgrade   Important  Do not remove power from the unit while firmware is being  updating   The unit will reboot automatically when it is done flashing the new firm   ware     ar w MN    Firmware upgrade    Select the new firmware binary file  This will take 8 minutes maximum    Location   Local machine fi    Local machine          Automatic firmware and configuration upgrade at boot   Disable E   time   L j  Protocol     Use DHCP option for remote server and hash file         IP address of remote server            Hash file name      Save to flash Save  amp  apply       Chapter 18 System Administration 288    Configuration Management    Configuration Management  Configuration management allows saving all or parts of a configuration at a  specified interval  either periodically or ten minutes after the latest  changes  The Digi Passport unit saves all configurations when clicking  Save  amp  apply or Apply cha
125. aut 1  sljo_exclolie 110 0  5  1   network ip ipconfl ipconfl1l ip_mode 1   network ip ipconfl ipconfl1 s_ip_enb 0   network ip ipconfl ipconfl1l subnet 255 255 0 0   network ip ipconfl ipconfl_ipv6 ip_mode 0           network ip ipconfl1l ipconfl_ipv6 ipv6to4_enb 0   network ip ipconf2 ipconf2 ip_addr 192 169 161 5   network ip ipconf2 ipconf2 ip_mode 0   network ip ipconf2 ipconf2 s_ip_enb 0   network ip ipconf2 ipconf2 subnet 255 255 0 0   network ip ipconf2 ipconf2_ipv6 ip_mode 0        network ip ipconf2 ipconf2_ipv6 ipv6to4_enb 0        network ip manual_dns_enb 1   network ip reuse_old_ip 0     network ip src_based_route 0    To get the IP address of Ethernet 2 port eth1   run the following command     root Digi_Passport     configmenu get  network ip ipconf2   ipconf2 ip_addr   Get    network ip ipconf2 ipconf2 ip_addr 10 0 5 2    To set the IP address of Ethernet 2 port eth1   run the following command      root Digi_Passport     configmenu set  network ip ipconf2   ipconf2 ip_addr 10 0 5 2    sert g  iaeewenclk lt   Wjo  ajo ll  sljoxcomieil  ajo_achie   11 0  0 5 2    To save the changes  run the  set  and  save  commands as shown below      root Digi_Passport     configmenu set  network ip ipconf2   ipconf2 ip_addr 10 0 5 2 save      er s  iaewenclk lt  ijo  ajo   alocomie2   ajo aclee   110 05 2    To apply the changes  issue the    apply    command      root Digi_Passport     configmenu set  network ip ipconf2   ipconf2 ip_addr 10 0 5 2 save apply  ser g  networ
126. basic and advanced configuration  settings for the same port     Advanced configuration settings     Port management      serial   serial_config   ports   1      port_momt       Basa confiquraven   Port management  Enable Disable this port   RealPort support    Group    Reset thus port    Set this port as factory default  Apply all ports settings  Automatic detection  Port title  Host mode configuration  freeKVM configuration  Serial port parameters  Port logging  Authentication  User access control  Alert configuration    Cancel          Save to flash Save  amp  apply Cancel    Links to other port configuration settings    Chapter 5 Configure Ports    This topic focuses on the Basic and Advanced port configuration settings  and on configuring automatic detection for serial ports  There are several  other links to port settings on the Configuration screen which are covered d  later in this chapter    e Port access menu configuration  Configures the basic access    options for the command line based Port Access Menu See  Port  Access Menu Configuration  on page 86     Port group configuration  Configures groups of ports  which allows for  commands to be sent to multiple ports  See  Port Group Configuration   Applying Commands to Multiple Ports  on page 87     66    Configure Physical Serial Ports    Recommended sequence for configuring port settings    If using the Basic and Advanced configuration settings to configure serial  ports  the sequence is     1     In the Web interf
127. ble adapters  The following  illustrations show cable adapter pin outs  Additional adapters can be  purchased from Digi in quantities of 8     DB 25 Male Console Adapter   Digi 8 pack reorder P N 76000672     Pin  13       Pin  25    DB 25 Male to RJ 45 Connector Pin Assignments                                  RJ 45 Signal DB 25M Signal  1 CTS Connected to 4 RTS  2 DSR Connected to 20 DTR  5 DCD  3 RxD Connected to 2 TxD  4 GND Connected to 7 GND  6 TxD Connected to 3 RxD  7 DTR Connected to 6 DCD  8 DSR  8 RTS Connected to 5 CTS                         Chapter 19 Specifications and Certifications 303    Cable Adapters and Pinouts    DB 9 Female Console Adapter   Digi 8 pack reorder P N 76000671     Pin  1       DB 9 Female to RJ 45 Pin Assignments                                  RJ 45 Signal DB 9F Signal  1 CTS Connected to 7 RTS  2 DSR Connected to 4 DTR  5 DCD  3 RxD Connected to 3 TxD  4 GND Connected to 5 GND  6 TxD Connected to 2 RxD  7 DTR Connected to 1 DCD  6 DSR  8 RTS Connected to 8 CTS                         Chapter 19 Specifications and Certifications 304    DB 25 Female Console Adapter     Digi 8 pack reorder P N 76000673        Pin 1    DB 25 Female to RJ 45 Pin Assignments    R Pin 25    Pin  1        Cable Adapters and Pinouts                                                    RJ 45 Signal DB 25M   Signal  1 CTS Connected to   4 RTS  2 DSR Connected to   20 DTR  5 DCD  3 RxD Connected to   2 TxD  4 GND Connected to   7 GND  6 TxD Connected to   3 RxD  7 DT
128. call a local Telnet or SSH  application  see  Host Mode Configuration  on page 71     Introduction 20    Options for Accessing the Digi Passport Ports    Port Access Menu       Access  Type    Web Any user can use this method  1  Access the web interface    interface 2  Select Serial port  gt  Connection  gt  Port  access menu connection    3  Log in    Permissions Procedure          Telnet SSH Any user can use this method  1  Telnet to the Digi Passport unit specifying its IP  address and port 7000   7000 is the default  socket port for access menu  Example     telnet 192 168 15 7 7000  2  Log in       Command Root From the command line  issue the  line portaccessmenu or connect command   Example     portaccessmenu    connect 4 to connect to port 4       Telnet SSH Any user Example   telnet passportdemo digi com    If user   s shell is configured to    Port access  menu     please refer to  Administering Users  on  page 69                    The Port Access Menu provides access to ports  It is accessible to all users  through the web interface  Telnet and SSH sessions  and remote modem  access     Chapter 1 Introduction 21    Options for Accessing the Digi Passport Ports    Direct Port Access    Connect directly to a properly configured port through a Telnet or SSH  session  Configuration requirements include setting the Host Mode to  Console Server Mode and the Protocol to either Telnet or SSH  Ports  by  default are set to Console Server Mode and Telnet  Use the following 
129. ch as Start  Stop and  Reset  are displayed     SMASH  iLO  on port 5       serial f serial_connect   smash       Connect to SMASH CLP Console    Current Default Target Path    system1    Targets Properties  firmware Name Value  bootconfig1 name   ProLiant ML310 G4  logi number 419807MX264201KX  led1 enabledstate enabled  oemhp_vspi1 oemhp_powerreg auto  cpul processor_number Hi  memory  pstate_number 2  memory2  memory3  memory4  sloti  slot2  slot3  slot4  fani  fan2  sensorl  sensor2  sensor3  sensor4    powersupply1  powersupply2    To move to the root path  click the leftmost   on Current Default Target  Path  as shown           SMASH  iLO  on port 5    serial   serial_connect   smash       Connect to SMASH CLP Console    Current Default Target Path    system1       Targets Properties  firmware Name Value  bootconfig1 name   ProLiant ML310 G4  logi number   419807MX264201KX  lad anahladctata     anahlad    Chapter 7 Service Processors 134    Integrated Lights Out  iLO  iLO2     If the target path has properties that can be set  the SMASH CLP user  interface displays an edit box for changing properties  for example     SMASH  iLO  on port 5      serial   serial_connect   smash                Connect to SMASH CLP Console   Current Default Target Path    map1   accounts   Administrator   Targets Properties  Name Value Oo  username   Administrator   F   password    terrene   F  name    Administrator Jo  group    admin config cemhp_rc  o    Set          Chapter 7 Service Proc
130. changed     Unit 3    Unit 4       Chapter 15 Port Clustering 221    Configure Master Slave Port Clustering    Configure Master Slave Port Clustering  Configuring the Digi Passport unit for port clustering requires these tasks     Configure all the Digi Passport serial ports     Assign one Digi Passport unit as the master clustering device  all other  Digi Passport units default to slave devices     Import the slave configuration to the Digi Passport unit   s master device     Assign Master Clustering Mode    To assign a Digi Passport unit as the master cluster device  do the  following     1     Chapter 15 Port Clustering    Access the Digi Passport unit through the web interface  This Digi  Passport unit will be the Master     Select Clustering  gt  Configuration     For the Clustering mode setting  select Master   By default  subsequent  Digi Passport units are configured in Slave mode        Click Save  amp  apply          cluster   cluster_config       Clustering mode configuration  Clustering mode  Master     Clustering information    No  Slave unit address No  of port No  Slave unit address No  of port    1     2   3 4   5 6   7 2   8   9        _ 10  11 _     12  i3 _   14  15     _ 16  i7         18  19 _     20  21 s i 22  23         24  25         26  27         28  29         30  31 _ _ 32  33          34  35     _ 36  37 _ _ 38  39 _     40  41   _ 42  43 _ _ 44  45 e oe 46  47     48       Save ta flash J   Save  amp  apply J   Cancel         222    Configure Ma
131. ches off the server  meaning it can no longer be  accessed remotely        Performance Displays to Microsoft Server 2003 status information              Process Displays the process list  for viewing and killing active processes    Serial Port Displays to port logging information    Log   IP Settings Displays IP settings  to verify and change settings as needed  However  the IP    settings are only temporary  they cannot be changed permanently through this  method                Chapter 10 Microsoft SAC Support 167    Chapter 11    About freeKVM    About freeKVM    Configure and Use freeKVM    The Digi Passport provides a method  called freeKVM  for gaining access  to the graphical interface of a system using the network  Using freeKVM  involves specifying a connection method and IP address to use to reach  the system  Supported connection methods include     Microsoft Remote Desktop Protocol  VNC  XManager for X Window System  Web redirection    A user defined option    Supported Free Protocols and Tested Client Software  This table lists the free protocols and the client software with which each    Chapter 11    protocol has been tested        Free Protocol    Tested Client Software       Remote Desktop    Windows 2000  XP  2003 Remote Desktop Client  Linux  rdesktop             VNC Windows  tightVNC  realVNC  UltraVNC  Linux  vncviewer  X Window System Windows  Xmanager       Linux Unix  X Window System       Configure and Use freeKVM    168       About freeKVM    Example 
132. ckaging     Assign IP Settings from the Console Port   To assign IP settings to Ethernet port  1 via the console port  follow these   steps  The default IP address is 192 168 161 5    1  Connect the console port on the rear panel of the Digi Passport unit to a  serial port on a workstation using the supplied straight through CAT5  cable and the appropriate console adapter packaged with the the Digi  Passport unit     roe 2  DIGI PASSPORT    use Console Fit Ethernet 2     E p      u         n n    n    n       Console port    2  Configure a terminal emulation program  such as HyperTerminal  using  these settings       bps 9600   e data bits 8   e parity none  e stop bits 1    e flow control none     3  Establish a connection to the console port of the Digi Passport unit and  press Enter to get a command prompt     4  Atthe login prompt  log in as admin  The default password for admin is  admin  The Configuration menu is displayed     Chapter 2 Getting Started 25    Assign IP Settings from the Console Port    5  Enter the number 1 for Network Configuration   6  Enter the number 1 to select the port for IP configuration       Linux 2 6 12  lt Digi_Passport gt   lt   gt     guration page  7 2006 3  F W REU   gt  v  8 8al    ppl6  proto   6616 001 MAC addr  lt eth  gt   G6 46 9D 22 DE 68    16 4 162 55    als  status  amp  log    System administration  8  Start device locating   hlelp   slave  Lalpply  elx it  COMMAND  lt Display HELP   help gt  gt  1      IP configuration  SNMP c
133. controller configuration   Digi RPM 8    Power controller  Alarms  amp  thresholds    Alarm threshold   14 0 amps  maximum value   Temperature threshold   90 0   o Coc    I Send email alert   M On alarm threshold M On temperature threshold    To     I Send SNMP trap   F On alarm threshold I  On temperature threshold      Use global SNMP configuration     Disable z     Trap receiver settings    IP Address Community Version    Outlets    1  On the Power Controller Configuration page  click Alarms  amp   thresholds    2  Enter the appropriate parameters  Select the condition s  for an alert  and enter the information for the alert  E mail or SNMP trap or select  both     If multiple power management units are cascaded  the alarm threshold  is set for the sum of all outlets   To set up an E mail alert  a mail server is required  If the mail server has  not already been configured  see  Configure SMTP Alerts  on page 108   If the SMTP server is not set up  the E mail option is not available    3  Click Save  amp  apply     4  Continue by configuring the outlets     Chapter 14 Power Controller 195    Configure Outlets    Configure Outlets    To configure the power supplied to the device from the power controller   follow these steps     1  Under Power controller  click Outlets   2  Click the outlet number to configure     Power controller configuration   DIGI RPM on Port 2                                        power   power_config   power_controller  Power controller  Alarms  amp 
134. ct access for  lt  lt  Everyone gt  gt  and add the  restricted user by deselecting his or her access     1   2     D    Log in to the Digi Passport unit  username root  password dbps      Select Power Controller  gt  Configuration  gt  Outlets  gt  outlet number  to configure       Select the port to configure to the outlet  If it is a non serial device select    None     Edit the outlet title  If there is a serial port  the port title will appear and  cannot be edited from this screen     Click Save  amp  apply   Check Everyone and click Save to flash     Enter the username that will NOT have access  deselect the Access  types that are restricted  and click Add     e Portis access to the port    e Monitor is access to sniff    e Power is access to the power management    Click Save to flash and repeat steps 7 and 8 for additional users       When all users have been added Click Save  amp  apply     Chapter 14 Power Controller 199    User Access for Power Controller    The screen shows that outlets 1 and 2 control power to the Sun Server  configured on port 1 of the Digi Passport unit  Outlets 3 and 4 are not serial  devices  User janl has been designated the specific user to control outlet    3  User tomw does not have access to Outlet   4     Power controller configuration   DIGI RPM on Port 8    Power controller  Alarms  amp  thresholds    Outlets  Outlet    Chapter 14 Power Controller       Title Unit   Outlet     Sun Server 0 1  Sun Server Backup 0 2  Backup Tape Device
135. d IDs tor Digi RPM Unit sic cose tected enone ccet inten ane 203  Managing Digi RPM from the Command Line             cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 204  Third Party Power Controllers   c   2 tascoianstesdeierssinuiad eves gereebisedieserpebnecencdenteetiace 204  Additional Configuration  Network Enabled ServerTech Power Controller 204  Pinouts for Third Party Power Controllers and Digi Passport                 eeeeee 218  Pinouts for RS 232 Port of ServerTech Sentry Power Controller                 218  Pinouts for RS232 Port of BayTech RPC series             ccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeteeees 218  Pinouts for console port of Digi Passport  0        eee eee eeeeeee cette eeeeeentaeeeeeeeeeeees 219    Chapter 15 Port Clustering    AB OUL Port Clustering e ee Bane e eaa eenaa a boat aaea ani AeL EAA AEAEE ASEAS 220  Master Slave Clustering si  0 c cesstsotetesistsnds venscnendesensecauaguedaaeesaneeetnacebbaes Seabee 220  Peer to Peer Clustering eisai eeesds dp aceescies paca dead es dadacet tawnlee cha pdicededadsdaweeuensaneus 221   Configure Master Slave Port ClUStering              cccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeteeneeeeeeeneees 222  Assign  Master Clustering Mode  vssicivauts hatte nde eeitnnedasaaevieba nckeataegaie 222  Configure Slaves to Join a Cluster   2    ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeteaeeeeeeeeaeeeteeaees 223  Configure Advanced Clustering Settings              ccccceceseeeeeeseteeeeeeeeieeeteeeees 224  Access the Cluster Ports asic sasctpalscecces agi peda ea Reat
136. e  10  lt  Not used  gt   Apply Changes Port Title  11  lt  Not used  gt   Login as a different user Port Title  12  lt  Not used  gt   Logout Port Title  13  lt  Not used  gt     Port Title  14  lt  Not used  gt   Port Title  15  lt  Not used  gt   Port Title  16  lt  Not used  gt     The Serial port connection page displays status of all ports at a glance   Clicking on the port number or title of the port expands the view  showing  all the available methods of connection or management for the port  such  as power control  serial terminal connection  port log  or alternate user  interfaces  as shown     Reboot       Peer  AT peers    Port titie    Search      oo User Comments     lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt     coocoocooccoco     lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  NOt uted  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Power controler  gt    lt  Not used  gt        ceococcoococoCco       Chapter 2 Getting Started 29    Serial Port Connection Page  Manage and Control Connections    Warnings and Alerts on the Serial Port Connection Page  If the power to a unit is turned off  the power warning status is indicated on  the main screen     If an event alert has been triggered  then the Alert Icon will appear     Capabilities from the Serial Port Connection Page    Systems can be powered on and off  a c
137. e  amp  apply     Chapter 9 Custom and Default Menus 161    Default Menu  The Port Access Menu    Default Menu  The Port Access Menu    The port access menu is a flat  one level  menu showing all ports  port titles  and the mode of each port  It provides an overview of all ports and initiating  a connection to any of them     When connecting to a specific port  a prompt for the username and  password us displayed     igi_CM_Device     wns    Port Title  3 Port Title  4  Port Title  5 Port Title  6  Port Title  7 Port Title  8       P  1  3  5  7    Enter command  1 8 serial port  P passwd  others for exit     gt        Access the port access menu  There are multiple ways to access the port access menu   e Using an assigned IP address  see  Host Mode Configuration  on page  71   e Using TCP IP port 7000  e Using TCP IP port 22 or 23 if the Shell program is set to port access    menu for this specific user  See  Add a Compact flash Card  on page  43     e Entering portaccessmenu from the command line    Connect to ports  The port access menu allows simple access to each port     By typing the number of the port to connect to  the Digi Passport unit  initiates a connection to this port using the appropriate protocol  either  Telnet or SSH     Change password  To change your own password  press the P Key     Display and connect to slave units    If the Digi Passport unit is configured to be the master in a master slave  scenario  Pressing the S key displays a list of all slave un
138. e Web  interface  This service is enabled by default  If  however  the unit will be  deployed outside a controlled LAN  HTTPS is often disabled to limit the  number of services available     All Ports  Enables disables access to all ports using any protocol     Set all ports to  Specifies the protocol to be used on all ports  The  default is Telnet     Stealth Mode  Makes the Digi Passport    invisible    on the network and  exposes only ports that are used to provide access  In Stealth Mode   the Passport does not reply to pings or traceroutes and does not  respond to communication attempts on unused TCP UDP sockets     Chapter 8 Users  Security  and Authentication 148    Security Profile    Password Security Settings  To enhance password security  use these settings     Minimum password length  Allows passwords that are 3 to 255  characters long  also allows spaces in passwords     Maximum password age  Specified in days  To disable this setting   enter 0     Enforce password complexity  Prevents including all or part of a  user   s account name  Passwords must be at least eight characters  long  or exceed Minimum password length if larger  Passwords can be  up to 255 characters long and must include three of these four  categories of characters     e English uppercase characters  A Z    e English lowercase characters  a z    e Base 10 digits  0 9    e Non alphabetic characters             and so on    Enforce password history  Prevents reusing the last nine passwords     E
139. e oia aaeain ancteysecnntes 39  Add an Access List and Add Users to Ito    eeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeennaaeeeeeeeeeeeas 40  Chapter 3 Install and Configure PC Cards  Compatible PC Card Srrctc iscsi sartsenatadtciniiqshkaeayiaansteenasoataiaayeneaes 42  Add a Compact flash Gare  ctcec chs cas seceleac ayia tied vi vassaceaauaaceenehats eatacaasSteateueend 43  Adda NETWORK Care deron ea cea Sistas alata a ae tonn td senned yee hes hagen 44  Add a Wireless LAN Card 2c2 c5 cfeecssiece tease Seca eee ceteasanaces Sede thatagatene teens steeasadentce 45  Add    Serial  Mode Ms  ertiecunci is coats aene ee ie eda ag eee  46  Chapter 4 System Status and Port Logging  Available options for system status an port lOQS   00 0    eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 47  system Status   amp  Loge E a eiavinidis E EE ett 48  SVSISIMNTORIMAUOMN  erea e ea araeir ate Aa Eaa a ELSE passade 48  IP IN  OrmatiON sanni arees ioneina aah aea EEE a EAE a 48  Enable Log Storage Location ecc sicde dence leien ca act nedaredtie eat pene aet et aunts 49  Enable NFS Server ie cltakscscthiea  aceeiecie iwdeletat ie ticax scndbeacetetantaecsneeenammese 49  Set Up Alert for NFS Server Disconnect             e c ccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeteseeeteenneeees 51  Enable Syslog Server  sedaticiascctt Aanid feces saath a ntdadyadetv coves oaaeeant eedteneecaneke 52  Enable a Compact tlash  Card i  cc cict ciniiestitetashectauesneneydelvadernsbiieneeentneake 53  File Size and Memory Use for System and Port LOgS             ccceseec
140. e peers    Status fields and buttons on this page include      Not ready  Peer to peer mode is not active    e Not joined  Peer to peer mode is active but no peers have been  defined     e Joining  Joining peer to peer group       Joined  Joined peer to peer group    e Changing peers  Changing the information of peers in peer to peer  group    e Withdrawing  Withdrawing from peer to peer group       Withdrawn  Withdrawn from last peer to peer group    e Refresh button  Update display of this page        Join button  Used to join peer to peer group of a designated peer   requires common password         Withdraw button  Withdraws from the current peer to peer group   e Update button  Gets the information of peers that have not responded     e Peers list  The list of the peers that are members of the current peer to   peer group     Chapter 15 Port Clustering 229    Configure peer to peer Clustering    Join a Peer to peer Group    To join an existing peer to peer group  enter the IP address of a member of  that group and click the Join button  If the peer is not enabled or the  password is incorrect  the joining process will fail     Peer information for a joining peer    This screen shows peer to peer information of a joining peer after joining  an existing group  The list of peers consists of peer number  IP address   peer to peer authentication method  the link to the web interface of each  member of the group  the link to the port access menu and method  the  source port nu
141. ect ServerTech from the Manufacturer pull down     4  Select the serial port that the device is connected to  from the Port  menu list on the Add power controller page as shown below     Power controller configuration    power   power_config    Add power controller    Port  1 v  Manufacturer   i My  The number of cascaded units   3  4  Add controller 5  6  Power controllers 7  Port  Manufacturer Dae Title Outlets Action     New controller added          Chapter 14 Power Controller 207    Third Party Power Controllers    The resulting page will open     Power controller configuration    power   power_confia    Add power controller    Port   8 E    Manufacturer   ServerTech v     The number of cascaded units   1x   Web protocol   HTTPS     Destination IP address            Web source port   60008       Web port   443     Add controller    Power controllers  Port  Manufacturer Title  No power controller added             5  Set the number of cascaded units    6  Set the web protocol    7  Fill in the destination IP address  This is assigned to the ServerTech  device    8  Press Add controller     After adding the Power controller a page similar to the one below will be  displayed     Power controller configuration    power   power_config    Add power controller    Port   1 S  Manufacturer     DIGIRPM _ xj  The number of cascaded units   1 5    Add controller    Power controllers  Port  Manufacturer Title Outlets Action    48 ServerTech ServerTech on Port 48 96  49 ServerTech Ser
142. ed as the storage location  log files are saved to  volatile memory  meaning files are lost when the power is turned off  To use  a syslog server  an NFS server  or flash  enable the devices and or enter  the required information  then designate them as storage locations     System logs track events such as logins  authentication failures  system  configuration changes  and more  Port logs  on the other hand  document  the data flow through the serial ports  This chapter outlines locations for  viewing the system and port logs     Chapter 4 System Status and Port Logging 47    System Status  amp  Log    System Status  amp  Log    For basic system information  click System status  amp  log  System status  information includes     System Information    IP Information    Model No   Identification of Digi device    Serial No   Serial number of product    F W Rev   Revision number of firmware    B L Ver   Bootloader version    MAC address  MAC address of Digi device    Uptime  Amount of time since last reboot    Current time  Time based on time set for Digi device   System logging  Status of system logging  Enabled or Disabled   Send system log by email  Condition for notification   PC card type  Description of PC card if configured  PC card model  Model of PC card if configured  Power status  Dual power  1   Normal  2   Normal     IP mode  Method for setting IP address  Static  DHCP  PPPoE  or  Disabled    IP expiration  When the IP address will expire   IP address  Actual IP add
143. ed on  the server    e SMASH  Enables or disables use of the SMASH  Systems  Management Architecture for Server Hardware     e Allow unattended continuous connection  If Enabled  when the  connection is lost  it is reestablished automatically  Enabling this  setting also enables the Automatic login setting and additional  login settings    e Automatic login  whether the specified user should be  automatically logged in    e User name  A user configured on the server with access to DRAC    e Password  Supply and confirm the password for the above user     e Reestablishment interval value  The time  in seconds  after which  a lost connection will be reestablished  The default is 5 seconds     Click Save and apply     Chapter 7 Service Processors 137    Dell Remote Access Controller  DRAC     After DRAC is configured  to access the DRAC port  select  Serial port  gt  Connection  If DRAC and SMASH are configured  four  connection icons are shown  as in the example below     45 Port Title  45 D  lt  Not used  gt   46 Port Title  46 0  lt  Not used  gt   47 Port Title  47 i   lt  Not used  gt   48 Port Title  48 0  lt  Not used  gt   49 DRAC 0  lt  Not used  gt       Serial Terminal Connection  View Port Log    DRAC GUI Access    SMASH GUI Access  50 iLO 0  lt  Not used  gt     Serial Terminal Connection is for direct access to the DRAC service  process     View Port Log displays logs for the connection made from the Digi  Passport unit     Chapter 7 Service Processors 138    Dell 
144. eeeeeeeeeeeees 54  Configure System Logging siiscsictiaiciedeetachelsnssieddecteddelsuterdeidiabaiastie dead 55  View System LOGS seas crecus iieiea a aeea a a EEES aeaa Ea 56  Configure Port Logging         ssssessssssreesseessstrrrsertrnrertnnttsttrrsstrrrnetnnnntnnnnsstnnnseeen nnne 57  View POr LOOS pirri anaa p iea ea a Ee ee 59  Chapter 5 Configure Ports  Configure Physical Serial Ports               ccesccceeesssceeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeseenneeeseeeeeaeees 61  QUICK Stat Proced  ra eei nested eat eet iets  62  Apply All Ports Settings 6 vaccac om cereess sate ted hates ite Gahan hcg dedecmmeusenacaeitade 64  About Basic and Advanced Serial Port Settings             ccccceceseeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 66  Basic Port Configuration Settings               ccccceesccceeeesseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseneeeteeeaeeees 68  Port Access Menu Configuration               ccccceeseccceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeee 86  Port Group Configuration  Applying Commands to Multiple Ports                  87  Advanced Port Configuration Settings           eeccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenteeeeeeeaes 92  Reset  POMS aan aaa e Sea Aa Adee aed aaa da AAAA een pa 101  Configure Remote POMS  cascccgeceeceesucsset ce adeeerets upadenuds aeesd enue del eetauge dened tact ardeadvede 102  Add and Configure a Remote Port               ccsccceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeene 103  Advanced Remote Port Parameters                e cecccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeeseeneees 105  Access a Remote Port cicivicsc
145. elect Connect to the network at my workplace and click Next   Select Dial up connection and click Next    Enter Connection name and click Next    Enter Phone number and click Next     For Connection Availability  select Anyone or My use only and click  Next     Click Finish     Right click the on the connection just created to open the connection  properties window     10 On Security tab  check Advanced for Security options and click  Settings     11 On the Advanced Security Settings window  set the parameters as  follows     e Data encryption  Optional encryption  connect even if no  encryption     e Allow these protocols  Unencrypted password PAP  Challenge  Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP      Click OK   12  Check the Run script checkbox  select Generic login  and click Edit   13  Check the Show Terminal Window checkbox   14  Run the dialup connection and click the Properties button     15  Click the Security tab  In the Interactive logon and Scripting section   check the Show Terminal Window checkbox  This option will display  the terminal window so that you can type a user name and password  manually    16  In file switch inf  edit following lines as instructed    line 72  OK  lt match gt  login     gt  OK  lt match gt  login       sob  AP ON  ae ee te       9     insert a space character before         n  n  line 80  COMMAND  lt user name gt  lt cr gt    gt  COMMAND admin lt cr gt   line 89  OK  lt match gt  password     gt  Ok  lt match gt  password     insert a
146. elect the device to which the modem is connected  Click OK     13  On the KPPP window  select the Connection name that was just    configured  Enter the login ID and password and check the Show log  window checkbox     14 Click Connect  The login process is displayed in the Login Script    Debug Window     If errors occur  error messages are displayed on the Redhat machine in  the file  var log messages     After connection  check whether correct PPP interfaces exist on both the  Digi Passport unit and Redhat machines     Set PPP Host Mode for a Serial Port    To set PPP host mode for a serial port  go to   Serial port configuration  gt Host mode configuration  gt Host mode  See   Host Mode Configuration  on page 71 and the description of PPP host  mode in  PPP Mode  on page 75     Chapter 2 Getting Started 35    User Administration    User Administration    Required Privileges for User Administration    Add a User    Only root and admin users can administer other users  The root user has  unlimited administration privileges  The admin user can view and change  all attributes except those that belong to the root user    There are several ways to manage users  A user can be added  edited  or  removed  Multiple users can be managed in Groups or Access lists  The  difference between Groups and Access lists are that Groups define  privilege levels to access or change configuration of the Passport unit itself   for Passport unit administration  while Access lists define rules for 
147. elnet 9600 N 8 1 NO  NONE Port Title  4 cs 7004 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 NO    Remote port configuration Remote port  5 NONE PortServerTS2 CS 7051Telnet 198 200 10 22 2001       to  port list    Port title     Listening TCP port        Advanced Remote Port Parameters    When remote ports are defined and selected  the Advanced port configuration  settings has a link  Remote port parameters  Parameters include     e Destination IP address  The IP address of the remote device   e Destination port  0 65535   The port number on the remote device        Protocol  The communications protocol used to communicate with the  remote device  Telnet  SSH  or RawTCP     e Allow unattended continuous connection  Allow unattended  continuous connection  If enabled  when the connection is lost  it is  reestablished automatically  Enabling this setting also enables the  Automatic login setting and additional login settings  Default is Disable     e Automatic login  Specifies whether a login to the remote device is  automatically performed  Enabling this setting displays the user login  settings  Default is Disable  no automatic login      e User name  The user name to be used for the automatic login     e Password  The password to be used for the automatic login  Supply and  confirm the password for the specified user     Chapter 5 Configure Ports 105    Configure Remote Ports    Access a Remote Port  To connect to a remote port using the web  Telnet or SSH client  use the port  access menu or a custo
148. elnet 9600 N 8 1 No  5 Port Title  5 cs 0 0 0 0 7005 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  6 Port Title  6 cs 0 0 0 0 7006 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  7 Port Title  7 CS 0 0 0 0 7007 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  8 Port Title  8 cs 0 0 0 0 7008 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  9 Port Title  9 cs 0 0 0 0 7009 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  10 Port Title  10 cs 0 0 0 0 7010 Telnet 115200 N 8 1 No  11 Port Title  11 cs 0 0 0 0 7011 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  12 Port Title  12 cs 0 0 0 0 7012 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  13 Port Title  13 cs 0 0 0 0 7013 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  Remote port configuration  Title Mode Assigned IP Port Proto Remote settings                No remote port found       Click  Remove  button to remove the checked remote port profile        Remote port title     Add       3  Select the port to configure  A window similar to this one is displayed   showing the serial port number and title        Serial port configuration   3   HPUX  XManager      Move to        Enable Disable this port    Enable Disable this port     Enable v  RealPort support    Disable v         Save to flash I  Save  amp  apply     Cancel      Reset this port   Reset  Set this port as factory default      Port title   Apply all ports settings  Host mode configuration  Virtual KVM configuration  Serial port parameters  Port logging   Port IP filtering  Authentication          User access control  Alert configuration    Chapter 11 Configure and Use freeKVM 176    Use freeKVM with X Window System Protocol and XManager Software    4  Select freeKVM confi
149. eriodically or 10 minutes after the latest changes     Configuration import  Location   CF Card USB storage Primary NFS server Samba server     User space  usr2     Local machine    Factory default  Configuration selection    Select all             Network configuration   Including IP configuration            Serial port configuration  Clustering configuration                Custom menu configuration          System user configuration          Power controller configuration          PC card configuration          USB configuration  System configuration  Perl configuration                   Encrypt   Yes       File selection      Automatic backup configuration  Automatic backup option   Disable he  Location   CF Card USB storage Primary NFS server Samba server  User space fusr2  Send via email    Encrypt    File name      Backup interval  hour  1   720         Recipient s email address           Save to flash j Save  amp  apply J   Cancel            Settings for automatic saving include      Automatic backup option   Disable  Select if not using an automatic save option   Periodic  Save after the specified interval     10 minutes after last change  Save ten minutes after the last configu   ration change     Location  Where to save the configuration  CF card  Primary NFS  server  User space  Send via email     Encrypt  Enables or disables use of encryption on the configuration file   Yes  File is encrypted   syscm     No  File is not encrypted   tar gz  in a tar and a gzip form
150. ers related with freeKVM configuration  such as the IP address and  client program  If the connected console is MS SAC  the IP address is  detected through the MS SAC console directly  If the connected console is  not MS SAC  the IP address is detected through the DNS server using the  detected hostname  The default is Enable     To get the correct automatic freeKVM configuration  before starting auto   matic detection  go to Network  gt  IP configuration and configure the DNS  server settings  The DNS settings have the IP address and hostname infor   mation for the servers connected to the serial port of the the Digi Passport  unit  Also  if the connected console is MS SAC  the settings Windows RDP  standard connection  Windows RDP console connection and Radmin  will be set to client programs for freeKVM  If the connected console is not  MS SAC  the settings VNC and XManager will be set as the client programs  for freeKVM  See  Configure and Use freeKVM  on page 168 for more infor   mation     e Use detected serial parameters and the port automatic detection list  if  defined  This setting and parameters are displayed only if the Device  detection method is set to Active  Once this option is enabled  the  Port automatic detection list is displayed just below the option  The Digi  Passport unit will detect the serial parameters of the server connected to  the serial port automatically  If no port automatic detection list has been  created  the text No rules is displayed below
151. essors 135    Dell Remote Access Controller  DRAC     Dell Remote Access Controller  DRAC     Configure DRAC    Dell Remote Access Controller  DRAC  is a specification for the equipment  that monitors the physical environment and condition of Dell servers  The  specification is intended to cover the regulation of temperature  voltage and  power  and to ensure the proper operation of the firmware     DRAC works with hardware servers regardless of the operating platform or  other software they may run  DRAC allows an administrator to manage  multiple servers from a single location by means of a user friendly  interface  Critical system events for each server can be logged  Settings for  each basic input output system  BIOS  can be monitored or changed   Servers can be remotely and independently    powered on or off  rebooted  or reset as necessary  Digi Passport supports    DRAC 4 and DRAC 5     To configure DRAC including SOL  Serial Over Lan  and SMASH CLP ona    remote port  follow these steps     1  In the Web interface  select Serial port configuration  Select the port to    configure for DRAC     gi  S     displayed     Host mode configuration    From the menu  select Advanced configuration    From the next menu displayed  select Host mode configuration   For Service processor  select DRAC    Click Save to flash  The Host Mode Configuration settings are                                        Host mode  Console server v    Type of console server  Other x    Rackable System
152. face  1  Select Network  gt  PPP configuration  gt Basic PPP settings  Enter    settings   e Dynamic IP address pool for incoming connections  select  Enable     e First IP address  Enter the starting address of IP pool  for example   192 168 161 200        Number of address  Enter the desired number for the address  for  example  10  Must be greater than 1     When all basic PPP settings are entered  click Save to flash   2  Select Network  gt  PPP configuration  gt  incoming PPP connection   Add a user for PPP connection and set parameters for each user   For Authentication configuration  enter   e Username  admin  e Password  new   admin    Specify the Password after setting all other parameters and just  before clicking Save to flash  If not  a Null Password can be speci   fied while changing other parameters     e Password  confirm   admin   e Authentication  CHAP PAP   For Peer configuration  enter    e     Automatically assign remote IP address from IP address pool   e  v  Allow client access to local network via PPP connection   Click Save to flash     3  Go to Peripherals  gt  Modem configuration  Enable the PPP  connection on the Modem     4  Click Save  amp  apply     Chapter 2 Getting Started 33    Configure Access to Digi Passport via PPP    Configure PPP from the Windows XP Interface    1  Select Start  gt  Control Panel  gt  Network Connections  The Network  Connections window is opened     Select File  gt  New connection to launch the New connection Wizard   S
153. figuration       This topic covers groups of settings that are not otherwise accessible from the    Basic configuration settings  that is     e Advanced automatic detection settings    e Advanced host mode settings  e Advanced serial port parameters    e Port logging   e Authentication   e User Access control  e Alert configuration    Chapter 5 Configure Ports    92    Configure Physical Serial Ports    Advanced Automatic Detection Settings  The advanced automatic detection settings allow configuring the rules and  execution of the automatic detection feature in more detail than on the Basic  settings     Note  If any settings on this page are changed from their default values for  Active or Passive automatic detection  the next time you navigate to the Basic  configuration page  the Automatic detection setting will have changed to  Custom     Advanced Automatic detection settings include     Device detection method  Sets the automatic detection method to Active  or Passive  or turns automatic detection Off     Initial delay  The time which the initial attempt at automatic detection is  delayed before starting  For Active automatic detection  the serial  parameter detection starts immediately regardless of this value  The  default is 5 minutes     Recheck interval  The time interval between automatic detection  attempts  This value must be greater than the value of the Initial delay  The  default is every 1440 minutes     Start time  Sets the start time of the first automatic
154. for Accessing the Digi Passport Ports    Port escape is the ability to escape from a port without disconnecting  In  port escape mode  a menu of options is displayed  for example  to power  the connected device on or off  send messages to port users  or close the  current connection to the port  Port escape is available in main sessions as  well as sniff sessions  Every connection method accommodates port  escape  Configure the escape sequence per port  To configure the port  escape sequence  follow these steps     1  Serial Port  gt  Configuration  gt  port number or All     2  Host mode configuration  gt  port escape sequence  enter a letter for  the Port escape sequence  The default is  lt Ctrl gt  z     3  Click Save to flash and continue with other configurations or click  Save  amp  apply for the changes to take effect   The port escape menu is automatically started if there is one active ses   sion to the port established    4  Enter the port escape sequence that was configured in step 2     Port Escape Sequences    The following table describes the fields and the operations for the port  escape feature  The fields displayed are those allowed by permissions     By entering a port escape sequence twice  it is directly transmitted once to  the connected device  If the escape sequence is entered twice within 1 2  second  the port escape menu will not open                                      Escape  Sequence Description of Action Occurrence  Ctrl   a Send message to port 
155. for troubleshooting common issues  that may come up when using freeKVM     Check software levels and install software as needed  Some general software considerations     e Because the freeKVM is launched by a Java applet  Java must be  installed on the Workstation and in a browser     e Regardless of the software package  make sure that the server has  support for that package enabled     Remote Desktop Protocol    Required Software    Remote Desktop Client software is provided as part of the standard  installation of Windows for Windows 2000  2003  and XP systems   Generally there are no issues because the software is installed in the  windows system32  directory     A Remote Desktop Client program is standard in major Linux distributions  and is available as an open source package that can be installed if it   s not  already present  Make sure the Remote Desktop Client is in the user path  on the Linux Unix server     Usage Notes    Applications management and most diagnostics can be performed from the  standard Remote Desktop connection  On Windows Server 2003  however   note that there are actually two different types of connection     one for  general access and one to take over the primary VGA data stream     Some applications may require access to the primary VGA data  Windows  systems prior to Server 2003 provide the VGA facility on the standard data  stream     To access the primary VGA data stream  use Remote Desktop Client     console     To enable Remote Desktop o
156. from the     Remote port parameters        e Destination port  normally  623 is the port used for IPMI  but this  value may vary on individual servers  For a remote port  this value is  supplied from the    Remote port parameters           User name  The user name for a user configured on the server that  can access the BMC     e Password  Supply and confirm the password for the user     e Sensor alert configuration creates create a list of sensors on the  server from which notifications are sent     Chapter 7 Service Processors 124    Intelligent Platform Management Interface  IPMI     Connect to a Server via IPMI    1  To connect to a server via the IPMI GUI  select the serial port  connection page     2  Select the serial port configured for IPMI  This menu is displayed     Serial port connection    serial   serial_connect    N Peer    Allpeers    Port title           Port access menu connection    Port access menu connection    Individual port connection    Status Port  Title   of User Comments  1 Port Title  1 0  lt  Not used  gt   2 Port Title  2  0   lt  Not used  gt   3 Port Title  3 0  lt  Not used  gt   4 PortTitle  4 0  lt  Not used  gt   5 PortTitle  5  0   lt  Not used  gt   6 Port Title  6 0  lt  Not used  gt   7 Port Title  7 0  lt  Not used  gt   8 Port Title  8 0  lt  Not used  gt   9 Port Title  9 0  lt  Not used  gt   10 Port Title  10 0  lt  Not used  gt   11 Port Title  11 0  lt  Not used  gt   12 Port Title  12 0  lt  Not used  gt   13 Port Title  13 0  
157. g   gt  System status  e System status  amp  log   gt  System log view  e Access lists add remove    e User administration add remove edit   gt  use  passwd  command in  the CLI    e Port automatic detection configuration  e Power controller management   e Peripherals configuration   e Firmware upgrade   e Configuration management    Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface 275    Back Up All Configuration Files Before Using Commands  Chapter 17 Command Line Interface    Digi Passport runs the embedded Embedded Linux operating system  The  command line interface for configuration purposes is accessible only by the  root user  The system administrator has read only privileges from the  command line  By default the root user is connected to the command line  interface  CLI  when accessing the Digi Passport unit through Telnet or  SSH  To gain access to the command prompt  the root user uses the  username root and the root password  The default root password is dbps     This chapter includes the Linux commands available on the embedded  Linux operating system and the location of files useful to the root user for  administrative purposes     Back Up All Configuration Files Before Using Commands    The root user should be aware that deleting or corrupting files may prevent  the Digi Passport unit from booting properly  Before editing any files  be  sure to back up configuration files     Chapter 17 Command Line Interface 276    Linux Commands    Linux Commands    This section lists
158. g   ports           basic    Basic configuration    Enable Disable this port      Enable w   RealPort support   Disable w    Host mode   Console server  Listening TCP port  1024 65535    7001    Protocol   Telnet          Automatic detection   Off x   Port title   Port Title  1            Serial port parameters   9600 v  8 bits v  None x  1 bit x  None    freeKYM configuration  Authentication    User access control    Advanced configuration       68    Configure Physical Serial Ports    The Basic configuration page sets the essential parameters required to  access the device attached to the corresponding serial port  including     e Enabling or disabling the serial port  e Enabling or disabling use of RealPort for the serial port    e Host mode  or the mode of communication between serial devices and  remote hosts    e The listening TCP port  or network port   e Protocol   e Enabling or disabling Automatic Detection of devices for the specific  port   e Port title   e Serial port parameters   There are also links to additional pages of configuration settings     e freeKVM configuration  to define the available methods for connecting  to the freeKVM graphical interface of the attached system  See   Configure and Use freeKVM  on page 168     e Authentication  to define the method used for approving access to the    attached system  TACACS   LDAP  RADIUS  Active Directory  Local  User database  etc   See  Authentication  on page 150     e User Access control  to define user spec
159. g from Off to Active    Click Save  amp  apply     As needed  change configuration settings for individual ports  using  either Basic configuration or Advanced configuration settings   Basic configuration settings are described on page 68  Advanced  configuration settings are described on page 92     Chapter 5 Configure Ports 67    Configure Physical Serial Ports    Basic Port Configuration Settings    On the Ports configuration page  selected by serial port  gt   Configuration   selecting any port number in the No  column displays the  Basic configuration page  For example     Chapter 5 Configure Ports          Configuration    serial   serial_config    Port access menu configuration   Port group configuration   Port automatic detection configuration  Ports configuration    No  Group Title Mode Port Protocol Serial Settings  All NONE Port Title CS 7001Telnet 9600 N 8 1 NO  tm tr sae Port Title  1 CS 7001Telnet 9600 N 8 1 NO  5 NONE  PortTitle  2 CS 7002Telnet 9600 N 8 1 NO  3 NONE  PortTitle  3 CS 7003Telnet 9600 N 8 1 NO  4 NONE  PortTitle  4 CS 7004Telnet 9600 N 8 1 NO  5 NONE  PortTitle  5 CS 7005Telnet 9600 N 8 1 NO  6 NONE  PortTitle  6 CS 7006Telnet 9600 N 8 1 NO  7 NONE  PortTitle  7 CS 7007Telnet 9600 N 8 1 NO  8 NONE  PortTitle  8 CS 7008Telnet 9600 N 8 1 NO  9 NONE  PortTitle  9 CS 7009Telnet 9600 N 8 1 NO  10 tsa Port Title  10 CS 7010Telnet 9600 N 8 1 NO  11 NONE  PortTitle  11 CS 7011Telnet 9600 N 8 1 NO             Basic configuration      serial   serial_confi
160. ge   Enter message      Server 25  Linux     Ese   S02 _   Show saved LCD upon startup   Yes  Set _  to No  Contrast  0 100   50 Set          Rackable Systems Mgmt Card properties    Rackable Systems Mgmt Card   4  Port Title  4    Control   LED LCD management   Rackable Systems Mgmt Card properties   Temperature     Temperature   26   C  78   F    Power on characteristics     Power on delay  sec  0 99    1 sec     99 for off     Power sense   Other  set  to Reset   Communication parameters     Baud rate   19200  19200 v   Set       Chapter 12 Rackable   Systems Management Card 184    Access Rackable Systems Management Card from Digi Passport GUI    Rackable Systems Management Card Properties and Controls       Field    Description       Control        Power status    The first column shows the current state  Three buttons are available to  initiate an action to either  power on  power off or restart the server   Depending on the current status  Power on or Power off is disabled        Reboot    Reboot the Rackable Server by sending a 500ms reset signal to the server        Connect       Spawn the Java Telnet applet or the local Telnet SSH application to connect  directly to the port        LED LCD Mgmt        LED Management       Controls the LED in the front of the Rackable Server  The first columns  shows the current status of the LED  Three buttons are available to select  the activity of the status LED  turn on  turn off and blinking  Either of these  buttons is disabled
161. gi Passport unit   s port settings        Chapter 12 Rackable   Systems Management Card 185       Chapter 13 Configure Remote Dial In Access    The Digi Passport unit supports dial in connections from remote sites for  out of band access  In this configuration  the Digi Passport unit has serial  ports configured for external modems and waits for dial in connections  from remote sites  When dialing in using a terminal application  the Digi  Passport unit accepts the connection and displays a menu of available  serials ports  In a dial in terminal server mode  the Digi Passport unit  makes a TCP connection with either a Telnet or SSH client to a pre defined  server  RawTCP is also an option for dial in users     For more information on the different types of Host mode configuration  see   Host Mode Configuration  on page 71     Connection request    2 4  op    serial    Card    Network  Ethernet       PC       Chapter 13 Configure Remote Dial In Access 186    Configure for Dial In Modem Access    Configure for Dial ln Modem Access    To configure a serial port for a dial in modem  enter the values for these  fields  Host mode  Modem init string  and Inactivity timeout  To access  the Host mode configuration screen  do the following     1     Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface     Select Serial port  gt  Configuration     Under Individual port configuration  select a specific port and then  select Host 
162. gin  Diable v  SNMP trap configuration  Port login trap  Disable       Save to flash Save  amp  apply    4  For Port access menu protocol  select SSH     When enabled  the Log in on port access feature requires two logins   once for access to the port access menu and again for the specific port   If this feature is disabled the only login challenge is to the Port Access  Menu  though only permitted users can successfully connect to any spe   cific port     5  Click Save  amp  apply     Chapter 2 Getting Started 31    Configure Access to Digi Passport via SSH    Configure a Port for SSH    1     St OC ON  tO    Chapter 2 Getting Started    Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit into the address bar of the  browser to access the web interface     Log in as root  admin  or a member of the port administration group   The default password for root is dbps  and the default password for  admin is admin     Under Serial port  gt  Configuration    Select All ports or an individual port to configure for SSH   Click Host mode configuration    For Protocol  select SSH    Click Save  amp  apply     32    Configure Access to Digi Passport via PPP    Configure Access to Digi Passport via PPP    The Digi Passport unit can be configured to support access to it via dial in  Point to Point  PPP  connections  PPP can be configured from a variety of  interfaces  including the Digi Passport unit   s web interface  Windows XP  or  a Linux client     Configure PPP from the Passport Web Inter
163. ging    Enter the remote port parameters as follows     Destination IP  The IP address of the server to monitor  Generally   this is the IP address assigned to the iLO management channel   Destination port  Normally 22 for SSH or 23 for Telnet  the actual  port may vary on individual servers    Protocol  The Protocol to be used on the port normally this would  be SSH  but Telnet or RawTCP can be used if it is enabled on the  server    SMASH  Select to Enable or Disable     Allow unattended continuous connection  If enabled  when the  connection is lost  it is reestablished automatically  Enabling this  setting also enables the Automatic login setting and additional  login settings    Automatic login  whether the specified user should be  automatically logged in     User name  This is a user configured on the server with access to  iLO   Password  Supply and confirm the password for the specified user     Reestablishment interval value  The time  in seconds  after which  a lost connection will be reestablished  The default is 5 seconds     Click Save to flash     Chapter 7 Service Processors    130    Integrated Lights Out  iLO  iLO2     6  The Service processor configuration settings are displayed at the  bottom of the Serial port configuration page  Select Service  processor configuration  The Service processor configuration  settings are displayed     Service processor configuration             Destination IP address  192 168 1 18  Destination port  0 65535    445   User na
164. gnized   After editing the scripts as either active_detect or passive_detect  save them  to flash using the saveconf command so they are not lost after a reboot   After executing the saveconf command  execute the applyconf command for  the change to take effect immediately     Chapter 5 Configure Ports 96    Configure Physical Serial Ports    Advanced Host Mode Settings    Advanced Host mode configuration settings allow for viewing and modifying  the configuration settings that define the communication between serial  devices and remote hosts in use with the Digi Passport unit in more detail than  the Basic configuration settings  Advanced host mode configuration settings  include     Host mode  Console server mode  terminal server mode  dial in modem  mode  and dial in terminal server mode     Type of console server  Select MS SAC to provide a graphic user  interface to the Windows Server 2003 Special Administration Console  see   Microsoft SAC Support  on page 163   In all other cases  select Other   Rackable Systems Mgmt Card  Enable to use Rackable Management  card    Service processor  If the attached device uses one of the following  supported protocols  select that here  For a full description of service  processor configuration  see  Service Processors  on page 120   Enable Disable assigned IP address  Determines whether an IP address  will be assigned to the port  The default is Disabled    Assigned IP  Also known as alternate IP  this field assigns an IP address  to
165. guration  This window is displayed     freeK  M configuration      serial   serial_config   ports   6     virtual_kym       Port management   Apply all ports settings  Automatic detection  Port title   Host mode configuration  freeKVM configuration    No  Connection IP address Client Program Program path  Nothing  New Disable            ae Add  Serial port parameters  Port logging  Authentication    User access control    Alert configuration       l Save to flash J   Save  amp  apply II Cancel         5  From the freeKVM connection pulldown list  select Enable   6  From the Client program pulldown list  select the Xmanager program   7  Click Save and Apply     Chapter 11 Configure and Use freeKVM 177    Web Redirection    Connect to a system through freeKVM using Xmanager    When connecting through the Connection window  and a freeKVM  connection is configured  these things are displayed     e The terminal monitor button  which connects to the serial console     e A mouse button  next to the monitor icon   which connects to the  freeKVM graphical interface          serial   serial_connect       Peer  Allpeers Y Port title   Search       Port access menu connection  Port access menu connection    Individual port connection  Status Port  Title  of User Comments  Port Title  1  Port Title  2  Port Title  3  Port Title  4  Port Title  5  Port Title  6     lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt     ee UN
166. guration menu     1   2     Access the configuration menu   Select System administration     System Administration    Select menu     User administration     Device name   Digi_CM_Device    Date and time     Configuration management     Firmware upgrade    lt ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh    gt 25        Firmware upgrade will RESTART your device       Do you want to start firmware upgrade Cy n       Select Firmware upgrade  Enter y for Yes when prompted whether to  upgrade the firmware     If the firmware upgrade is successful  the Digi Passport unit reboots  automatically  If a Firmware upgrade failed  warning is displayed  do  not reboot the unit but repeat the upgrade process     Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface 266    Restore Factory Defaults    Restore Factory Defaults    There are two choices to restore the unit to its factory defaults  restoring all  factory defaults  or restoring all factory defaults except IP settings  To  restore the Digi Passport unit unit to the factory defaults     1     2   3   4    Access the configuration menu   Select System administration   Select Configuration import   Select Location     Select menu   1  User administration   2  Device name   Digi_CM_Device  3  Date and time   4  Configuration management   5     Firmware upgrade   lt ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh   gt  4    Select menu    Configuration export  2  Configuration import   lt ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh  2      None    Filename   None    Encrypt    C
167. he Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface       From the menu  select PC card  gt  Configuration     Click Discover a new card  The Digi Passport unit searches for a PC    card and displays a configuration menu       Enter the appropriate parameters in the configuration menu     Click Save  amp  apply     Chapter 13 Configure Remote Dial In Access 190    Configure for Dial In Terminal Server Access    Configure for Dial In Terminal Server Access  The host mode Dial In Terminal Server is similar to the host mode Terminal  Server  but also allows configuring a modem init string  In this mode  an  incoming modem connection is automatically connected to an IP address   To configure a serial port for a dial in terminal server access  enter the  values for these fields  Host mode  Destination IP  Base Port  Protocol   Inactivity timeout  and Modem init string  To access the Host mode  configuration screen and configure dial in terminal server access   1  Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a   web browser to access the web interface     2  Select Serial port  gt  Configuration     3  Under Individual port configuration  select a specific port and then  select Host mode configuration     4  Select Dial in terminal server for the Host mode from the pulldown  menu     Host mode configuration      serial   serial_config   ports   6 Y    hostmode       Port management   Apply all ports settings   Port title   
168. he menu item     Create new submenu  Assign a name for a new submenu that this  menu item will be assigned or linked to     Go to existing submenu  Select an existing submenu from the  pulldown menu that this menu item will be assigned or linked to     Connect to serial port  Connects to a specified port   Connect to clustered serial port  Connects to a clustered port   Telnet to a remote host  A remote host   s IP address or host name     SSH  Secure Shell  to a remote host  Enter the host name or IP  address of a remote host and the remote username     Execute a custom command  A customized command  any valid  command on the command line with acceptable user privileges     Click Apply     To add more menu items  repeat this procedure  To add or configure  submenus  select Submenus on the Menu Configuration page     Chapter 9 Custom and Default Menus 160    Assign Users to a Menu    Assign Users to a Menu  1  Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface   2  Select Configuration  gt  Custom Menu  gt  Menu Users  A list of  available users is displayed        Custom Menu Configuration    Custom Menus    Menu Users  User Name Assigned Menu  nicholas  defaultmenu F   root  command E     Note  You must add a user to the system in the Users administration page     Save to flash   Cancel      Menu Configuration    3  Select a menu for a user by selecting a menu from the pulldown  Assigned Menu list     4  Click Sav
169. he modem connection ina  configurable interval     Enable Disable dial in modem test   Enable      Dial in modem test phone number   1234444567    Dial in modem test interval   every  24 hour s        The modem test allows a phone number and an interval to be speci   fied  After the system has booted  the interval has elapsed  and the  modem is not in use  the specified dial number is called  The  modem trains and receives a login prompt from the other side  nor   mally another Digi Passport unit   If the login prompt  login  is  detected  the line is disconnected again and the modem test is con   sidered successful  Two ports can call each other using this modem  test procedure  If the other modem is in use  the tests will fail     There are multiple ways to review the information about the mode  test     Through the syslog in the Digi Passport unit     In this example  a modem connected to port 16 calls another  modem connected to port 15  Here is how this activity is logged in  the syslog  Any errors occurring are captured in the syslog file as  well     07 16 2004 12 45 01  gt  Port  16   Modem Test started  Calling to  1234444567     07 16 2004 12 45 22  gt  Modem connected through Port  15  07 16 2004 12 45 22  gt  Port  16   Modem Test succeeded    Chapter 13 Configure Remote Dial In Access 188    Configure for Dial In Modem Access    By e mail based notification     The Alert configuration dialog of the port configuration  contains    multiple settings     Serial port
170. ial device connected to a power controller  for  example  an environmental sensor controller or a tape backup device  The  power controller is configured and accessed through the Digi Passport unit   This illustration shows the a power controller configured through the Digi  Passport unit for non serial devices     Tape Backup   Device  Environmental  Sensor Controller    A  Digi CM 32      Internet _      r a outlet  4     ee SS   3 Li S       Power Control    Remote    Administrator    Ethernet       The second scenario is a serial device  such as a router or server   managed through a port on the Digi Passport unit with its power supply  mapped through the power control feature  After configuration is complete   power is managed by connecting to the console management port on the  Digi Passport unit  The Power Controller feature handles the relationship of  a specific outlet to a serial device as if the power supply were also  connected to the same port as the serial device  In other words  it is not  necessary to view the physical connection or remember which outlet  controls a specific serial device after configuration  because the Digi  Passport unit performs those actions  The illustration shows a Sun server  configured through a serial port connection on the Digi Passport 32     Console    Remote  Administrator  Digi CM 32      Internet   amp        Ethernet    Power Control       Chapter 14 Power Controller 192    Install Power Controller    Install Power Controller 
171. ical  12W   Single Power max  15W  Dual Power max  30W  48VDC max  40W       Digi Passport 32    Typical  13W   Single Power max  15W  Dual Power max  30W  48VDC max  40W       Digi Passport 48    Typical  14W   Single Power max  15W  Dual Power max  30W  48VDC max  40W       Fuse  internal     FUSE  Type L  AC250V  2A       Operating system    Linux Hard Hat embedded       SDRAM       Digi Passport 8 16    128 megabytes       Digi Passport 32 48    256 megabytes       Flash memory          64 megabytes       Chapter 19 Specifications and Certifications    300       LED Indicators       Attribute       Value  AC Powered       Dimensions       Digi Passport 8    Length  17 50 in  44 30 cm   Depth  1 80 in  4 40 cm   Width  8 0 in  20 30 cm        Digi Passport 16 32 48       Length  17 50 in  44 30 cm   Depth  1 80 in  4 40 cm   Width  10 0 in  25 30 cm        Weight       Digi Passport 8    5 19 Ib  2 28 kg       Digi Passport 16       Digi Passport 32         6 09 Ib  2 78 kg   6 23 Ib  2 85 kg        Digi Passport 48    6 48 Ib  2 96 kg        Dual power models    Add 0 20 Ib  0 09 kg        Internal modem models          Add 0 33 Ib  0 15 kg        LED Indicators    Use the LED indicators to confirm network connectivity and that the Digi  Passport unit is able to send and receive data                                         LED Label Function  Power On when power is supplied   Ready On when system is ready to run   PC Card On when a PC device is running   USB On when a USB
172. ication  User access control  Alert configuration          l Save to flash J   Save  amp  apply J   Cancel         5  For the freeKVM configuration setting  select Enable     From the Client program pulldown  select  Windows remote desktop connection     6  If not using IP automatic detection  enter the IP address   7  Enter title for KVM connection   8  Click Save  amp  Apply     User permission for each freeKVM session can be specified separately    Chapter 11    Click No  on each freeKVM session configuration  then enter extended  configuration page for assigning user access list of each freeKVM session     freeKVM configuration    freeKVM connection  Enable v   Title  test   IP address  192 168 1 6   Client Program  Windows RDP standard connection v  Client program path   ROC  IP    Allow everyone  Disable v    User configuration  No  User  Nothing    New  Add     Any user who is added to this list can only access freeKVM on the  connection page     Configure and Use freeKVM 171    Use freeKVM with Remote Desktop Protocol    Connect to a System through freeKVM using Remote Desktop Protocol    When connecting through the Connection window  and a freeKVM  connection is configured  these things are now displayed     e The terminal  console     monitor button  which connects to the raw ASCII SAC    e A mouse button  next to the monitor icon   which connects to the  freeKVM graphical interface     e The manage    button  which connects to the SAC GUI screen     Serial port con
173. ific access permissions and  restrictions  See  Configure User Access Control  on page 142   Clicking the Advanced configuration link displays a more detailed set of    port configuration settings  These settings are described on  Advanced  Port Configuration Settings  on page 92     Enable and Disable Ports    Chapter 5    All serial ports may be enabled or disabled individually or as a group from  the web interface  Click Serial port  gt  Configuration  gt  port number or all   Select Port Management  gt  Enable or Disable from the pulldown menu   Then click Save to flash and continue with other configurations or click  Save  amp  apply     Configure Ports 69    Configure Physical Serial Ports    RealPort Support    The Digi supplied RealPort driver provides a logical connection from a host  computer to the physical serial port on the Digi Passport  regardless of  where it is located on the network  The software is installed directly on the  host and allows applications to talk to devices across a network as though  the devices were directly attached to the host  while actually the devices  are connected to a Digi device server or terminal server somewhere on the  network  RealPort is unique among COM port re directors because it is the  only implementation that allows multiple connections to multiple ports over  a single TCP IP connection  Other implementations require a separate  TCP IP connection for each serial port  Full hardware and software flow  control are also inc
174. ific port rights  If multiple people  are responsible for the Sun Servers and identical access rights for them  are desired  create an access list named Sun admin  which grants access  to all the ports connected to Sun servers  Then make all the Sun  administrators members of the Sun admin access list  See  Add an  Access List and Add Users to It  on page 40 for more information     Chapter 1 Introduction 18    Options for Accessing the Digi Passport Ports    Options for Accessing the Digi Passport Ports    There are multiple ways to access the native serial ports on the Digi  Passport unit     e Web Interface   e Port Access Menu  e Direct Port Access  e Custom Menus    Web Interface Access Menu    The web interface menu provides easy and convenient access to ports  All  users can access the menu by entering the the Digi Passport unit IP  address or host name in a web browser   s address bar  Only ports with  allowed access are displayed     To access a port from the web interface  do the following     1  Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit into the address bar of the  browser to access the web interface     2  Click Serial port  gt  Connection     Digi Passport    16 Configuration and Management  Dic 9 P 2 2     D1 PASSPORT  gt          serial f serial_connect                Network       Peer   All peers     Port title   Search  sett  Configuration Port access menu connection  Connection  Port access menu connection  Clustering    Individual port connection  Sta
175. iguration  Applying Commands to Multiple Ports  As aconvenience feature  port groups can be created to apply commands to    multiple ports  Instead of issuing commands to individual serial ports  the    commands can be sent to all ports in a group simultaneously through the port    escape menu  This can be useful for example when performing a mass    upgrade or emergency mass shutdown to multiple systems   Port groups are configured by clicking on the Port group configuration link     There is no limit on the number of port groups that can be defined     Here is a view of a list of ports for which some ports are assigned to a group  and some ports are not        Configuration         serial   serial_config       Port access menu configuration    Port group configuration    Port automatic detection configuration  Ports configuration    No  Group  All NONE  1 Test  Group  2 NONE  a NONE  ee  5 NONE    Chapter 5 Configure Ports    Title  Port Title  Port Title  1    Port Title  2  Port Title  3    Port Title  4  Port Title  5    Mode Port Protocol Serial Settings    cs    cs    cs  cS    CS  cs    7001 Telnet    7001 Telnet    7002 Telnet  7003 Telnet    7004 Telnet  7005 Telnet    960    960    960  960    960       960    O N 8 1 NO    O0 N 8 1 NO    O N 8 1 NO  O0 N 8 1 NO    O N 8 1 NO  O0 N 8 1 NO    87    Configure Physical Serial Ports    Create a port group  To create a port group   1  On the serial port Configuration page  click the Port group configuration  link  The P
176. igured  it reports all of  its slave ports to the other peer units  However  it is still necessary for that  Digi Passport unit to be operational to reach the Slave ports it controls     Chapter 15 Port Clustering 220    About Port Clustering    Peer to Peer Clustering    Unit 2    Peer to peer clustering allows multiple Digi Passport units to share  information and have equal status within a cluster  without requiring one of  the units to be the master  Any unit in the cluster  typically  the closest unit  to the user  can act as a master  This avoids the single point of failure  associated with  centralized system  control    with peer to peer clustering   each unit is capable of initiating connections to ports on any other unit   avoiding the  what if that unit is unreachable   problem  Peer to peer  clustered units can also control slave units as well  allowing for a more  scalable and robust implementation  since if any one unit is offline  there is  no single point of failure to reach the other units     Users can access use any peer in peer to peer group to access any peer   or its slave units  It extends the limitation of clustering slave units  A master  unit can have up to 48 slave units  48 peers can join to clustering peer to    peer group  If each 48 peer with 48 slave units joins a peer to peer group   2352 units  49   48  can be clustered together     Changes between peered units are updated to the other peers  automatically  even if the peer   s IP address is 
177. im   e Restrict rights for user jeff     e Add users to an access list  in this example  sun users  To create  access lists  go to System administration  gt  Access list  For more  information  see  Add an Access List and Add Users to It  on page 40     Automatic detection  Port title   Host mode configuration  freeKVM configuration  Serial port parameters  Port logging   Port event handling  Authentication   User access control    Access type                                           User or Access list Action  Port Monitor Power Log Break    lt  lt Everyone gt  gt  v  o v v   jet  ronk Z z  sun users o M M V  ml   2 oF OF            Select an access list    Y v   v  v                               Move to Access lists to edit access fist     Enable Disable multiple session  Disable v  Session display mode      Display data direction arrows      Chapter 8 Users  Security  and Authentication 143    Configure User Access Control    Configure User Access Privileges    1     2   3     Select Serial Port Configuration  gt  All Ports or  Serial Port Configuration  gt  port number     Click User access mode   Enter the users and their privileges  and click Add user     Restrict a User   s Privileges  To restrict user access     1     2   3   4    Select Port configuration  gt  User access control   Enter privileges for  lt  lt Everyone gt  gt    Enter restricted user   s name  In this example  it is ronk     Enter the privileges for the user  Notice that  lt  lt Everyone gt  gt  ha
178. in    Configure Automatic Detection  on page 77    1  Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface    2  Under the Serial Port heading  Click Configuration    3  Select All  gt  Alert Configuration or port number  gt  Alert  Configuration    4  Follow the Email Alert steps to configure the email alert or follow the  SMTP Notification to configure SMTP     Email Alert SMTP Notification  1  Enable Email Alert for active 1  Enable Active detection trap   detection  2  Configure the trap receiver by one of the  2  Enter the Title of email  following ways   3  Enter Name and email address   Select Use global SNMP configuration   where the email should be sent  OR      Enter the IP address of the trap receiver  the  SNMP trap community and select the version     5  Complete configuration and click Save  amp  apply     Automatic detection    Port title  Host made configuration    freekvM configuration    Serial port parameters  Part logging  Authentication   j  r   ccess control    Alert configuration          Chapter 6 Alerts and Notifications 119    Chapter 7    Digi Passport provides support for various service processors  such as  Intelligent Platform Management Interface  IPMI   Integrated Lights Out    Configuring a Service Processor    Service Processors     iLO   Systems Management Architecture for Server Hardware Command  Line Protocol  SMASH CLP   and Dell Remote Access Controller  DRAC    Service processor
179. ination to  the syslog ng configuration  specifying destination TCP UDP and  location  P address of remote server     Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface 244    System Logging    Configure an NFS or SYSLOG Server    1  Access the configuration menu     2  Select Network configuration  gt  NFS or SYSLOG server  configuration     Select menu  P configuration   SNMP configuration     Dynamic DNS configuration  S i    TP configuration  IP filtering  SYSLOG server configuration  NFS server configuration  Web server configuration    Ethernet configuration    TCP service configuration   lt ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh   pa    DODN AWN H       3  Disable or enable the server     Configure System Logging    1  Access the configuration menu   2  Select System Status  amp  log  gt  System logging     Select menu    System status    System logging    User logged on list   lt ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh   gt 2    Select menu     Enable Disable system logging   Enable    System log buffer size   5  KB     System log storage location   Memory     Display system logs     Clear system logs     Send system log by Email   Disable   lt ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh        gt     3  Enter the desired parameters for the menu items  For example  to  receive system log messages from Passport  add a new destination  with UDP  local 0 facility and the IP address of remote syslog server to  syslog ng configuration  The flexibility of Syslog NG configuration menu  allows for add
180. ing  gt Master mode  select Advanced     Clustering configuration   Unit A  Basic configuration Advanced  gt  gt     Enable Disable this unit   Enable v     Slave unit address     Auto Configure    No  of port      Slave authentication mode   Set Authentication       Chapter 15 Port Clustering 224    Configure Master Slave Port Clustering    Advanced master slave clustering settings include     Chapter 15 Port Clustering    Enable  Shows whether the port is enabled or disabled  All ports are  enabled by default     Slave unit address  The IP address of slave   No  of ports  The number of ports on the slave     Slave authentication mode  Whether the database is controlled by  the master unit  or locally by the slaves themselves     Update Master on Changes  Automatically updates port name  changes  port settings  and user permission settings to the master  unit  Generally  Update Master on changes should be set to yes     Connect to slave unit to change configuration  A quick access  method to connect to the slave     Source port  The port number accessed to get to the slave on the  master unit  The first slave port defaults to 7100 for the port access  menu and the port numbers increase according to the number of  ports on the Digi Passport unit     Destination port  The corresponding port number on the slave unit   On a 32 port slave unit  the destination port numbers range from  7001 to 7032     Protocol  Options are N A  not available   SSH  Telnet  and  RawTCP     Base so
181. ing a second or third remote Syslog server or grouping  port logs according to the facility     Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface 245    Configure SNMP    Configure SNMP    To configure SNMP from the configuration menu  do the following     1  Access the configuration menu     2  Select Network Configuration  gt  SNMP configuration     Select menu    IP configuration    SNMP configuration    Dynamic DNS configuration    SMTP configuration    IP filtering    SYSLOG server configuration    NFS server configuration    Web server configuration    Ethernet configuration  TCP service configuration     lt ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh  52    1  2  3  4  5  6     8     a    Select menu  1  Configure the MIB II System objects  2  Configure the Access control settings    Configure the Trap receiver settings   lt ENTER gt  Refresh    3  Enter the desired parameters for the menu items     Configure SMTP             To configure SMTP from the configuration menu  do the following     1  Access the configuration menu     2  Select Network configuration  gt  SMTP configuration     Select menu     IP configuration  SNMP configuration    Dynamic DNS configuration  SMTP configuration    IP filtering  SYSLOG server configuration  NFS server configuration  Web server configuration  Ethernet configuration    TCP service configuration   lt ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh    gt 24    D ODANA N    Select menu     Send mail   Enable     SMTP server   None     Mode   SMTP without authen
182. inistration  gt  Security Profile section of the configuration  screen  See  Security Profile  on page 148 for more information    Chapter 1 Introduction 17    Users and User Groups    Users and User Groups    Root and Admin Usernames and Passwords    The Digi Passport unit comes with two default users  root and system  admin     The user names of the the Digi Passport unit are case sensitive              User Name Default Password  root dbps  admin admin                Adding Port Administrators and Users    User Groups    The system administrator and root user can add port administrators and  additional users easily with the web interface by choosing  System administration  gt  User administration  gt  Add user  The admin  user s password can be changed by either admin or root from within the  Web interface or the Menu CLI  the root user s password     The Digi Passport unitcomes with 4 built in user groups pre defined by  roles or access levels  The following table lists the 4 user groups  their  access rights  and default user names                          ee Configuration  Group Access Privileges Privileges Defaults  Nae Sap mman    Ports So ane a Ports   System   Login Password  Root yes yes yes yes root dbps  System Admin yes yes yes yes admin admin   read only   Port Admin yes no yes no  User yes no no no                            Access Lists    The Digi Passport unit supports access lists for user privileges  These lists  can contain multiple users and define spec
183. ion    Under Protocol  select RawTCP    Click Save  amp  apply   Select Serial port parameters    Configure the delimiter and supporting settings    Enable Disable delimiter  Allows delimiter to function    Delimiter  The sequence that should be received before forwarding the    data to the application    application   with delimiters  Sends the delimiter as part of the data to the applica     tion     Delimiter option  Specifies handling of the delimiter in data sent to the    without delimiters  Removes the delimiter before sending the data to  the application     Inter character time out timeout  Timeout  in milliseconds  f no    delimiter is detected the data is delivered after this timeout has elapsed   The range is 1 10000     Chapter 5 Configure Ports    Serial port parameters       serial   serial_config   ports    1       parameter       Port management  Apply all ports settings  Automatic detection  Port title  Host mode configuration  Virtual KYM configuration  Serial port parameters  UART type   Baudrate   Data bit   Stop bit   Parity bit   Flow control   DTR option   Enalbe Disable delimiter   Delimiter   Delimiter option   Port logging  Authentication  User access control  Alert configuration       RS232      n F    High when open        Enable H    with delimiters E          Save to flash Save  amp  apply                Cancel         99    Configure Physical Serial Ports    Remote port parameters  If remote ports are defined and a remote port is selected   Rem
184. ion of the automatic detection feature and the settings  involved  see  Configure Automatic Detection  on page 77  To enable  Automatic Device Recognition     1  Serial Port  gt  Configuration  gt  Select the port number or All   2  Port title   e Automatic Detection  Enable   e DSR status   e Use detected port title  Enable   e Probe String   xOD  means  lt Enter gt     e Device detection method  Active   e Detection initiation  periodically   e Detection delay  every 5 minutes  3  Click Save  amp  apply     Locator LEDs    The the Digi Passport unit has two locator LEDs labeled Find  one on each  side of the unit  that can be used can be used to physically locate the unit     Enable Locator LEDs  1  Log into the Web interface as admin or root     2  In the Web interface menu  click Activate Passport Locator LED  A  confirmation dialog is displayed     3  Click OK and the locator LED will blink     Turn Off Locator LEDs  In the Web interface  click Stop Passport Locator LED     Chapter 1 Introduction 24    Assign IP Settings from the Console Port  Chapter 2 Getting Started    This chapter covers basic configuration topics  including assigning IP  settings  accessing and navigating in the web interface  enabling secure  access with the web interface  accessing the unit through SSH  and user  administration  adding  editing  or removing users  managing user  accounts  and creating access lists    Initial setup is described in the Quick Start Guide included with the product  pa
185. is manual offers information on the Digi Passport 4 port  8 port  16 port   32 port  and 48 port models     Feature Overview    Chapter 1    With the Digi Passport unit  administrators can securely monitor and  control servers  routers  switches  and other network devices from  anywhere on the corporate TCP IP network  over the Internet  or through  dial up modem connections even when the server is unavailable through  the network     The Digi Passport employs SSHv2 encryption to keep server access  passwords safe from hackers  and supports all popular SSH clients  as well  as secure access from any Java enabled browser  It is the first console  server to provide a secure graphical user interface for easy out of band  management of Microsoft Windows Server 2003 systems  It connects to  serial console ports using standard CAT5 cables eliminating the hassles of  custom cabling  In addition  the Digi Passport unit offers a PC Card slot for  adding dialup modems  Ethernet  or wireless network cards  USB or PC   Card Flash devices can be used to save port logs and back up  configurations     The Digi Passport unit is available in 4   8   16   32  and 48 port models  in  a 1U rack mount form factor     Introduction 11    Feature Summary    Feature Summary       Feature Category    Feature       Network and Security    IP v4 v6 dual stack    RealPort   and Encrypted RealPort support  SSH v2 server and client   TLS SSL   IP Filtering    Central access to security parameters via the  
186. isplay port information     Enable Disable port escape sequence   Port escape sequence    Port break sequence    Use comment    Quick connect via    Web applet encoding    Web applet size     freeKk  M configuration    Chapter 7 Service Processors       Other  y    Disable v  ee O          Console server v          100    second s           Disable v    Enable          Ctrl   z              break          No v    Web applet v             English  latin         v          Columns  80       Rows  24          121    Intelligent Platform Management Interface  IPMI     Intelligent Platform Management Interface  IPMI   Intelligent Platform Management Interface  IPMI  is a specification for the  equipment that monitors the physical environment and condition of a  computer hardware server  The specification is intended to cover the  regulation of temperature  voltage and power  and to ensure the proper  operation of the firmware   IPMI works with hardware servers regardless of the operating platform or  other software they may run  IPMI allows an administrator to manage  multiple servers from a single location by means of a user friendly  interface  Critical system events for each server can be logged  Settings for  each basic input output system  BIOS  can be monitored or changed   Servers can be remotely and independently powered on or off  rebooted  or  reset as necessary   The following instructions explain the method for configuring IPMI including  SOL  Serial Over Lan  on a Rem
187. its  Selecting a  slave displays the port access menu of the slave     To search via port title  Press the F key and then enter your search string     Port display for Digi Passport 48 only    When using a Digi Passport 48  not all ports can be displayed on one  screen  Press Enter to display ports 33 48     Chapter 9 Custom and Default Menus 162    Support for Microsoft Windows Server 2003 in Digi Passport    Chapter 10 Microsoft SAC Support    Support for Microsoft Windows Server 2003 in Digi Passport    The Digi Passport unit provides a browser based user interface to  Microsoft   s text based Special Administration Console  SAC   an integral  part of Windows Server 2003 Emergency Management Services  EMS    Both the English and International versions of SAC are now supported   When a server running Windows Server 2003 is connected to the Digi  Passport unit   s serial port  key SAC functions  normally accessed from the  command line  are available from a graphical user interface  GUI   SAC  features accessible from this interface include     e Reset and shutdown    e Show performance values like memory utilization   e Show and configure IP settings per interface    e Show the process list and kill processes     While the EMS port is available at all times using Telnet or SSH  the special  GUI is available only while SAC is active     Manage  MS SAC  on port 1    System  System Name  WHOLED  Operating System  Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition  OS Version  5 2  Service
188. k 1o 1pcont2 ipConE2  io ecer 10  05 2    Apply Done     Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface 273    Configmenu scripting    The    apply    command can be also run separately after saving all changes    root Digi_Passport     configmenu set  network ip ipconf2   ipconf2 ip_mode 1 save   Set    network ip ipconf2 ipconf2 ip_mode static IP  1      root Digi_Passport     configmenu set  network ip ipconf2   ipconf2 ip_addr 10 0 5 2 save    Set NetWork  Aip peona Peon soma clcis    Om Om or   root Digi_Passport     configmenu apply    Apply Done     Here is an example of adding a new remote port with a TCP port of 7005                  root Digi_Passport4     configmenu add rport 7005 save apply       Add    serial serial_config ports  5             Set    serial serial_config ports  5 hostmode listening_port 7005    Save Done     Apply Done               root Digi_Passport4          All other settings  such as remote port parameters  must be set to make the  remote port work correctly               root Digi_Passport4     configmenu set          serial serial_config ports  5 rport_param dest_ip 192 168 1 2          serial serial_config ports  5 rport_param dest_port 22                serial serial_config ports  5 rport_param protocol 2 save apply       Gee 8  serial serial _ComiciGg joowres   5  icoore_joaicenm   des tenp  192  168 142          Set    serial serial_config ports  5 rport_param dest_port 22             Set    serial serial_config ports  5 rport_param protocol 
189. l    Alert configuration          Save to flash I Save  amp  apply JI Cancel         Chapter 5 Configure Ports 70    Configure Physical Serial Ports    Host Mode Configuration  The Digi Passport unit provides several modes of communication between  serial devices and remote hosts  Console server  terminal server  dial in  modem  dial in terminal server  and Point to Point Protocol  PPP  mode     On the Basic configuration page  for the Host mode setting  select from  a set of predefined modes of communication between serial devices and  remote hosts  Selecting the host mode automatically configures several  settings  such as the type of console server  protocol  and escape  sequences used  To review or modify any host mode settings  go to the  Advanced configuration settings and click the Host mode configuration  link  See  Advanced Host Mode Settings  on page 97 for descriptions     Here are descriptions of the supported host modes     Console Server Mode  default host mode     Configuring a serial port as a console server creates a TCP socket on the  Digi Passport unit that listens for a Telnet or SSH client connection   Connecting to the TCP socket provides access to the device attached to  the serial port  as if the device were connected directly to the network   RawTCP is also supported with the Console Server Mode     Connection request        serial        oon    Is    Network  Ethernet     PC    Chapter 5 Configure Ports 71    Configure Physical Serial Ports    Termin
190. l processes associated  with the port     Chapter 17 Command Line Interface 277    Dual Network Options  Dual Network Options    Source Based Routing    When more than one router is needed  with each network interface using a  different router  set up source based routing on the Passport     The following commands are needed to be run for source based routing on  the Passport       sbin ip rule add from  IP table  TBL      sbin ip route add default dev  ETH via  GW table  TBL      sbin ip route add  NET dev  ETH table  TBL   where     IP is an IP address which should use a non default gateway      NET is an IP network which should be routed straight  that is  not through  the gateway      ETH is the network interface to route to   GW is a gateway for this IP address    TBL is any free table name which is defined in  etc iproute2 rt_tables file     Note that every new non standard gateway will require another table  number     If the Source based routing option is enabled under Network   gt  IP  configuration in the Passport  then  etc iproute2 setsbr sh script will be  started to run commands above for the interface eth1 automatically     That is   IP will be the IP address of eth1 interface   NET will be the subnet  mask of eth1 interface   ETH will be ethO   GW will be the gateway of eth1  interface and  TBL will be auxtbl by default     This script can be modified to make eth1 as the main default gateway or  add some more conditions     For more information about source ba
191. layed after login        A    Digi Passport    16 Configuration and Management        DIG  PASSPORT D gt                User  root      IP configuration       Network  IP configuration  SNMP configuration  Dynamic DNS configuration  SMTP configuration  IP filtering configuration  NFS server configuration  Web server configuration  Ethernet configuration  TCP serivce configuration  PPP configuration  NIS configuration    Serial port   Clustering   Power controller  Peripherals   Custom menu   System status  amp  log  System administration    System statistics    Start device locating  Apply Changes   Login as a different user  Logout   Reboot          network   ip       IPv6 Enable Disable  Disable E    IP configuration  1      static IP E  10 4 102 55   255 255 0 0  10 4 1 1  Disable       IP mode    IP address   Subnet mask   Default gateway     Enable Disable secondary IP   IP configuration  2    Disable K    IP mode     Reuse old IP at bootup time on DHCP  failure     Use Manual DNS     Disable        Enable      10 10 8 62    Primary DNS     Secondary DNS  optional   10 10 8 64          Save to flash Cancel               Save  amp  apply       User Interface Differences for End Users  For Passport end users  the only option available under  System administration is to change the user password  Users can also  log in as a different user or log out of the system     Chapter 2 Getting Started    27    Saving and Applying Changes in the Web interface    Saving and Applying Ch
192. le  Port Title  Port Title  Port Title    Enter port number to conf     lt ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refr   gt        Enable Disable Port    Port Title    Host Mode Configuratio    Serial Port Parameters    Port Logging     IP Filtering     Authentication     User Access Control     SNMP Trap Configuratio    ess menu configuration    Refr     lt ENTER gt     4  Select a menu item and  items    5   menu    6  Select Save changes     Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface      Enable    Port Title       Telnet  Telnet  Telnet       Telnet  Telnet  Telnet    1  1   od  fp   1   1    iugre  lt   esh    all port configuration  gt     n    n    esh          enter the desired parameters for the menu    When all parameters are entered  use the ESC key to return to the main    252    Configure and View Sniff Sessions    Configure and View Sniff Sessions  To configure a port or all ports for sniff users  do the following     1     Ol  eo    8     Access the configuration menu    Select Serial port configuration    Select port number or 0  zero  for all ports  gt  User access control   Select User Access Control    Select Enable Disable Sniff Mode     elect menu     Network Configuration     Serial Port Configuration    Clustering Configuration    Power Controller     PC Card Configuration     System Status  amp  Log     System Administration     Save Changes     Exit without Saving     Exit and Apply Changes     Exit and Reboot    lt ENTER gt  Refresh    Port Title  Port Title  Port
193. ller     1  In the Web Ul  go to Power controller  gt  Manage and the page below  will be displayed            Power controller management    power   power_manage    Power controller    Web Port  Manufacturer Title Outlets  https 48 ServerTech ServerTech on Port 48 96  https 49 ServerTech ServerTech on Port 49 96    Power outlet management    2  From this page  you can select power controller from the list or select  the Power outlet management link     e Selecting the Power controller https http link from the list will result  in opening the Web UI for the ServerTech device  This allows direct  access to all the features on the ServerTech     e Selecting the Power controller title from the list will result in opening  a new web page similar to the one below     Power controller management   ServerTech on Port 48    power   power_manage   power_controller    Power controller    Model   ServerTech 48   Alarm threshold   30 0 amps   Temperature   69 8   F   21 0   C    Temperature   81 5   F   27 5   C    Humidity   57     Humidity   37     Circuit breaker   N A   RMS voltage   N A   RMS current   0 0 amps   Max current detected   0 0 amps  Outlets       Chapter 14 Power Controller 213    Power outlet management    Third Party Power Controllers    3 Selecting the Power outlet management link will result in a new page  similar to the one shown below          power   power_manage   power_outlet    Power outlet management    Status    ON  ON  ON  ON  ON  ON  ON  ON  ON  ON  ON  ON
194. lt  Not used  gt   14 Port Title  14 0  lt  Not used  gt   15 Port Title  15 i    lt  Not used  gt   16 Port Title  16 0  lt  Not used  gt   17 Hermes_IPMI 0  lt  Not used  gt     Serial Terminal Connection  freeKVM    v  View Port Log    E  PMI GUI Access    18 Intel_IPMI o  lt  Not used  gt     3  Select IPMI GUI Access  This connect to the server via IPMI  This page       is displayed   IPMI  Hermes_IPMI  on port 17    serial   serial_connect     None i     n                lt Re      Q i   lt _   _       Control  Connect to system  De activate SOL on another session    4  From this page  select the BMC statistics to monitor  power cycle the  server  or make an SOL connection to the server   s console port     Chassis Power is on    Chapter 7 Service Processors 125    Intelligent Platform Management Interface  IPMI     5  Select the information to monitor from the pulldown menu     IPMI  Hermes_IPMI  on port 17      serial   serial_connect     None    BMC hardware information    Control    Chassis Power is on    Channel information  System chassis status    FRU inventory data    Connect to system  LAN    PEF supported features    De activate SOL on a       For example  if BMC hardware information is selected  this page is dis   played  The information displayed varies between server manufacturers     IPMI  Hermes_IPMI  on port 17       I    gt     serial   serial_connect     BMC hardware information         Control  Chassis Power is on    Connect to system    De activate S
195. luded     When RealPort is used to communicate with a serial port on the Digi  Passport  the other capabilities of the Digi Passport are not available for  that port  This means the Digi Passport unit can be used for console  management or for RealPort COM re direction  but not both at the same  time     To enable RealPort  click Serial port  gt  Configuration  gt  port number   Select Port Management  gt  Enable this port from the pulldown menu   Select Enable RealPort support from the pulldown menu  Click Save to  flash and continue with other configurations or click Save  amp  apply     Port management       serial   serial_config   ports   1_       port_mgmt       Port management  Enable Disable this port  Enable     RealPort support    Disable v    Reset this port   Set this port as factory default    Apply all ports settings   Automatic detection   Port title   Host mode configuration   freekVM configuration   Serial port parameters   Port logging   Authentication   User access control   Alert configuration            Save to flash J  Save  amp  apply J   Cancel         Port management       serial   serial_config   ports   1__      port_mgmt       Port management  Enable Disable this port  Enable     RealPort support  Disable       Reset this port   Set this port as factory default     Apply all ports settings       Automatic detection  Port title   Host mode configuration  freekVM configuration  Serial port parameters  Port logging  Authentication   User access contro
196. lustering master unit  the Push server filtering  configuration page will not show the IP address of master unit menu     Push configuration    cluster   cluster_push_config    Push server filtering configuration  No  IP address mask Status Action  No filters found    Select PTP unit IP address v    Save to fash    Push configuration          Chapter 15 Port Clustering 236    Clustering push configuration    If the unit is joined peer to peer clustering  you can see the peer list on the  Push server filtering configuration page     Push configuration    cluster   cluster_push_config    Push server filtering configuration    No  IP address mask Status Action  No filters found    New   Add Update    Select PTP unit IP address iy Add all  Select PTF unit IP address  ee             Push configuration       You can also add the push server manually by entering the IP address and  net work mask to the new option box and then pressing Add        Push configuration    cluster   cluster_push_config    Push server filtering configuration  No  IP address mask Status Action  No filters found    New  192 168 161 0 255 255 0 0    Add       Select PTP unit IP address E Add all    Save a fash    Push configuration       Once the push servers are configured  only the Passport unit listed on the  Push server filtering configuration page can push the configuration to  the unit     Chapter 15 Port Clustering 237    Clustering push configuration    Pushing the configuration can be done through Pu
197. ly Upgrade Firmware or Configuration using TFTP                0 cceee 292  Using DAG serene ee ann tn Sere ere ee ee ne eer ee ee 292  Directly Configure the TFTP Server and the Name of the hash File            292  Str  ct  re  Of TG Hash File narena e naen a TTE 293  Reset the Digi Passport unit to Factory Defaults                        eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 296  Using the Factory Reset Button              c cccccceeeeeseseeeeeeceeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeneeeaces 296  Using the Web Interface aaccicceyeschstieeevacs Bonet deedetancd Sede i eeseeeedels Matar eet 297  From the Command Line Interface                ccccccssssssenceeeeeeeessssnnnaeeeeeeeeeeeees 297  Values Established through Factory Reset 2 0 0 0    eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 297  SOP DASE  EAE A E A E sateen dn sesshateanidedsamiae duces naawnnem aasMentadtoneas 298  Configure AFIOSTEINGIN Giese  ttetecict nreno Geel capstan a 298    Contents    Chapter 19 Specifications and Certifications    Hardware Speciation  eeacscencsots vga  eaves sadec enascdeneepeddenecdeseskengausecdenevensdeneedestnene 299  Digi Passport 4 Models  ainc A nits eda cia i iei 299  Digi Passport 8 16 32 48 Models    cece ceeeee ee ecceeeeeesaaeeeeeseeeeeeenneeeees 300   LED UGG tO NS sass oes asst yaaa aae a a a tas Rie E E a aee 301   Serdal Port GAIA hrs esi aa es a eat Ue a a tes T abet cat Eaa E a thc reat as 302   Serial  Port PinOuUts ics  reer aa E a Sees dean AE AERE E 302   Cable Adapters and PInGuts  cissecsgevcstseticn
198. lyze the hash file  and upgrade the firmware  configuration  or other files if required    If any problems occur during the TFTP upgrade process  verify that the  hash file and the other files are accessible using TFTP     OF e    Chapter 18 System Administration 292    Automatically Upgrade Firmware or Configuration using TFTP    Structure of the Hash File    The hash file is an ASCII configuration file with one line per entry  Each  entry defines one upgrade action     The hash file defines several actions    1  Upgrade firmware   2  Upgrade configuration   3  Upgrade any file   4  Execute an application    ae action is the first entry in the line and it also defines the syntax of the  ine     Upgrade firmware action  The syntax for action 1  firmware upgrade is   action   image name model name  version  Where   action      The action number to be performed  For upgrading firmware  the action  number is 1        image name  The path and the filename of the firmware on the TFTP server     model name  The product name  including the port count  for example  DigiPassport4   DigiPassport8  DigiPassport16  DigiPassport32  DigiPassport48  This  allows for a different hash file for different models     version  The version number of the firmware    The Digi Passport unit downloads the firmware if the version number of  the running firmware is different than the firmware version in the hash file   the current firmware version is saved in file  tmp cnf version      Make sure the fir
199. m    2  Create a menu name with sort and display features   3  Add menu items and submenus to the new menu   4  Assign users to the menus     Chapter 9 Custom and Default Menus 157    Add Users to the System  Add Users to the System    Before users can be assigned menus  the users must be added to the  system     1  Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface     2  Select System administration  gt  Users administration  Click the Add  button     User administration    User name    User group    All group    Current local users    O  User name User group Shell    li Gilligan Port admin Configuration menu    D2 Skipper System admin CLI  O13 admin System admin Configuration menu  root Root CLI    4       3  Enter the User name and select the User group  For Shell program   select Custom menu     Add user       User name   Maryann    Select group   User    Password   eecccece       Confirm password   evcccece           Shell program   Custom menu    SSH public key authentication Disabled v   Select SSH Version SSH v2  SSH public key file        4  Click Add to add the user     5  Continue to add users as needed  Clicking Save to flash or  Apply changes is not required for users to be added     Chapter 9 Custom and Default Menus 158    Create Menu Names    Create Menu Names  To name a custom menu  do the following     1  Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access
200. m delivery     e SMTP mode  The type of SMTP server to use     e Username and password  Required if using POP before SMTP  and SMTP with authentication servers     4  Click Save  amp  apply     Chapter 6 Alerts and Notifications 108    Supported SNMP Traps    Supported SNMP Traps  The Digi Passport unit supports SNMP authentication  power on  and link  up traps   Applications such as an NMS  Network Management System  or an SNMP  browser can exchange information with the Digi Passport unit and control  actions to the unit  The protocol functions defined for SNMP includes GET   SET  GET Next  GET Bulk  and TRAP  Below are the definitions of the  protocol functions found in SNMP  Supported traps include Authentication   power on  link up  login  NFS  Samba  Power Management  Power Fail and                               IPMI traps   Protocol Function  GET Queries a device for more information  SET Makes changes to a device   s state  GET Next After an initial GET query  goes to the next value  GET Bulk Retrieves tables of information and security functions  TRAP Notifies a system administrator of a significant event       Chapter 6 Alerts and Notifications 109    Setting Additional Traps at the Port Level    Setting Additional Traps at the Port Level    Additional traps can be set at the port level  The table shows where the trap  is located in the serial port configuration settings in the web interface  in  Serial port  gt  Configuration   the trap name  and the trap functions 
201. m menu to simplify navigation   e Web Access  Click Serial ports  gt  Connection  gt  port number     Remote ports are sorted below the physical serial ports as the next avail   able port number     e Telnet to the IP and the port number  The specific port number is defined  on the    Host mode configuration    page  For example   telnet 143 191 3 9 7051   e SSH to the IP address and port number  The specific port number is  defined on the Host mode configuration page    e SSH to the IP address and port name  The specific port number is  defined on the Host mode configuration page  For example   Ssh user name     t port title    ip Address  Ssh sunadmin    t Switch3level      MainDigi    A remote port can be accessed just like any local port  directly using the port  number     The parameters of the remote port are equivalent to regular serial ports  Enter  any additional parameters for the remote and click Save  amp  apply or  Apply all changes     Chapter 5 Configure Ports 106    About Alerts and Notifications    Chapter 6 Alerts and Notifications    About Alerts and Notifications    The Digi Passport unit can be configured for system alerts and  notifications  It sends email messages when the number of system log  messages reaches a certain value or when an alarm message is detected  in the serial port data  The Digi Passport unit uses SMTP  Simple Mail  Transfer Protocol  for sending the notifications  To use SMTP  the system  administrator must configure a valid SMTP ser
202. mber range and the count of slave units     Peer to peer information       cluster   cluster_p2p_config   p2p_info    Peer to peer mode configuration    Peer to peer information    Peer to peer status   Not joined Refresh      Action   fi 92 168 12 8 Join    Peer Authen  Web port Port access Slave  Source port    no  method Protocol Source Protocol Source Unit    No peer found        Invite peers       Peer to peer information for the designated peer  This screen shows peer to peer information of the designated peer     Peer to peer information       cluster   cluster_p2p_config   p2p_info    Peer to peer mode configuration    Peer to peer information    Peer to peer status   Refresh      Action     Join   Withdraw   Update    Peer Authen  Web port    IP Port access Source port Save Action  no  method Protocol Source Protocol Source Unit    1 192 168 12 8 Local HTTPS 15000 Telnet 15001 15002   15010    Remove    2 192 168 19 6 Local HTTPS 15011 Telnet 15012 15013   15061 1 This    Invite peers       Chapter 15 Port Clustering 230    Configure peer to peer Clustering    Invite Peers    To invite peers  enter their IP addresses and click the Invite button  Each  unit will be invited to join the peer to peer group of the current unit  or a  group will be established if there is no current group  If the remote host is  not already part of a group and its password matches that of the requesting  peer  it will join the local peer to peer group  All existing units in the same  peer 
203. me   Administrator  Password  new   TTTTTT  Password  confirm   PTF       Save to flash Save    apply    Enter the Service processor configuration settings   e Destination IP address  This is the IP of the iLO server     e Destination port  The port used for HTTPS on the iLO server   normally 443     e User name  This is a user configured on the server with access to  iLO    e Password  Supply and confirm the password for the above user    Click Save and apply     Chapter 7 Service Processors 131    Integrated Lights Out  iLO  iLO2     Access iLO Port or SMASH CLP Support    After finishing configurations for iLO and SMASH CLP  access iLO port or  SMASH CLP support from the Serial port  gt  Connection page     When iLO and SMASH are configured  four connection icons are displayed  on the Serial port connection page  as shown     Serial port connection     serial   serial_connect    Peer     Il peers v  Port title      Port access menu connection       Port access menu connection   Individual port connection   Status Port  Title   of User Comments  LINUX  Redhat9 JOJ port1  lt  Not used  gt     Windows Server 2003 SAC port2  lt  Not used  gt   Port Title  3  lt  Not used  gt   Port Title  4  lt  Not used  gt   Test Remote Port  lt  Not used  gt   iLO  lt  Not used  gt       Serial Terminal Connection  3 View Port Log     iLO GUI Access     SMASH GUI Access       Serial Terminal Connection is for direct access to the iLO service  process     View Port log is for checking logs f
204. ment Card Configuration    Rackable Systems Management Card Configuration    To configure the serial port to provide access to the Rackable Systems  Management console     1  Access the Digi Passport unit   s web interface   2  Select Serial Port  gt  Configuration    3  Select a port   4      Select Host mode configuration  The Host mode configuration page  is displayed     5  Set the Host mode to Console server   6  Set the Rackable Systems Mgmt Card support to Enable   7  Click Save  amp  apply     Configure Serial Port Communication Settings  1  From the menu  select Serial port parameters      2  Adjust the settings as required  The defaults for the Rackable Systems  Management Card are identical to these of the Digi Passport unit     Baud rate 9600  Data bits 8  Parity None  Stop bits 1  Flow control None    DTR behavior High when open  3  Click Save  amp  apply     Assign a Port Name  1  From the menu  select Port title   2  Enter a port title   3  Click Save  amp  apply     Chapter 12 Rackable   Systems Management Card 182    Access Rackable Systems Management Card from Digi Passport GUI    Access Rackable Systems Management Card from Digi Passport GUI  1  Access the Digi Passport unit   s web interface     2  Select Serial Port  gt  Connection  A screen similar to the following is  displayed     Serial port connection         serial   serial_connect    Port title        Port access menu connection  Port access menu connection  Individual port connection  Status Unit 
205. ment rights to an access list  e Break access rights   e Hot key rights to access port logs    See  Add an Access List and Add Users to It  on page 40 for the procedure  for adding access lists     This scenario shows a configuration with a restricted user  Joe does not  have access to the Sun server  while Mike does     Restricted Users     T  5         Network  Ethernet     Joe Mike    Chapter 8 Users  Security  and Authentication 142    Configure User Access Control    A strategy for assigning rights to a port can include     e Allowing  lt  lt Everyone gt  gt  access to a port and then restricting access to  certain users  or     e Specifying each individual user and their specific rights to a port    e Adding a user to an established group  Access list  with preconfigured  rights to a port     Selecting  lt  lt Everyone gt  gt   means that all users  whether they are  configured locally or are using a remote authentication  such as LDAP or  Kerberos   have access to this port     If  lt  lt Everyone gt  gt  is not selected  no users are allowed to access this port  unless they are individually listed     Usernames for access permissions or restrictions must be entered exactly  as listed locally or on the remote authentication server  and are  case sensitive     In the next example  three users are configured on the Digi Passport unit   jeff  ronk  and tim  To give users tim and ronk read write access and  power access to this port  either     e Grant rights to ronk and t
206. mode configuration     For the Host mode  select Dial in modem   Fill in the appropriate fields as needed     Host mode configuration      serial   serial_config   ports   6     hostmode       Port management   Apply all ports settings   Port title   Host mode configuration  Host mode  Dial in modem  v   Modem init string  qle0s0 28 amp d0   Enable Disable dial in modem callback  Disable     Enable Disable dial in modem test  Disable      Serial port parameters     Alert configuration         Save to flash J   Save  amp  apply il Cancel         Modem init string  The modem init string is used for initializing an  external modem attached to the Digi Passport unit   s serial port  The  default modem init string is q1e0s0 2  This default init string sets  the modem to quiet mode  echo off  and Auto Answer on two rings   See the modem   s user manual for more information     Callback  For security reasons  the callback feature can be  activated     Enable Disable dial in modem callback   Enable          Dial in modem callback phone number   1234444567    If callback is enabled  the Digi Passport unit does not accept any  incoming calls  After the incoming call is rejected  a callback is initi   ated to the phone number configured in the    Dial in modem callback  phone number        Chapter 13 Configure Remote Dial In Access 187    Configure for Dial In Modem Access    e Modem test  To ensure the proper functionality of the modem  the  Digi Passport unit has the ability to test t
207. mware version in the hash file matches the firmware  version on the FTP directory  otherwise a continuous upgrade process  will be started     For example   1 Passport48 img DigiPassport48 v1 1 0  After the firmware is upgraded the Digi Passport unit boots again     Chapter 18 System Administration 293    Automatically Upgrade Firmware or Configuration using TFTP    Upgrade configuration action  The syntax for action 2  configuration upgrade  is   action   image name model name  version  Where     action    The action number to be performed  which is 2        image name  The path and the filename of the configuration file on the TFTP server     model name  The product name  including the port count  for example  DigiPassport4   DigiPassport8  DigiPassport16  DigiPassport32  DigiPassport48  This  allows for a different hash file for different models     version  The version number of the firmware   The Digi Passport unit downloads the configuration if the version in the  hash file is different from the version saved in the file   tmp cnf  cnfversion  This file does not exist until the first automatic  configuration upgrade  It is also deleted if the unit is reset to factory  defaults  If the file  tmp cnf  cnfversion does not exist  no download  occurs  The file  tmp cnf  cnfversion is a hidden file    For example    2 config tar gz DigiPassport48 v1 1 0   After the firmware configuration is upgraded the Digi Passport unit boots   again     Chapter 18 System Administration 294
208. n  Disable v    Session display mode      Display data direction arrows         Type of Users    Access Types    How to Permit or  Restrict       Only specific users  have access      Permitted Users     Access type is unchecked for  Everyone  meaning All other  users  does not have access     By listing specific users  and selecting the access  types    Permitting them  access         All users have  access except for a  few  Restricted  Users           Everyone has access to  everything by checking the  access types  If an access type  is unchecked  all users are    restricted from that access type        By listing users and  deselecting the access  types which the users are  restricted from using        Chapter 8 Users  Security  and Authentication    145       Configure User Access Control  Sniff Session    A sniff session enables multiple users to access a single serial port for  viewing the data stream  Anyone who is registered for a sniff session can  access a specific serial port     even if someone else is using the port  The  Digi Passport unit supports multiple concurrent sniff sessions        serial    A log in  port 3  Sniff Session   Read only access   Internet  Port 3          log in m   port 3 _              r       Network  Ethernet           Main Session   Read write access     Sniff session mode has four options  disabled  input  output  and both     Configure the sniff session modes per port on the serial port configuration  page     Chapter 8 Users  Secu
209. n a Windows Server 2003 System  right click  on My Computer and select Properties  gt  Remote  gt   Enable Remote Desktop on this Computer     Chapter 11 Configure and Use freeKVM 179    VNC Viewer    Installing Programs for freeKVM    Required Client Software    Usage Notes    Xmanager    Windows       TightVNC from http   www tightvnc com    e RealVNC software from http   www realvnc com    e UltraVNC from http   www ultravcn com    Linux  vncviewer from the VNC client software package for the distribution     Make sure that vncviewer is installed into a folder in the standard Windows  or Linux Unix path  On Windows systems  as a secondary option  copy file  vncviewer exe to the c  windows directory     Follow the distribution specific instructions for enabling VNC support on the  Unix or Linux Server     For secure VNC from Windows desktops  Digi provides an automatic VNC  tunnelling toolkit  The toolkit is included on the Passport CD  and is  available from the Digi website  http   www digi com support under   Digi Passport     To use the tool  called ssh_vnc exe  unzip the toolkit and put the files in  the toolkit into a directory in your path  A good default is   WINDIR    usually  this maps to C  Windows      To use the tool  use User defined protocol  set the program name to  ssh_vnc  IP  5901  or whatever socket the VNC application is listening to   Full documentation for the tool is provided in the release notes included in  the zip file     Required Client Software
210. n the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface     2  Log in as root or admin  The default password for root is dbps  for  admin  admin    3  Under System administration  select User administration  The User  administration page is displayed     f admin   user_admin  User name    User group   All group     Locked Search    Current local users                     User name User group Shell                1 admin System admin Configuration menu          2 root Root CLI  Add Remove Unlock    4  Click on the username  The Edit user page is displayed  showing the  user attributes     Edit user     admin   user_admin   edit  User name    Select group    Password      Confirm password      Shell program   Custom menu  SSH public key authentication Disable     SSH public key to use    Select new SSH public key version  Select new SSH public key file     5  Change the user attribute fields as needed  For descriptions  see  User  attributes  on page 37     6  Click Submit        Chapter 2 Getting Started 38    User Administration  Remove a User    Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface     Log in as root or admin  The default password for root is dbps  for  admin  admin     3  Under System administration  select User administration  The User  administration page is displayed     User administration  f admin   user_admin                                  User name    User group  All group     Locked
211. nal server pem file on  tmp cnf etc with your own file  import an SSL  certificate for the HTTPS interface     1   2     Download the latest openssl package   Install the openssl package      cd  work      tar  xvzf openss  0 9  c tar gz     cd openssl 0 9 7c       config     make     make test     make install   Edit the openssl configuration file      vi  usr share ssl openssl cnf   In the openssl cnf file  modify the  req_distinguished_name  section  Refer to sample openssl conf file  openssl conf digi     Modify the  req_attributes  section as follows   challengePassword_min  0   challengePassword_max  0   Make self signed Root CA Certificate Authority       cd  work openss1 0 9  c      mkdir CA     cd CA     sh  usr local ssl misc CA sh  newca   CA certificate filename  or enter to create       Press Enter to use default value    Making CA certificate         openssl is called here as follow from CA sh     openssl  req  new  x509  keyout   demoCA private   cakey pem       out   demoCA   cacert pem  days 365    Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface 257    Certificate Management    7  Use the configuration from this location    usr local ssl lib ssleay cnf  8  Generate a 1024 bit RSA private key                       9  Write new private key to this location     demoCA private   cakey pem   10  Enter the PEM pass phrase     CA Password  Enter password and remember this   Verify password   Enter PEM pass phrase    CA Password  The information entered next will be incorpor
212. nection         serial   serial_connect              Peer   All peers    port title       Port access menu connection    Port access menu connection    Individual port connection    Status Port     THAWNH    7  8  9    Title  of User Comments  Port Title  1  Port Title  2  Port Title  3  Port Title  4  Port Title  5  Port Title  6     lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt    lt  Not used  gt     oo00000    Serial Terminal Connection  freekVM   vV  View Port Lag    Port Title  7  lt  Not used  gt   Port Title  8 it   lt  Not used  gt   Port Title  9 0  lt  Not used  gt     o    To connect through freeKVM using Remote Desktop  follow these steps   1  Click on the mouse icon     2  Click OK in each of the three Java confirmation request windows     3  The application starts and a message that the connection succeeded is  displayed  This login screen is displayed     Log On to Windows    Windows Server 2003    Standard Edition    Copyright    1985 2003 Microsoft Corporation Microsott       User name       Password       Cox   Cancel   Options  lt  lt          Shut Down          4  Enter user name and password  and click OK     If the application does not start  check to make sure that the application is  in the search path on the server  See  Installing Programs for freeKVM  on    page 179     Chapter 11 Configure and Use freeKVM    172    Use freeKVM with VNC Protocol    Use freeKVM with VNC Protocol    This section desc
213. newly created group  select the number next to the  group name  This page is displayed           Power control sequence group configuration   2      power   power_group   powerseqarp   2          Power group configuration  Power control sequence configuration    No  Unit Outlet Wait time Port Port title  No power control sequence found     New   ServerTech on Port48     1    F Port Title  1 Add    User access control    Save to flash Save  amp  apply   Cancel    Select the power controller from the drop down list    Select the outlet to add to the group from the drop down list   If desired  enter an outlet wait time    Click Add              a OV    Chapter 14 Power Controller 211    Third Party Power Controllers    8  Repeat steps until all outlets for this group are added   9  Click Save  amp  apply  A page similar to the one below is displayed     Power control sequence group configuration   1      power   power_group   powerseqarp    1       Power group configuration  Power control sequence configuration    No  Unit Outlet Wait time Port Port title   1   ServerTechonPort48     1     0 1 Port Title  1  2   ServerTech on Port 48    i3 00 None None  3   ServerTech onPort48     4     0 None None  4   ServerTech on Port48      17     0  a7 Port Title  17    Port Title  1 Add     lt    lt   m    New   ServerTech on Port 48    User access control       Chapter 14 Power Controller 212    Third Party Power Controllers    Outlet management  To manage the outlets on the power contro
214. nfiguration the page below  will open        Power controller configuration       power   power_config    Add power controller       Port     1 x    Manufacturer   DIGIRPM i   The number of cascaded units   Baytech  DIGI RPM   Add controller    Other  Power controllers  Port  Manufacturer Title Outlets Action    No power controller added       2  Select ServerTech from the Manufacturer drop down     Chapter 14 Power Controller 204    Third Party Power Controllers    3  Select New in Port menu list on the Add power controller page as  shown below     Power controller configuration    power   power_config    Add power controller     lt  J    Port        Manufacturer    The number of cascaded units    Web protocol      Destination IP address      SUH H EWN       zZ      i    Web source port      Web port      Add controller    Power controllers  Port  Manufacturer Title Outlets Action  No power controller added          This page below will open     Power controller configuration      power   power_config    Add power controller       Port     New  x   Manufacturer     ServerTech      The number of cascaded units   1g    Listening TCP port  1024 65535             Destination IP address     Protocol    SNMP   x   Destination port  0 65535    162    Community  GET         Community  SET                  Remote version   vi  amp              Web protocol   HTTPS     Web source port    60050  Web port   443       Add controller    Power controllers    Port  Manufacturer Title Outlet
215. nforce max password attempts  Enforces maximum invalid login  attempts before the user is locked out  It is selectable by the type of  user        ges  3 HE          Chapter 8 Users  Security  and Authentication 149    Authentication  Authentication    The Digi Passport unit supports multiple methods of user authentication   including local  TACACS   RADIUS  RADIUS Down Local  LDAP     Kerberos  and Custom PAM  The authentication protocol depends on the  environment          4  Access granted         gt    A  1  Connection request             2  Query    User ID  PC 3  Accept  User ID  Authentication  server    Chapter 8 Users  Security  and Authentication 150    Configure Authentication Methods for Port Access    Configure Authentication Methods for Port Access  Authentication can be performed either through a single authentication  method  such as RADIUS  or an authentication method where a Local  authentication service is used in addition to the RADIUS  LDAP  TACACS   server  or Kerberos  These options are listed when configuring the Digi  Passport unit for authentication     To configure the Digi Passport unit for authentication     1     w    Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface    Select Serial port  gt  Configuration    Select All  gt  Authentication or port number  gt  Authentication   From the pulldown menu  select an authentication method  A  configuration screen for the selected authenticati
216. nges  These configurations are saved to the  local Digi Passport unit in the default directory   tmp cnf  Then  manage  these configurations by exporting the files to the desired location   1  Select System administration  gt  Configuration management  The   Configuration management screen is displayed     2  Under Configuration Export  specify the location and file name in  which to save the configuration  and click Export        Configuration management    f admin   conf_manage  Configuration export  Location   CF Card USB storage Primary NFS server Samba server     User space  usr2     Local machine  Encrypt   Yes      File name     syscm    Configuration import  Location   CF Card USB storage Primary NFS server Samba server     User space  usr2     Local machine    Factory default  Configuration selection    Select all             Network configuration   Including IP configuration            Serial port configuration          Clustering configuration          Custom menu configuration          System user configuration          Power controller configuration          PC card configuration          USB configuration                System configuration       Perl configuration  Encrypt   Yes M     File selection   Local      Automatic backup configuration           Internet    Chapter 18 System Administration 289    Configuration Management    Automatically Save the Configuration    Further down the screen are the options for automatically saving the  configuration either p
217. nging the physical  interface from Ethernet 1 port to Ethernet 2 port automatically by the  bridging function  And also please note that eth1  IP address  2  interface  should be enabled first before start bridging     To disable the Ethernet Bridging  run following command in the CLI     service brmode stop    To customize the bridging configuration  modify  etc init d brmode and  refer to Linux manual page regarding brctl for detailed configuration  options    Run the following command to remove following message on the serial  console       brctl setageing brO 0    Chapter 17 Command Line Interface 279    Shell and Shell Utilities    ash  false    sed    File and Disk Utilities    System Utilities    Network Utilities    Chapter 17 Command Line Interface    cat   df   fsck   Is  mknod  rmdir  tar    zcat    date   id   killall   ps  shutdown  telnet    usermod    ftp  ping    bash    grep  sh    chmod  du  gunzip  mkdir  mount  scp    touch    free  init  Ismod  reboot  sleep  uname    who    ifconfig    route    echo  more    which    cp  e2fsck  gzip  mkdosfs  mv   sync    vi    half  insmod  modprobe  reset   stty  useradd    whoami    iptables    telnet    Dual Network Options    env    pwd    dd   find   In  mke2fs  rm   tail    umount    hostname  kill  poweroff  rmmod   su    userdel    netstat    ssh    280    Important File Locations    Important File Locations    The Digi Passport unit has several files that are important for administrative  use  This section lis
218. nit will no longer boot  It also provides a  hardware testing module that detects and tests hardware components on  the unit   To access the Boot Loader program     1  Connect the Ethernet cable from the console port on the rear panel of  the Digi Passport unit to a serial port on a workstation  Use the Ethernet  cable packaged with the Digi Passport unit and attach the DB 9  adapter  In the photo of the back panel of the Digi Passport unit below   the arrow points to the console port   The photo shows the back panel  of a Digi Passport 32      DIGI PASSPORT      L   uss Console Find       Console port    2  Setup a terminal emulation program  such as HyperTerminal  using the  following port parameters     bps 9600   data bits 8  parity none   stop bits 1   flow control none    3  Turn on the power to the Digi Passport unit     4  Press ESC within 3 seconds of booting the unit to get Boot Loader  menu     Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface 269    Hardware Test Menu    Access the Boot Loader Program    The Boot Loader program provides a hardware test for detecting and  testing hardware components on the Digi Passport unit  From the Boot  Loader menu  select the number 3 to access the Hardware test  Options for  several components appear     Disaster Recovery    The Digi Passport unit provides a disaster recovery procedure in the event  the configuration data is destroyed or corrupted  The Digi Passport unit  automatically restores a corrupted configuration file system to 
219. nnect   smash       Connect to SMASH CLP Console   Current Default Target Path    system1   Targets Properties   logs1 Name Value   CreationClassName   CIM_ComputerSystem  Name   HMS10C1  NameFormat   other  Dedicated  0  ResetCapability  4  EnabledState  2  RequestedState  12  EnabledDefault  2  HealthState  5  OperationalStatus   2  Description   PowerEdge 2900  ElementName   poweredge    To move to the root path  click the leftmost   on Current Default Target  Path as shown     SMASH  DRAC  on port 49            serial   serial_connect   smash  Connect to SMASH CLP Console  Current Default Target Path  f system1  Start     Stop     Reset  Targets Properties  logs1 Name value  CreationClassName   CIM_ComputerSystem    Chapter 7 Service Processors 140    Chapter 8    Methods for Controlling User Access    Users  Security  and Authentication    Methods for Controlling User Access    The Digi Passport unit provides four methods for controlling access to the  network and the devices on the network     Restricting or permitting IP filtering    This method allows or prevents users with specific IP addresses from  accessing devices or serial ports on the network  IP filtering can be per   mitted or restricted for all ports globally or per port     Restricting or permitting specific users    Users can easily be added and removed from lists of restricted and per   mitted users     Enabling sniff session access  This method allows multiple users to access a single port     Using a ce
220. ntain equipment that has a connection between the grounded  conductor of the same DC supply circuit  the grounding conductor  and  also the point of grounding of the DC system in the same immediate  area  Do not ground the equipment elsewhere     Locate the DC supply source within the same premises as the  equipment     Route away and secure all DC input wiring from sharp edges to prevent  chaffing as well as provide strain relief     Provide a readily accessible disconnect device and protective device a  fixed wiring for a DC power supply suitable for the specified rated  voltage and current  Disconnect and protective devices to be rated 2A  Amps maximum     The Digi Passport unit is intended to connect to networking devices  Do  not attempt connecting to a telephone line     Chapter 19 Specifications and Certifications 313    Certifications    Emissions Certifications  e US  FCC part 15  Class A    e Canada  ICES 003 Class A  e Europe  EN55022   e Japan  VCCI   e Australia  AS3548    Immunity Certifications    Europe  EN55024 1998  EN61000 3 2  2000  EN61000 3 3  1998    Solaris Ready Certification    All Digi Passport products are Solaris Ready certified  This certification  identifies these products have met the stringent testing requirements for  system compatibility  inter operability  ease of installation  functionality  and  network interpretability as defined and controlled by Sun Microsystems        Chapter 19 Specifications and Certifications 314    
221. ntication  This allows creating a custom authentication schema or  using any other third party PAM module  The module must be compiled for  the Digi Passport unit   s environment     Digi offers an SDK for the Digi Passport family  To download the SDK   contact technical support at  support wizards digi com    1  Place the custom PAM modules onto   usr 2 on the Digi Passport unit     2  Use an SCP client  such as WinSCP  to copy data to the  usr2 directory   or use an SCP or FTP client on the Digi Passport unit to upload the file  while logged in as root     3  Make sure the module is flagged to be executable  chmod 755         Note  To activate the custom PAM module it has to be configured in the custom file  located in  etc pam d    4  Create a file called   etc pam d custom and add these lines   auth required  usr2 my_pam _auth so  session required  usr2 my_pam_ auth so  with the my_pam_auth so being the custom pam module   s name     Chapter 8 Users  Security  and Authentication 155    Configure Authentication for the CLI    Configuration for a Samba Server    On the Samba server    Make a shared folder to use a Windows machine for a Samba server  Fora  Linux machine  run the smb service     On the Digi Passport    1  In the Web interface  go to Network  gt  Samba configuration   2  Set Samba configuration values as follows     Samba service  Enable    Samba server name  IP address or Computer name of Samba  server    Mounting path on Samba server  shared folder name  sho
222. nting specifications  It also includes  certification statements for the Digi Passport unit     Hardware Specifications    Digi Passport 4 Models       Attribute    Value       Operating temperature    41  F to 122  F  0  C to 50  C        Storage temperature     20  F to 140 F   30  C to 60  C        Humidity    10  to 90  non condensing       Power supply    External 5V  4A adaptor       Power consumption    Typical  7W   Single Power max  20W  Dual Power max  N A  48VDC max  40W       Operating system    Linux Hard Hat embedded       SDRAM    128 megabytes       Flash memory    64 megabytes          Dimensions Length  8 00 in  20 30 cm   Depth  1 10 in  2 90 cm   Width  6 20 in  15 50 cm   Weight       Digi Passport 4    2 06 Ib  0 94 kg           Digi Passport 4 w  Modem       2 39 Ib  1 09 kg        Chapter 19 Specifications and Certifications    299       Digi Passport 8 16 32 48 Models    Hardware Specifications       Attribute    Value  AC Powered       Operating temperature    0  C to 50  C  41 F to 122  F        Storage temperature     30  C to 60  C   20  F to 140  F        Humidity    10  to 90  non condensing       Power supply       All models except Digi  Passport 32 DC    Internal  100  240VAC  50 60 Hz  0 37A  max    15W  power output side        Digi Passport 32 DC    Internal  36 72VDC  50 60 Hz  1 2A  max        Power consumption       Digi Passport 8    Typical  11W   Single Power max  15W  Dual Power max  30W  48VDC max  40W       Digi Passport 16    Typ
223. ntral point  System administration  gt  Security profile  for  establishing security parameters per network  port  or password     Supported Authentication Methods  The Digi Passport unit supports several authentication methods  including     Local  RADIUS  TACACS   LDAP  Kerberos    Custom PAM  Authentication can be configured so that a secondary  method is attempted if the primary method fails     Chapter 8 Users  Security  and Authentication 141    Configure User Access Control    Configure User Access Control    Another method for controlling access to the serial ports on the Digi  Passport unit is the User Access Control configuration  User access control  can be set up either globally  using the All Ports option  or per port     It is not necessary to have users added to the system to assign rights   However  for the permissions or restrictions to be enforced  the username  must match exactly  The username is case sensitive  and the application  does not recognize misspellings     To add users  select System administration  gt  Users administration  For  details about adding users  see  Add a Compact flash Card  on page 43     Users do not need to be configured locally  they can be defined on a  remote authentication server     Access lists are used to add rights to a single user or to multiple users at  the same time  In addition  multiple users can be grouped and assigned  one  some  or all these rights     e Port access rights   e Port monitor rights   e Power manage
224. nu is presented by entering the command  configmenu  For more information about the configuration menu  see   Configuration Menu Interface  on page 239     Croot Digi_Passport    J  configmenu    Welcome to Digi Passport 16 configuration page   Current time  gt  64 18 2066 14 21 48 F W REU    Serial No  pi6proto   6616 6661 MAC addr Ceth  gt   66 46 9D 22 DE 66  5      p  IP addr   eth  gt    16 4 182 5      Network    Serial port    Clustering  Power controller    Peripherals    System status  amp  log    System administration    Stop device locating    Chlelp   slave   Lalpply  e xlit  OMMAND  lt Display HELP   help gt  gt        Chapter 1 Introduction 16    Configuration User Interface Options for Digi Passport    Command Line Interface    The command line interface can be accessed from a Telnet or SSH session  or from the console port  The root user always has access to this interface   and the admin user can be granted read only permission     ec    Telnet 10 4 102 57    Linux 2 6 12  Digi_Passport gt       gt     Digi_Passport login  root   Password     C root Digi_Passport    1   who   USER TTY IDLE FROM HOST   root pts   66  HAm Jul 9 19 54 16 8 16 29   root Digi_Passport    IH       SNMP    An SNMP MIB to configure the Digi Passport unit is available on the  Passport CD and can be downloaded from support digi com  To allow use  of this MIB  SNMP configuration must be enabled in the security profile  In  the Web interface  this is accomplished through the   System Adm
225. o server pem     cat key pem  gt  gt  server pem    Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface 261    Dial in Modem Access    Dial in Modem Access    Individual serial ports on the Digi Passport unit can be configured for dial in  modem access  To use dial in modem mode  an external modem is first    attached to a serial port and then the serial port is configured for dial in    modem access  In the illustration below  port 7 is configured for a dial in    modem   To configure a serial port for a dial in modem  do the following   1  Access the configuration menu    Select Serial Port Configuration     2  3  Select an individual port number and then Host Mode Configuration   4    Select Host mode and then Dial in modem     Select menu    Network Configuration    Serial Port Configuration    Clustering Configuration    Power Controller    PC Card Configuration    System Status  amp  Log    System Administration    Save Changes    Exit without Saving    Exit and Apply Changes    Exit and Reboot   lt ENTER gt  Refresh   gt 2    we SONORAN    Serial Settings    RS232 9600 N 8 1 No  RS232 9600 N 8 1 No    1  RS232 9600 N 8 1 No    Title RS232 9600 N 8 1 No    Enter port number to confiugre   lt E     lt     POOAWNE  o      ab    Port Title       Host Mode Configuration    Serial Port Parameters    Authentication    Apply all ports setting       gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh  1    na  Port Title  1    Enable  Port Management   ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh            gt   9    
226. on hosts file    interfaces Basic loopback  lo  and Ethernet interface  ethO     eth1  info  lp  gateway  etc         ip6tables save    IPv6 IP access          iptables save       IPv4 access       Chapter 17 Command Line Interface    281       Important File Locations                                     File Name Description  krb5 conf Kerberos configuration file   nsswitch Search order for files and DNS    pam d Authorization table directory  passwd User password file    ppp PPP info directory  resolv conf DNS info  server pem Stores the private keys when using SSH with key   certification   shadow The secure passwd file  snmpd conf All SNMP info  sshd_config SSH config file       syslog ng conf    Syslog ng config file            xinetd d telnet    timezone Timezone file     xinetd d Network services for serial and remote ports    xinetd d master     xinetd d port                                           menu Directory for custom menu XML files   allports All ports configuration directory     master cnf Port access menu configuration file     port  Specific port and remote configuration directory     port  keywords cnf Port and remote port keyword alert file     port  portinfo cnf Port and remote port information file     rport default Remote port configuration directory     power     power power cnf Power controller config     sys   autobk cnf Auto backup       autofwup cnf    Auto firmware via TFTP       cliauth cnf    Authentication method via CLI       datetime cnf   
227. on method is  displayed  This figure displays the options for setting up a RADIUS    server as the primary authentication server and Local authentication if  the primary authentication method fails           Port titie   Host mode configuration  freekVM configuration  Serial port parameters  Port logging  Authentication   User access control  Alert configuration            Savetoflosh   _Seve 8 opply    Cancel      Note  To access the remote authentication to Port access menu  select  Serial port  gt  Configuration  gt  Port access Menu     Fill in the applicable fields   Click Save  amp  apply     Note  Under Serial port  gt  Connection  The   of User column shows  how many users are actually connected to the port and the  username of the read write user     Chapter 8 Users  Security  and Authentication 151    Configure Authentication for the Web Server    Configure Authentication for the Web Server    1  Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface     2  Select Network  gt  Web server configuration  The Web server  configuration settings are displayed     Web server configuration     network   web    Web page refresh rate for statistics data  display  0 1800 seconds  0 for no refresh    Login timeout  0 1440 minutes  0 for  unlimited     Blocking time for suspicious intruder  0   720 hours  0 for non blocking    Authentication    Authentication method  Local    second s   minute s     hour s     Eliminate r
228. on request windows     The application starts  and a message that the connection suc   ceeded is displayed  The freeKVM VNC Connection opens     admen i    a Role user SUSE LINUX 9 2  suse92   Username       Password    Administration Logn Meru             3  Enter user name and password  and click Login  If the application does  not start  check to make sure that the application is in the search path  on the server  See  Installing Programs for freeKVM  on page 179     Chapter 11 Configure and Use freeKVM 175    Use freeKVM with X Window System Protocol and XManager Software    Use freeKVM with X Window System Protocol and XManager Software    This section describes how to configure freeKVM with X Window System  Protocol and XManager software and connect to a system with it     Configure freeKVM with X Window System Protocol  1  Access the Digi Passport Web interface and log in     2  Select Serial Port  gt  Configuration  This window is displayed     Serial port configuration    Port access menu configuration  Port access menu configuration  All port configuration  Port  Title Mode Base address Port Proto Serial settings  All Port Title cs 0 0 0 0 7001 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No    Individual port configuration    Port  Title Mode Dest AssignedIP Port Proto Serial settings  1 Windows Server  RDP  cs 0 0 0 0 7001 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  2 Linux Server  VNC  cs 0 0 0 0 7002 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  3 HPUX  XManager  cs 0 0 0 0 7003 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  4 Port Title  4 cs 0 0 0 0 7004 T
229. onfiguration    Dynamic DNS configuration    SMTP configuration    IP filtering configuration  NFS n  e    ion  guration    1  re  3  4  5  6   Ta  8   9   6  1      PPP configuration    NIS configuration     h lelp  Cslave   a lpply  e x lit  OMMAND  lt Display HELP   help gt  gt  im    7  Enter 1 for IPv4   8  Enter the appropriate parameters for the IP settings   9  From the menu  enter a to apply  and enter x to exit     Chapter 2 Getting Started    Changes are saved and applied immediately  There is no need to    26    Access the Web interface    Access the Web interface  There are two ways to access the web interface     Using Digi   s device discovery tool  ADDP  Advanced Digi Discovery  Protocol   This device discovery tool is used to find and launch the web  configuration and management interface  ADDP will work whether or  not the unit has an address assigned  and whether or not there is a  DHCP server on the network  it only requires that the ADDP software is  running on a computer on the same LAN segment as the Digi Passport   Find the device and double click it to access the web interface  or select  the device and click Configure network settings  on the left navigation  bar      By entering the IP address of the Digi Passport unit or its hostname  directly into the address bar of a browser  The IP address and DNS  server must already be set up     Home Page for Web Interface    Once the web interface is accessed  the home page of the web interface  page is disp
230. onfiguration Selection  Press A E to select each option  A   X  System configuration  B   X  Serial port configuration     X  Clustering configuration  D   X  System user configuration  E   X  Custom menu   lt ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh    Select location    lt  1   CF Card      Primary NFS    3   User Space    usr2    4   Local Machine   5   Factory Default  gt    gt        5  Select Factory Default  The system will restore factory defaults  and    the unit will automatically reboot     6  Use System Administration to save the configuration in case it needs to    be reloaded later or onto another system  See  Add and Configure a PC  Card  on page 241 for more information     Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface 267    Set Date and Time    Set Date and Time    Date and time on the Digi Passport unit can either be kept internally or by  an NTP server  It is easier to set the date and time from the Digi Passport  unit   s Web interface  Set Date and Time  on page 298  To set the date and  time from the configuration menu     1     Plog E    Access the configuration menu   Select System administration   Select Date and Time    Enter the desired parameters   Select Save changes     Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface 268    Access the Boot Loader Program    Access the Boot Loader Program  The Boot Loader program can be accessed during the boot process  The  main function of the program is to provide a backup means for restoring the  firmware if the Digi Passport u
231. onfiguring                 3  Configure the card by choosing Change card configuration  The  system searches for the card and displays information on the product  model number and type of card     Currently configured PC card      Select menu  1  Change card configuration    2  Stop the card service to disable or remove card      Configuring a new card   lt ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh  ae     lt none gt     Now configuring card type  Please wait tft  Press  ESC  key to stop card configuring     PC card found     Currently   Model   TOSHIBA  Size   64 MB  File System   ext2    configured PC card     T    HNCF 64MMA    Select menu  1  Change card configuration    2  Stop the card service to disable or remove card      Configuring a new card    4  Select Save Changes     Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface    ATA IDE Fixed Disk Card             241    Host Mode Configuration    Host Mode Configuration  1  Access the configuration menu     2  Select Serial Port Configuration  gt  port number or 0  zero  for all  ports  gt  Host Mode Configuration     Title  11 192  1 111 7011 SSH RS232 9666 N 8   1    No  Title  12 192   1 112 7012 SSH RS232 9600 N 8 1 No  Title  13 192   1 113 7013 SSH RS232 9600 N 8 1 No  Title  14 192   1 114 7014 SSH RS232 9600 N 8 1 No  Title  15 192  1 215 7015 SSH RS232 9600 N 8 1 No  Title  16 192   1 116 7616 SSH RS232 9600 N 8 1 No    Enter port number to confiugre    t all port configuration  gt      lt ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh  
232. onsole to the serial console can be  launched  and a freeKVM session can be initiated to the server  The port  log can also be reviewed to see what event triggered the alarm     Chapter 2 Getting Started 30    Configure Access to Digi Passport via SSH    Configure Access to Digi Passport via SSH    Access to the Digi Passport unit s command line via SSH is enabled by  default  TCP port 22   The Port Access Menu and individual ports can be  configured for SSH  The Digi Passport unit supports Blowfish and 3DES  encryption methods for SSH     Configure the Port Access Menu for SSH    1     Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit into the address bar of the  browser to access the web interface     2  Log in as root  admin  or a member of the port administration group   The default password for root is dbps  and the default password for    admin is admin     3  Select Serial port  gt  Configuration  gt  Port access menu  configuration  The Port access configuration menu is displayed     Port access menu configuration          serial   serial_config   pam    Port Access Menu  Enable   v  Enable Disable assigned IP  Disable     Listening TCP port  1024 65535   7000  Protocol  SSH y  Inactivity timeout  1 3600 seconds  0 for second s   unlimited   SSH  Quick connect via  Web applet     Web applet encoding  English  latin1  v  Login on port access  Enable   v  Authentication  Authentication method  Local v  Alert configuration  Email alert configuration  Email alert for port lo
233. ontroller outlet found      lt  lt Everyone gt  gt  Power access M   ServerTech on Port 48  gt   Add       Copy port configuration          Connect to the port    To connect to the port  choose Serial Port  gt  Connection and choose the  port number     19 Port Title  19 0  lt  Not used  gt     Power Control    Serial Terminal Connection    View Port Log    You can either control the power through the web interface by clicking on  the Power control button or through the serial console connection by  clicking on the serial terminal connection and then using the port menu key     Chapter 14 Power Controller 215    Third Party Power Controllers    Power Control Screen     Serial port power control   19   Port Title  19    Power controller   All outlets controlled by this port will be managed   Port  Manufacturer Title z Status  48 ServerTech ServerTech on Port 48 ON    SWeEr oO Power off Reboot       Serial Console Screen        SSH   Port Title  19      Trying 71 216 228 118 7019 online       Entering server port        e CTRL z for port menu        _Localecho   Connect   Disconnect   SendBreak    Close a               Applet de mud  jta  Applet started Ley  aes  ey  a        Interne y    Chapter 14 Power Controller 216    Third Party Power Controllers    After typing the port menu key     Port Menu     The  lt Port Title  19 gt  is currently Powered ON  t    send break  disconnect a sniff session    send message to port user  reboot device using power switch  power device off 
234. oot access  Disable Y    Serial ports count on connection page  16  50  90      Web applet option  Built in with SSH2     HTTP port  80    HTTPS port  443          Save to flash Save  amp  apply Cancel    3  Ability to see suspicious intruders    IP address in system logs  Any  suspicious intruder who requests a non exist web page more than 10  times within the blocking time will be blocked during the blocking time  for a suspicious intruder  Network   gt  Web server configuration    Whenever any suspicious intruder is blocked or released  this event will  be logged to the system log     4  In the Authentication method setting  select an authentication  method  then click Save  amp  apply     When using remote authentication for the web server  such as RADIUS   RADIUS Down local  TACACS   LDAP  Kerberos  or Custom PAM  user  definitions must also be added to the local database if you want access  as someone other than a user  The user password must be different  from the one used for local authentication  otherwise  the Passport will  authenticate against the local database instead of the remote one  For  details  see  Install and Configure PC Cards  on page 42     When the user password is approved by the authentication server  the  Digi Passport unit uses the local permission rights to provide access  privileges to ports and the configuration  except as in the note below     Note  For remote authentication  Radius  TACACS  etc  via the web        For web access as a port or
235. or the connection made from the  Passport     Chapter 7 Service Processors 132    Integrated Lights Out  iLO  iLO2     iLO GUI Access is for connecting to a SAC like iLO user interface page     as shown below        iLO  iLO  on port 5       serial   serial_connect f ilo    System Summary    BIOS Information  System Information  Processor Information  Memory Device    Control   Access settings   IP settings   System Health information  SNMP   iLO Event log    w03 08 08 2006   ProLiant ML310 G4   3400 MHz  64 bit extensions  DIMM 01  1024 MB  667 MHz       iLO  iLO  on port 5       serial   serial_connect 7 ilo    System Summary    BIOS Information  System Information  Processor Information  Memory Device    Control    Shutdown    Access settings   IP settings   System Health information  SNMP   iLO Event log       W03 08 08 2006   ProLiant ML310 G4   3400 MHz  64 bit extensions  DIMM 01  1024 MB  667 MHz    Connect to iLO Console  Restart system    Shutdown system    SMASH GUI Access accesses the SMASH CLP user interface  as shown    below     SMASH  iLO  on port 5       serial   serial_connect   smash    Current Default Target Path       Targets  systemi  mapi    Chapter 7 Service Processors       Connect to SMASH CLP Console    Properties       133    Integrated Lights Out  iLO  iLO2     Under Targets  click the links to move to the corresponding target path   SMASH CLP shows sub targets and properties  Any commands that can  be executed on the corresponding target path  su
236. ort display for Digi Passport 48 only  esussseseesssessissesrerrrressrsrrrrrrsssrernns 162  Chapter 10 Microsoft SAC Support  Support for Microsoft Windows Server 2003 in Digi Passpott              0   e 163  Process for Setting Up Microsoft SAC Support            cccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 164  Set Up the Windows Server 2003 POt              c cceeesseceeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaees 165  Command Sy Ma 6 ate olte teh else tate ceiaumicned dantsteceededechice ahmreadeaestenconsatent 165  Command  Example  t 2 c   ected Hecate e e bel Ea E Badia 165  Set Up the Digi Passport Unit for SAC Support             cece eeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 166  Access Windows Server 2003 Console Port from Digi Passport Unit s GUI      167  Chapter 11 Configure and Use freeKVM  FADOUE freek VM e r a aaea A tases TAA aA REAR assotsdaauehaveranaees 168  Supported Free Protocols and Tested Client Software               ceeeeseeeeeee 168  Example Configuration sc50seetenose toe eghon ndash acetate ota geetaree Mee a Reheeas 169  Use freeKVM with Remote Desktop Protocol             ceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeennteeeeeeeeeeeneea 170  Configure freeKVM with Remote Desktop Protocol               cccceeeeeeeeeeeees 170    User permission for each freeKVM session can be specified separately     171  Connect to a System through freeKVM using Remote Desktop Protocol    172    Use freeKVM with VNC Protocol          ccccccccccecccsceeeceseeeaeeseeeeeeeseesueaaseeseeneseeeneaes 173  Configure freeKVM with
237. ort group configuration settings are displayed        Port group configuration    serial   serial_config   portarp    No  Group name Login on each port Ports  No port group found        Disable v    New            Save to flash ia Save  amp  apply I  Cancel         2  Inthe Group name field  enter a name for the port group    3  For the Login on each port setting  select whether a login should be  performed on each port in the group   If Login on each port is Enabled  when a connection is made to the group   a separate login to each port is forced as well as a login to the group  This  means that a login prompt for each individual port is displayed  as opposed  to only displaying a login prompt when connecting to the group  The advan   tage of forcing a login to each port in the group is more specific logging of  who is connected to each port and when  as when multiple users are  attached to the group at the same time    Turning off Login on each port  Disabled  is useful when sending mass  commands to multiple units  for example  when doing batch reconfiguration  of identical systems  Disabling the port logins saves time because the login  steps do not have to be performed on each port     4  Click Add   5  Once the group is added  further configure the group by clicking its port  group number  as shown        Port group configuration       serial   serial_config   portgrp       No  Group name Login on each port Ports    Remove    Add    Test Group Enable v    New Disable v 
238. ort parameters       Port logging  Port event handling  Monitoring interval  sec  5 3600   5  Keywords Configuration  Keyword  Alert  Case sensitive  Diseble g  Email notification  Enable  9   Title of email   Attention on port     Recipient s email address     SNMP trap notification  Enable  9  Title of SNMP trap                  Use global SNMP configuration  Enable E  Authentication as  User access control  Alert configuration                         Save to flash Save  amp  apply   Cancel          e Select an action and enter the keyword for the port event handling   The keyword is any text string that will trigger an alert when it  traverses the serial port        Enable Email notification    e Enter the title of the Email  Subject line    e Enable or Disable Case sensitive    e Enter the Email recipient   s address    e Enable SNMP trap notification    e Enter the title of the trap     e Select either to use the global SNMP settings by enabling Use  global SNMP configuration or specify special settings for this port        Enter the IP address of the trap receiver      Enter the SNMP community   e Select the version   8  Complete configuration and click Save  amp  apply     Chapter 6 Alerts and Notifications 118    Configure Alerts for Automatic Device Recognition  ADR     Configure Alerts for Automatic Device Recognition  ADR    Before configuring the alerts for Automatic Device Recognition  ADR     make sure the sure the port for ADR has been configured  as described 
239. ort units SNMP agent to exchange information and control  actions  If no IP addresses are listed  any application can access the  SNMP agent     Community  The options are public or private  this value must  match the string used in the SNMP software     Permissions  The options are Read only or Read Write     Chapter 6 Alerts and Notifications 111    Configure SNMP v1 or v2    5  Enter Trap receiver settings      IP Address  The IP address of the device receiving the trap alerts     e Community  The options are public or private  this value must  match the string used in the SNMP software     e Version  The SNMP version  either version 1 or version 2c           Access control settings  NMS     No  1P address Communal ity Permission  E 192 168 100 107 Gigipasspor ReadOnly    0000         0000         D pooo    ADSS control setungs  SNMP V3     No  User Security level Auth Priv Permission           4 oO  Trap receiver settings  No  1P address Community User Security level Version  0000 _   90 00             6  Click Save  amp  apply     Chapter 6 Alerts and Notifications    Manage SNMP configuration    Manage SNMP configuration    The Digi Passport unit   s SNMP configuration can be managed using an  NMS or SNMP browser  However  before the NMS or SNMP browser can  access the data  the Access control settings must list the IP address of the  host from which the browser is executed  See the preceding graphic for  details     SNMPv3 Configuration    SNMPvs8 allows for authentica
240. orts is enabled automatically  because passive automatic detection is done    through the port log file     For the port logging feature to create and log to the proper port log file  ensure  that the serial port parameters are set correctly        Port logging  Port logging   Logging direction   Port log storage location   Port log to SYSLOG server   Port log buffer size     Port logging filename option     Port logging filename  null as default file    name portxxXdata     Time stamp to port log     Show last 10 lines of a log upon connect     Port log view      Enable v       Server output v    Memory x        Disable v       50 KB      Specify below vi       pori data    Disable v     Disable v              Clear  f Refresh     View     Port event handling       Chapter 5 Configure Ports    79    Configure Physical Serial Ports    Automatic detection rules    Automatic detection rules control how automatic detection is performed on  serial ports  such as how long to wait before performing the original probe   how long to wait until the next probe  whether to start the probe at a particular  time  and whether to use any detected values such as port title and serial port  parameters  Automatic detection rules can be applied to all or selected serial  ports  and there are default rules  All options on the Automatic detection  page are enabled automatically  Automatic detection rules are set and  changed in the Advanced configuration settings for serial ports  Serial port   g
241. otcfg  ems on  port com   id    baud 115200    where   e com  is the COM port to which console traffic will be redirected   e  is the is the number of the boot entry     e The port speed  baud  is set to the recommended rate  although  any rate supported by Windows Server 2003 can be used     Command Example  In this example  console output is redirected to COM 2  the boot entry is  specified as 1  and the port speed set to 115200   bootcfg  ems on  port com2  id 1  baud 115200    Chapter 10 Microsoft SAC Support 165    Set Up the Digi Passport Unit for SAC Support    Set Up the Digi Passport Unit for SAC Support    To set up a serial port to provide access to the Windows Server 2003    console port  do the following   1  Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a    web browser to access the web interface     2  Select Serial port  gt  Configuration     ed    Select a port     4  Select Host mode configuration  The Host mode configuration page    is displayed     5  Set the Host mode to Console server and the Type of console server to  MS SAC  English  or International  console as shown in the following    figure     Host mode configuration      serial   serial_config   ports f 4 M   hostmode       Port management   Apply all ports settings   Automatic detection   Port title   Host mode configuration  Host mode   Type of console server   Rackable System Management Card   Enable Disable IPMI   Enable Disable assigned IP   Listening TCP port  1024 6
242. ote port  Configuring IPMI on a standard  serial port is identical  except there is no SOL section     Configure IPMI  1  In the Web interface  select Serial port configuration  then select the  port to configure for IPMI     2  From the menu  select Host mode configuration  In the host mode  configuration settings  for the Enable Disable IPMI setting  select  Enable  Save to flash     Host mode configuration      serial  serial_config   ports     17       hostmode    Port management  Apply all ports settings       Port title   Host mode configuration  Host mode  Console server  Type of console server  Other v  Enable Disable IPMI  Bank  vi  Enable Disable assigned IP  Disable v    Listening TCP port  1024 65535   7017  Protocol  Telnet x   Inactivity timeout  1 3600 sec  0 for 0    unlimited    Enable Disable port escape sequence  Enable v    Port escape sequence  Ctrl   z  Port break sequence  pae  Use comment  No ml E o  Quick connect via  Local client         Chapter 7 Service Processors 122    Intelligent Platform Management Interface  IPMI     3  Select Remote port parameters from the main configuration page  The  remote port settings are displayed       Sil   serial_config   ports    17      rport_param  Port management  Apply all ports settings  Port title  Host mode configuration    freeKVM configuration  Remote port parameters    Destination IP  171 216 228 121  Destination port  0 65535    623  Protocol  RMCP  SOL  hd  OEM type  None bs  Allow unattended continuous
243. ote port parameters is a link to the settings for configuring remote ports   See  Configure Remote Ports  on page 102 for descriptions of these settings     Port Logging    Port logging is a link to the settings for configuring writing of port event data  to a log file  See  Configure Port Logging    on page 57     Authentication    Authentication is a link to the settings for configuring any user authentication  desired or required for users accessing ports  See  Configure Authentication  Methods for Port Access  on page 151 for more information     User Access Control    User access control is a link to the settings for configuring user access rights  to ports  See  Configure User Access Control  on page 142 for more  information     Alert Configuration    Alert configuration is a link to the settings for configuring system alerts and  notifications  See  Alerts and Notifications  on page 107     Chapter 5 Configure Ports 100    Reset Ports    Reset Ports    The Digi Passport unit allows restarting all processes associated with a port  and to disconnect all sessions     To reset an individual port   1  Click Serial port  gt  Configuration  gt  port number   2  For Reset this port  click Reset     Reset Individual Port Settings  Individual ports can be reverted to factory defaults   1  Click Serial port  gt  Configuration  gt  Port number   2  Click Set this port as factory default  Set     Chapter 5 Configure Ports 101    Configure Remote Ports    Configure Remote Ports    
244. password   new    Encryped primary NFS server password   confirm    Secondary NFS service configuration  Secondary NFS service   Secondary NFS server name   Mounting path on secondary NFS server   Secondary NFS timeout  sec  5 3600    Secondary NFS mount retrying interval     sec  5 3600    Enable Disable encrypted secondary NFS    Email alert configuration  Enable Disable email alert for NFS  disconnection     SNMP trap configuration  Enable Disable NFS disconnection trap     Use global SNMP configuration        Enable H    Enable        Enable E               Disable        Disable       Enable      Enable                Save to flash         Save  amp  apply     Cancel         Chapter 4 System Status and Port Logging    51    Enable Log Storage Location    Enable Syslog Server  To enable the Digi Passport unit for system or port logging on a syslog  server     1        Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface    Under the Systems status  amp  log heading  click SYSLOG NG  Configuration    Enter the IP address of the primary and secondary  if applicable  syslog  server  and select the syslog facility from the pulldown menu       Click Save  amp  apply     System logging     system   systemlog             System log storage location    SYSLOG facility for system logging    System log buffer size  100    KB  System log filename  messages   Automatic backup on mounting    Send system log by Email     System
245. port    Do not push objects into the openings of the Digi Passport unit  Doing  so can cause fire or electric shock by shorting out interior components     Keep the Digi Passport unit away from heat sources and do not block  cooling vents     Chapter 19 Specifications and Certifications 312    Certifications    Environmental Considerations and Cautions    To ensure safe and efficient operation of the Digi Passport unit  follow  these guidelines     Do not position the Digi Passport unit near high powered radio  transmitters or electrical equipment  such as electrical motors or air  conditioners  Interference from electrical equipment can cause  intermittent failures     Avoid exceeding the maximum cabling distances discussed in the  online cable guide     Do not install the Digi Passport unit in areas where condensation   water  or other liquids may be present  These may cause safety  hazards and equipment failure     For DC powered equipment     Install equipment in Restricted Access Areas only  dedicated  equipment rooms closets  in accordance with Articles 110 16  110 17   and 110 18 of the National Electrical Code  ANSI NFPA 70     Connect equipment to a DC supply source  reliably earthed  that is  electrically isolated from the AC source     Directly connect the equipment chassis to the DC supply system  grounding electrode conductor or a bonding jumper from a grounding  terminal bar  or bus  that is connected to the DC supply system  grounding electrode conductor     Co
246. port destination port  0 65535     0    Remote port protocol     Telnet       freeKVM configuration  Authentication  User access control          Advanced configuration    Save  amp  apply    Enter the remote port settings       Remote port destination IP  The IP address of the remote device    e Remote port destination port  0 65535   The port number on the  remote device    e Remote port protocol  The communications protocol used to  communicate with the remote device  Telnet  SSH  or RawTCP    All other settings of the remote port are equivalent to the settings of a local   serial port    To use a Digi PortServer TS 2 as a remote device  configure as follows  IP   address as assigned  IP port 2001 for port 1 or 2002 for port 2  and Telnet or   port 2501  2502 when using SSH as protocol    5  Click Save  amp  apply to confirm selections  A confirmation message is  displayed        Chapter 5 Configure Ports 104    Configure Remote Ports  The remote port will now be displayed in the list of ports on the Ports con   figuration page  under the heading Remote port configuration  For  example     Configuration    serial   serial_config    Port access menu configuration    Port group configuration    Port automatic detection configuration  Ports configuration  No  Group Title Mode Port Protocol Serial Settings  NONE Port Title cs 7001 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 NO  NONE Port Title  1 cs 7001 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 NO  NONE Port Title  2 cs 7002 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 NO  NONE Port Title  3 cs 7003 T
247. r   power_config   power_controller  Power controller  Alarms  amp  thresholds       Outlets  Outlet Port Title Unit  Outlet    1 1 Port Title  1 AA 1  2 1 Port Title  1 AA 2  3 None None AA 3   Serial port      None v    Outlet title   None   User access control     User or Access list Power access Action    lt  lt Everyone gt  gt  M   abcd F   awer 7   a   Select an access list        m  Move to Access lists to edit access list   Save to flash Save  amp  apply   4 None None AA 4  5 None None AA 5  6 None None AA 6  7 None None AA 7  8 None None AA 8    From this page you can link the outlet to a serial port  give the outlet a  name and assign user access rights     12 When you are finished configuring the outlet  select Save  amp  apply     Chapter 14 Power Controller 210    Power groups    Third Party Power Controllers    Power groups are groups of outlets that can be controlled at the same time   To configure a power group     1  In the Web Ul  go to Power controller  gt  Power group and the page  below will be displayed             Power group         power   power_group    Power control sequence group configuration    No  Group name    1 ServerTech E    Add        New    Save  amp  app    2  Enter a name for the new group and click Add  This page is displayed     Power group    power   power_group    Power control sequence group configuration    No  Group name    1  ServerTech    2  New group     Aad     Save to flash Save  amp  apply Cancel    3  To add outlets to the 
248. r Disable to disable it for all ports     5  Click Save to flash and continue with other configurations  or click  Save  amp  apply     oo    Enable disable the Apply all port settings feature for individual ports    To enable or disable the Apply all ports settings feature for an individual  port     1  Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface       Under the Serial Port heading  click Configuration     On the Ports configuration page  select the port number     On the Basic configuration page  click Advanced configuration     On the Port management page  click Apply all ports settings     On the Apply all ports settings page   e To enable the Apply all ports settings for the port  select Enable     e To disable the Apply all ports settings feature for the port  select  Disable to disable it for all ports     oun WwW PY    Chapter 5 Configure Ports 64    7     Clone ports    Configure Physical Serial Ports    Apply all ports settings      serial   serial_config   ports   1      apply_all    Basic configuration   Port management  Apply all ports settings   Apply all ports settings    Automatic detection  Port title   Host mode configuration  freeKVM configuration  Serial port parameters  Port logging  Authentication  User access control    Alert configuration       Save  amp  appl    Click Save to flash and continue with other configurations  or click  Save  amp  apply     To clone ports  go to Serial port
249. r names are case sensitive   e Must be between 3 and 29 characters     e Cannot include colons      less than or greater than signs    lt   gt    ampersand   amp    spaces  or quotation marks     e The at sign   and period  are acceptable        Select group    The group to which the user is assigned  Groups include  Root  System Admin  Port Admin and User  See  User  Groups  on page 18 for more information       Password    Password to assign to the user        Confirm password    Confirms the password        Shell program    Determines the user interface displayed when establishing a  Telnet or SSH session or connecting via the console port with  the Digi Passport unit  Shell program options vary by user  group    root  command line   system admin  command line  configuration menu  port  access menu  custom menus    port admin  configuration menu  port access menu  custom  menus    user  port access menu  custom menus       SSH public key  authentication    Alternative method of authenticating a user to a login server   More secure than a password only        SSH public key to  use    Current public file key or create a new public file key        Select new SSH  public key version    SSH1 only supports one type of key  SSH2 supports both  RSA and DSA key types           Select new SSH  public key file       Location for the SSH public key file        Chapter 2 Getting Started    37       User Administration    Edit a User  1  Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit i
250. ration          Clustering configuration  Custom menu configuration  System user configuration                      Power controller configuration          PC card configuration          USB configuration  System configuration  Perl configuration                   Encrypt   Yes       File selection   Local      4  From the list  select the Configuration factory default options to restore   5  Click Import  The Digi Passport unit automatically reboots     From the Command Line Interface  From the CLI  entering factory_reset performs the same action as using  the factory reset button     Values Established through Factory Reset  When the Digi Passport unit is reset to the factory defaults  these values  are established      e Static IP Address  192 168 161 5   e Port Access Menu IP Address  192 168 1 100  e Port Access Menu TCP Port Number  7000      Serial Port IP Address  192 168 1 101    e Serial Port TCP Port Number  7001     Chapter 18 System Administration 297    Set Date and Time    Set Date and Time    The Digi Passport unit provides two options for keeping system time  The  first is by using an NTP server and the other is through an internal battery  backup  To configure the Digi Passport unit for date and time  do the  following     1     Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface     2  Select System administration  gt  Date and time     Date and time     admin   date_time       Use NTP  Disable v  
251. ration   DIGI RPM on Port 2       power   power_config   power_controller    Power controller  Alarms  amp  thresholds            Save to flash J   Save  amp  apply J   Cancel         Outlets  Outlet Port Title   1 None Sun Server  Serial port    Outlet title    User access control     lt  lt   veryone gt  gt   tomw           Select an access list    v   2 None None   3 None None   4 None None   5 None None   6 None None   7 None None   8 None None   9 None None   10 None None    Unit     None       Sun Server    Power access Action    7    Move to Access lists to edit access list                                   7  To select the parameters for the User Access Control  click the  User Access link  Users can be granted permission to access an outlet  or restrict access for specific users from an outlet  For more  information  see  User Access for Power Controller  on page 198     Chapter 14 Power Controller    197    User Access for Power Controller    User Access for Power Controller    The Digi Passport unit can be configured to allow all or specific users  access to the power controller feature  as well as restricting specific users  to the power controller feature  User Access is configured on an per outlet  basis  User Access to a serial device that is connected to the power  controller in configured under Serial Port  gt  Configuration  gt  Port    gt   User Access     Configure to Allow Specific Users Access    To configure the Digi Passport unit for specific users  de
252. ress    Subnet mask  Address of the Subnet mask   Gateway  Address of the Gateway     Receive Transmit errors  Number of errors from receiving or  transmitting     Primary DNS  IP address of the primary DNS   Secondary DNS  IP address of the secondary DNS     Chapter 4 System Status and Port Logging 48    Enable Log Storage Location    Enable NFS Server    Enable Log Storage Location    Log data can be saved to an NFS server  but the NFS server must be  configured with read and write privileges  To use an NFS server  specify the  NFS server   s IP address and its mounting path  Encrypted NFS is using a  SSH connection to tunnel all data  To enable the NFS server for port or    system logging  do the following     1  Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a    web browser to access the web interface     2  Under the Network heading  click NFS server configuration  The NFS  server configuration settings are displayed     NFS server configuration     network   nfs       NFS service  Enable  Primary NFS server name    Mounting path on primary NFS server   Primary NFS timeout  sec  5 3600      Primary NFS mount retrying interval  sec   5 3600   m    Enable Disable encrypted primary NFS Enabl    Encrypted primary NFS server user     Encryped primary NFS server password   new         Eneryped primary NFS server password    confirm     Secondary NFS service configuration  Secondary NFS service    Enable      Secondary NFS server name  Ss    Mounting path
253. ribes how to configure freeKVM with the VNC Protocol   and connect to a system through freeKVM using VNC     Configure freeKVM with VNC Protocol  1  Access the Digi Passport Web interface and log in     2  Select Serial Port  gt  Configuration  This window is displayed     Serial port configuration    Port access menu configuration    Port access menu configuration  All port configuration  Port  Title Base address Proto Serial settings  All Port Title 0 0 0 0 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No    Individual port configuration  Port  Title Dest AssignedIP Proto Serial settings    Windows Server  RDP  0 0 0 0 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  Linux Server  VNC  9 0 0 0 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  HPUX  Manager  0 0 0 0 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  Port Title  4 0 0 0 0 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  Port Title  5 0 0 0 0 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  Port Title  6 0 0 0 0 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  Port Title  7 0 0 0 0 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  Port Title  8 0 0 0 0 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  Port Title  9 0 0 0 0 Telnet 9600 N 8 1   Port Title  10 0 0 0 0 Telnet 115200 N 8 1 No  Port Title  11 0 0 0 0 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  Port Title  12 0 0 0 0 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No  Port Title  13 0 0 0 0 Telnet 9600 N 8 1 No    Remote port configuration             Title Mode Assigned IP Proto Remote settings       No remote port found       Click  Remove  button to remove the checked remote port profile     Remote port title     Add       3  Double click the port to configure  A window similar to this one opens   showing the serial port number and title     
254. rity  and Authentication 146    Configure User Access Control    Sniff session settings include   e Enable Disable sniff mode     e Disabled  No one can enter a sniff session after the first user logs  on     e Enabled  Allows all users with access the following options in sniff  mode     e Sniff session display mode     e server output  View all data to a serial port from a remote  connection    e user input  View all data from a serial port to a remote connection  e both  See all data transmitted or received through a serial port  e Display data direction arrows     e Enable Disable  Displays arrows to indicate the direction of data to  or from the server  When the second user accesses the port  the  global  Port escape menu  is displayed  See  Port Escape Menu  on  page 23     e Permit monitor only mode    e Enable  A user with    Monitor    permissions can only connect to the  port in read only mode any time     e Disable  A user with    Monitor    permissions can connect if a read   write user has a connection to the port  A read only session is  automatically disconnected if the main user  read write session   disconnects from the port     Chapter 8 Users  Security  and Authentication 147    Security Profile    Security Profile    The Security Profile tab  available under System Administration  gt   Security Profile  provides a centralized access for enforcing site   appropriate  minimum security parameters on the Passport  These are the  available control mechanisms   
255. rmission  Read Write v    Enter settings     User name  enter the user name that has been set up for SNMPv3  access in the SNMP browser software     Security level  This setting should match the security level that is  configured in the SNMPv3 software     Authentication protocol  This setting should match the security  level that is configured in the SNMPv3 software     Authentication password  new   confirm   Supply and confirm  the password for the user  This setting should match the security  level that is configured in the SNMPv3 software     Privacy protocol  This setting should match the security level that  is configured in the SNMPv3 software     Privacy password  new   confirm   Supply and confirm the  privacy password for the user  This setting should match the  security level that is configured in the SNMPv3 software     Permission  Select the appropriate permission level     When done  click Save to flash     Chapter 6 Alerts and Notifications 114    Manage SNMP configuration    4  Open the main SNMP configuration page again  It should look    something like this     SNMP configuration    network   snmp       sysContact  administrator  sysName  Digi Passport  sysLocation  eo   sysService  7  Options  Trap Email   EnablePowerOnTrap Email  Yes     Yes x   EnableAuthenTrap Email   Yes     Yes     EnableLinkUpTrap Email   Yes x   Yes       EnableLinkDownTrap Email   Yes      Yes x     EnableLoginTrap Email  Vas w   Yes x        Trap event recipient s email address   
256. rs can add the ports of the peers or the slave units of the peers to the  custom menu     Chapter 15 Port Clustering    235    Clustering push configuration    Clustering push configuration    Clustering push configuration is used to push the configuration of one  Passport  Push server  to the other Passport unit in the cluster  This can  facilitate initial configuration of multiple Passport units  Because of security  concerns  pushing configuration is only possible to the units which have  default root password  dbps   Also only the ADR and User configuration  can be pushed     Clustering push configuration has two main configuration menus   e Push server filtering configuration  e Push configuration    The Push server filtering configuration menu is used to set push server s   which can push its configuration  ADR and User configuration  to the unit  If  there is no server configured  any Passport unit in the cluster can push its  configuration to the unit  If the unit is set as clustering slave unit and is  already configured as a slave by a master clustering unit  The Push server  filtering configuration page will also show the IP address of master unit     Push configuration    cluster   cluster_push_config    Push server filtering configuration    No  IP address mask Status Action  No filters found    New    an    Select master unit IP address    Select master unit IP address  fff  10 0 5 4 ood al  Save to flash    Push configuration             If the unit is set as c
257. rsrresssssrrrrreesereerrrrnnnnrrrrrrnnnennnnnnnnnnneeeeeeen 27  Home Page for Web Interface oicievasiicckevce de deedsennaceenticdtnecedsnsanmncsevevadereebensedaastecnants 27  Saving and Applying Changes in the Web interface               cceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 28  Serial Port Connection Page  Manage and Control Connections                ceee 29  Configure Access to Digi Passport via SSH            cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeees 31  Configure the Port Access Menu for SSH           eceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 31  Gonfigure a Port for SSH peer aaa oa aaae Eaa r Aae Eo EAA E aaee RAE Eara 32  Configure Access to Digi Passport via PPP     ssssssssseeessseessserrnesrsnnerrrnnrssrrrsssrrrnne 33  Configure PPP from the Passport Web Interface               ccceeeeeeseeeeeeenneeees 33  Configure PPP from the Windows XP Interface           c  ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 34  Configure PPP from a Linux Client cast astatedieie neta han tenes 35  Set PPP Host Mode for a Serial Port  0           cceeesccceeeeseeceeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeteeeeeeees 35  User Administrations  ieia eeen Eaa Ea aA ET Ta 36  Required Privileges for User Administration        seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeereeeeennn 36    Contents 3    Adda So        Game Po ee 36    EGIR AIS E E E T tere Bicol cihas a Seca cn 38  REMOVE a USEF   secsetctises igeeteekneaceseatalsbialadadentaddecutteselaons dasendabteadebeehevstiate tas 39  Unlock a User ACCOUN dec scdentesetecnadcnevescaettadetantadaceta
258. rts column        Port group configuration     serial   serial_config   portgrp    No  Group name Login on each port Ports    al  Test Group Enable v   1   4   10    New   Disable v  Add             Save to flash Save  amp  apply Cancel    Chapter 5 Configure Ports 89    Configure Physical Serial Ports    7  After port groups are defined  ports can be assigned to groups on the Port  management page  Click the Port management link  In the Group  setting  select the appropriate group from the pull down menu     Chapter 5 Configure Ports       Port management       serial   serial_config   ports   1x   port_mgmt       Basic configruation   Port management  Enable Disable this port   RealPort support   Group        Reset this port   Set this port as factory default    Apply all ports settings   Automatic configuration   Port title   Host mode configuration   freek  M configuration   Serial port parameters   Port logging   Authentication   User access control   Alert configuration   Power control configuration    Enable v  Disable v  arp_test0l v         Save to flash J  Save  amp  apply       Cancel          90    Configure Physical Serial Ports    Manage port groups from the Port Menu    Once a port group is created and ports added to it  the Port Escape Menu  displays an additional command  g   See  Port Escape Menu  on page 23 for  more details on accessing and using the Port Escape Menu      Port Menu     b send break           show last 100 lines of log buffer    a send mess
259. s    Therefore  either    e Configure automatic detection before plugging devices into the Digi  Passport unit    or    e Unplug devices  configure automatic detection  and plug in the devices  again     Chapter 5 Configure Ports 81    Configure Physical Serial Ports    Configure automatic detection   1  Add the appropriate Port automatic detection list by navigating to  Serial port  gt  Port automatic detection configuration  gt  Port automatic  detection list  By factory default  there are no Port automatic detection  lists defined as shown below        Port automatic detection configuration     serial   serial_config   port_autodetect    Port automatic detection list    No  Baudrate Data bit Parity bit Stop bit Probe string Wait time sec   No serial parameter settings for searching       New  All    B8bits y  None v  1bit                    Save to fash    2  Add as many sets of serial parameters to the port automatic detection list  as needed  including baud rate  data bit  parity bit  stop bit  probe string   and wait time  These settings are described in more detail in  Advanced  Serial Port Parameters  on page 98  For example     Port automatic detection configuration      serial   serial_config   port_autodetect    Port automatic detection list    Wait time    No  Baudrate Data bit Parity Stop bit Probe string  sec     bit  All v S8bits    None 1bit KOD    9600    8 bits Even 1 bit fx0D  4800     8bits None 1 bit  x0D  v   8 bits None 1 bit  v  8 bits None 1 bit fx0D 
260. s Action  48 ServerTech ServerTech on Port 48 96  49 ServerTech ServerTech on Port 49 96       4  Set the number of cascaded units     5  Fill in the listening port  for example 7049   This will be added as a  remote port     6  Fill in the destination IP address with the IP assigned to the ServerTech  device     Chapter 14 Power Controller 205    Third Party Power Controllers    7  Set the Protocol to SNMP   8  Specify the destination port number  Normally  this number is 162     9  Specify the Get and Set community strings  by default these are public  and private      10  Set the Remote version to v1 from the drop down list   11  Select the Web protocol   12  Click Add controller     Chapter 14 Power Controller 206    Third Party Power Controllers    Locally connected ServerTech power controller    To install a locally connected ServerTech power controller  follow the steps   listed    1  Connect the serial port of the ServerTech device to one of the serial  ports on the Passport using a standard Ethernet cable     2  Inthe Web go to Power controller  gt  Configuration  The page below  will open     After adding the Power controller a page similar to the one below will be  displayed      Power controller configuration      power   power_config    Add power controller    Port    Manufacturer    The number of cascaded units   Baytech  DIGI RPM  Add controller         Power controllers    Port  Manufacturer Title Outlets Action  No power controller added                3  Sel
261. s Remote Desktop  VNC   Xmanager  X Window System   Web Redirection   Radmin   User defined       Expandable Capabilities    CompactFlash PC Card       Flash memory card   Wireless LAN adapter  802 11b    Ethernet LAN adapter     PSTN CDMA modem card  USB  Expandable storage to USB flash  Integrated power management and control in  conjunction with Digi RPM and third party  power strips  External logging  syslog  NFS  PC card  USB  Flash           Service processors       Support for various service processors  such as    e     Intelligent Platform Management Interface   IPMI   Integrated Lights Out  iLO     e Systems Management Architecture for Server  Hardware Command Line Protocol  SMASH  CLP     e Dell Remote Access Controller  DRAC      Service processors are configured through the  remote port           Introduction    13    Discovering and Configuring the Digi Passport unit    Discovering and Configuring the Digi Passport unit    Chapter 1    See the Quick Start Guide that came with the the Digi Passport unit to  connect the hardware and configure an IP address for the unit     Alternatively  insert the Software and Documentation CD in your  computer   s CD drive  and select the Digi Device Discovery program  This  program uses the Digi proprietary Advanced Digi Discovery Protocol   ADDP  to discover all devices on a network  Once discovered  devices  can be viewed and configured  Start the program and click the correct  device to configure     The Digi Device Discover
262. s are configured through the remote port  This chapter   describes configuring and using service processors     Configuring a Service Processor  To configure a service processor     1  Add a remote port  as instructed in  Add and Configure a Remote Port   on page 103        Configuration       serial   serial_config       Port access menu configuration    Port group configuration    Port automatic detection configuration    Ports configuration      Group  NONE  NONE  NONE  NONE  NONE    Title Mode Port Protocol Serial Settings    Port Title cs  LINUX Redhat9 JOJ port1 cS  Windows   Server 2003 SAC port2 CS  Port Title  3 cs  Port Title  4 cs    Remote port configuration    5 NONE    Port title     Test Remote Port cs          iLo  Listening TCP port   7051       Save to flash Save  amp  apply    Chapter 7 Service Processors    7001 Te  7001 Te  7002 Te  7003 Te  7004 Te       7050 Te    net  net  net  net  net    net    9600 N 8 1 NO  4800 N 8 1 NO  115200 N 8 1 NO  9600 N 8 1 NO  9600 N 8 1 NO    192 168 1 18 22       120    Configuring a Service Processor    2  On the Host mode configuration page  use the Service processor  setting to select the service processor  Available options are NONE     IPMI  iLO  and DRAC        Host mode configuration  Host mode   Type of console server   Rackable System Management Card   Service processor   Enable Disable assigned IP address   Listening TCP port  1024 65535    Protocol     Inactivity timeout  1 3600 seconds  0 for  unlimited    D
263. s more  access than ronk does     User access control    Access type                                        User or Access list f Action  Port Monitor Power Log Break   lt  lt Everyone gt  gt  v v K      ronk o   O0 ot  a oF oF A      Select an access list    Y M F  K K       Move to Access lists to edit access list     Enable Disable multiple session  Disable v  Session display mode      Display data direction arrows      The usernames and passwords on the Digi Passport unit are case sen   sitive  Notice  lt  lt Everyone gt  gt  has access to Port  Monitor  and Power   while user ronk has access to only Monitor  with no Port or Power  access     Chapter 8 Users  Security  and Authentication 144    Change the Privileges of an Access List    Configure User Access Control    1  Onthe same screen shown in the previous procedure  select an access  list from the pulldown box     2  Click Add access  then click Save  amp  apply   When the access list is added  it will include users Paul and Tim     In this screen  the sun users Access group has access to Port  Monitor   and Power  while any other users   lt  lt Everyone gt  gt   do not have access     User access control    Access type    User or Access list    Port Monitor Power    Action    Log Break                                                        lt  lt Everyone gt  gt   sun users m  m  M  Remove      Select an access list       M  a   v iv        Move to Access lists to edit access list     Enable Disable multiple sessio
264. s to an access list  To add an access list     1  Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface     2  Log in as root or admin  The default password for root is dbps  for  admin  admin     3  Under System administration  click Access List  The Access lists  page is displayed     Access lists  j admin   access_list    Access lists configuration    No  Access list name    1  sun users Remove      New        Add    Synchronization configuration       Save  amp  apply    4  Enter the name of the access list and click Add     5  To add users to the access list  click on the access lists number in the  No  column     Getting Started 40    User Administration    6  Add the users to the access list     Add one user at a time to the access list by entering the name into the  User name edit box and clicking Add  Add users that are not locally  configured on the Digi Passport unit  but use a centralized authentica   tion method such as RADIUS  LDAP etc    Important  Take care when entering user names in the access list  as  the spelling of user names is not verified against the local user data   base  A misspelled user name could result in adding externally config   ured users that only exist in the RADIUS  LDAP or other central  databases     Access lists configuration   1      admin   access_list   access_list    1 M    Access lists configuration       Access list name   sun users    User list    No  User name  Nothing 
265. sed routing from    ip rule    and    ip route     section of the Linux ip man page or Appendix D of  Guide to IP Layer  Network Administration with Linux   http   linux ip net html linux   ip html tools ip routing     Chapter 17 Command Line Interface 278    Ethernet Bridging    Dual Network Options    Ethernet bridging is commonly used to connect different networks of  Ethernets together  so that these Ethernets will appear as one Ethernet to  the participants  Ethernet bridging essentially involves combining an  Ethernet interface with one or more physical Ethernet interfaces and  bridging them together under the umbrella of a single bridge interface   Ethernet bridges represent the software analog to a physical Ethernet  switch  The Ethernet bridge can be thought of as a kind of software switch  which can be used to connect multiple Ethernet interfaces  either physical  or virtual  on a single machine while sharing a single IP subnet     In the Passport  a script file  brmode   etc init d brmode   can be used to  enable disable the Ethernet bridging   Ethernet Bridging is supported only  through CLI command  There is no option in Ul      To enable the Ethernet Bridging  run following command in the CLI     service brmode start    Then  the IP address of the ethO interface will be the common IP address  for the bridging mode interface br0      After enabling Ethernet Bridging  ethO and eth1 address will disappear     Note that there will be a delay of a few minutes for cha
266. select access for   lt  lt Everyone gt  gt  and add specific user and access as in the following steps     1   2     Chapter 14 Power Controller    Log in to the Digi Passport unit  username root  password dbps     Click Power Controller  gt  Configuration  gt  Outlets  gt  outlet number to  configure     Select the port to configure to the outlet  If it is a non serial device   select None     Edit the outlet title  If there is a serial port  the port title will appear and  cannot be edited from this screen     Click Save  amp  apply     Under Everyone  deselect the type of power access and click Save to  flash     Enter the user that will have access and check the Access type  Port is  access to the port  Monitor is access to sniff  Power is access to the  power management     Click Save to flash  Repeat steps 7 and 8 for additional users   Click Save  amp  apply after all users have been entered     Power controller  Alarms  amp  thresholds  Outlets    Outlet Port Title Unit   Outlet     i 1 Sun Server D 1  2 1 Sun Server D 2  3 None Backup Tape Device 0 3   Serial port  None      Outlet title   Backup Tape Device   User access control     User Power access Action   lt  lt Everyone gt  gt  L   Gilligan IV Remove    m Add  Save to flash Save  amp  apply Cancel   4 None Light display D 4  a  None None 0 5  6 None Test D 6  7 None None 0 7  8 None None 0 8       198    User Access for Power Controller    Configure to Restrict Specific Users    To restrict specific users  sele
267. ser    x close current connection to port       When sniff users login to a port from a Telnet session  a sniff session menu  is displayed with allowed options  The first user  with port access rights  to  login to the port is in the main session     ex Telnet 143 191 3 9     ol x     Port Menu         lt Port Title  1 gt    Port 1 gt  is being used by  lt Gilligan gt   The  lt Skipper gt  is connected in monitoring mode     take over main  enter as a slave    disconnect a sniff session  send message to port user    close current connection to port          The next user  with port access rights  to enter the port will be given the  option to take over the main session  This user is given the option to take  over the main session by either terminating the first user or switching the  first user to sniff  read only      ex Telnet 143 191 3 9     ol x     Port Menu         lt Port Title  7 gt    Port 7  is being used by cet Tigan   The  lt Skipper gt  is connected in monitoring mode     take over main session  enter as a slave session    show last 100 lines of log buffer  disconnect a sniff session  send message to port user    close current connection to port  ake over master ssion and    terminate on of main session  switch main session to sniff mode    m  i  d  a  x  T  t          Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface 254    Escape Sequences for Sniff Sessions    Configure and View Sniff Sessions                                     Escape  Sequence Action Occurrence  Ctrl 
268. server  or a  SYSLOG server     Configure the System Log Device    To configure the compact flash card for system logging  see  Add a  Compact flash Card  on page 43  In the Digi Passport unit  all log  messages are sent to the syslog ng daemon  The local 0 facility is only  used for system log messages  The local 1   local7 facilities can be used  for port log     To configure system or port logging to the Syslog server  syslog ng   go to  the System logging or Port logging menu  There is no enable disable  option for System log to SYSLOG server because it is default function     The facility for each port log from local1 to local7 can be specified  The  local 0 facility is fixed for system log  With this configuration  the  management of all messages sent to Syslog server  Syslog ng  can be  configured during configuration of SYSLOG NG    By default  the syslog ng configuration has an internal RAMDISK    var log messages  that logs the configuration for system log message   local 0   To change filter options for this default configuration  click it  The  Syslog NG filter configuration page has all filter options supported by the  syslog ng daemon  For example  if the Priority debug  option is added to  the default system log configuration  all local syslog messages with debug  priority are also logged to  var log messages  The Linux kernel and xinetd  send some of their messages to syslog with debug priority     To send log messages to a remote syslog server  add a new dest
269. setinscecnstetssneelettives tebsimeacsei endian ease aaacee 303  DB 25 Male Console Adapter               ccccssssceceeseecceeeeneceeeeessaeeeseeseneeeeeneananes 303  DB 9 Female Console Adapter             cccccccceseseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeseseseeeeeteeeneees 304  DB 25 Female Console Adapter             ccc ccessssceeeesaeeeeeesseeeeeeseeeeeeeeaaeeees 305  DB 25 Male Modem Adapter  Digi 8 pack reorder P N 76000670               306  DB 9 Male Modem Adapter  Digi 8 pack reorder P N 76000702                 307   Ethernet PImOuts iiinis eioi ai eenei kna ea aeeai aa aian T Aaaa KE T re piai 308   Rack MOU FUL IN Gis et cera snan eaters dart anaa aaa aaae a lus a erea 309  Rack Mounting Installation scsi cinceceiss dateneenaesieealeceininaeeethe im daencaries 309  Rack Mounting Safety and Installation Considerations              c ccceeeee 309   Lithium Battery Replacement               ccccccccseeenccceeeeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 311   Certificato NS eneen a N e e a a eia 312  Safety Certifications 5 ec ices cae cod caren sbtecsd ex neces ces ansn stacas suanemanca terns eucseaentaeie 312  Emissions Certifications      htc Meadtestetnbssectcdaen Heid n aden R ae 314  Immunity Certifications sescceervesteeperdecnvedend alvin sari cinenieyeleeadeastacetaetan ch aneaeentereet 314    Solaris Ready Certification siecessct crests naiguietvertnaieneenien meen eae 314    Chapter 1    Digi Passport    Model Support    Introduction    Digi Passport    Model Support    Th
270. sh configuration menu  page  If the unit has salve unit or joins peer to peer clustering  you will see  the list of clustered units on this page  After selecting the configuration and  unit to be pushed the configuration  press the push button  And then wait  until the Status has changed from Busy to Ready  Once the status has  changed to Ready again  you will find selected configuration was pushed    the target unit     Push configuration    duster   cluster_push_config    Push server filtering configuration  Push configuration  Configuration selection   O Select all  C  ADR configuration       V  User administration    Status   Ready  No  IP address Remark Status    Clustering  10 0 5 1 slave Ready  Clustering  2 10 0 1 20 peer to  Ready  peer          Chapter 15 Port Clustering 238    About the Configuration Menu    Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface    About the Configuration Menu  The configuration menu enables authorized users to configure the Digi  Passport unit with the same functionality as is available with the web  interface  except for creating custom menus     Access the Configuration Menu  The configuration menu is available through a Telnet or SSH session to the  root user  system administrator  or port administrator   Port administrator  can only change serial port parameters    1  Telnet into the Digi Passport unit     e If logging in as root  username root  password dbps  By default  the  root user is connected from a Telnet session to the Linux command
271. sole server  Enable v   Use detected freekVM     Enable v       Start Now  Start Now    Port title    Chapter 5 Configure Ports 95    Configure Physical Serial Ports    Including special characters in probe strings    To include special characters in the probe string  such as carriage returns  line  feeds  and escape characters  specify them as hexadecimal values  For  example  here are hexadecimal equivalents for several common special  characters     e Carriage return  CR    xOd   e Line feed  LF    x0a   e Escape  ESC    x1B   Here are examples of the output generated by several probe strings                       Probe string Output  root x0d x0a root lt CR gt  lt LF gt    x1Btest x0d  lt ESC gt test lt CR gt    x1B test x0d  lt ESC gt  lt Space gt test lt CR gt    x1b x20test x0D  lt ESC gt  lt Space gt test lt CR gt    x1B x20 x74 x65 x73 x74 x0d  lt ESC gt  lt Space gt test lt CR gt                 For Passive automatic detection  scripts used instead of probe strings   If the automatic detection state is set to Passive  no probe string is sent to the  attached device but the port buffer is analyzed    Instead  the script  tmp cnf bin passive_detect is executed and the results  are saved to these files   var run HostnamePortxx and    var run OSPortxx    The commands to parse the system response are user customizable   Therefore  if a device is not recognized by the Digi Passport unit  the root user  may add a rule to the appropriate file to allow it to be properly reco
272. ster Slave Port Clustering    Configure Slaves to Join a Cluster   Digi Passport units can be configured as basic slaves without any   additional configuration  Two additional settings  however  enhance the   clustering capability    e Authentication mode  Local authentication is the slave independently  authenticating all port access  Master authentication is the master  performs port authentication  Users do NOT need to be defined on the  slave unit  Password verification will be done by the master unit       Update Master on Changes  Automatically updates port name  changes  port settings  and user permission settings to the master unit   Generally  Update Master on changes should be set to Yes     Select the appropriate settings  then click Save  amp  apply     Clustering configuration    Clustering mode configuration    Clustering mode    Slave v    Authentication mode      Local J    Update master on changes   No J    Save to flash Save  amp  apply       Chapter 15 Port Clustering 223    Configure Master Slave Port Clustering    Configure Advanced Clustering Settings    To refine a cluster environment  use the advanced clustering configuration  settings     1  Select Clustering  gt  Configuration  gt  Master  gt  Save  amp  apply     2  Select the port number  gt  Enable  gt  Save  amp  apply        Clustering configuration   Unit A  Basic configuration    Enable Disable this unit   Disable v    Enable f   Save to flash Save  amp  apply Disable       3  From the Cluster
273. t  Configuration  gt  All or port No   gt  Advanced Configuration  gt  Automatic  detection   Here is an example of automatic detection rules     Automatic detection      serial   serial_config  ports   1       auto_detect    Basic configuration  Port management  Apply all ports settings  Automatic detection  Device detection method   Initial delay  Tl minutes    Recheck interval  every   1440 minutes    Start time  hh mm ss      Probe string  0D    Detected OS     Use detected port title  Disable v    Chapter 5 Configure Ports    Use detected type of console server     Use detected freeKVM   Use detected serial parameters     Baudrate Data bit Parity bit    All 8 bits None  9600 8 bits Even  4800 8 bits None    Automatic detection     Port title   Host mode configuration  freeKVM configuration  Serial port parameters  Port logging  Authentication   User access control  Alert configuration    Enable v  Enable v  Enable v    Stop bit Probe string Wait time    1 bit  x0D 0  1 bit  x0D 3  1 bit  x0D 3       Save t appl    80    Configure Physical Serial Ports    When automatic detection for connected devices begins    In factory default mode  if automatic detection is set to Active  the Digi  Passport unit waits 5 minutes  the Initial delay setting   then probes the ports  for which automatic detection is enabled using the specified port automatic  detection list  After that  it waits an interval before performing the next probe   This interval is either 1440 minutes  the defaul
274. t blunien ali serendedidehseectseunderess 227   Configure peer to peer CIUStELING            eecccceeeesseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaaeeeesensaeeeeeneaees 228  Configure Peer to peer Mode              eesccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeessaeeeeeneaes 228  Peer to peer Information Page                 cccccceeeessseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenentenees 229  Join a Peer to peer Group texciactevinitetsih adhe utlnc cia tleceen ees cata ea ales 230  INVITE  POSTS shh eek  EEE E E T T EEA 231   Connect to Peers iesse E E a E uae 233  Link to Web Interface          ssssseeeesesssssrsrerrrrrrrrnnnnetnnnnunnennrnnnnunneunsernrnnneseene 233  Link to Port Access Menu         se eesssssssrrsesosrrrrrnnnstrrnrrnnnsssrnnnnnnnssstrrrenneeeene 233  Use the Digi Passport unit to Connect to Devices on Clustered Systems    233  Serial Port connection Page          essssessesrrsssrrnnrerrreessrrrssernntetnnnrsrnnnnssrrnnent 233  Connect to a Port via connect asp scsdectciect esc ae Rivets ty aa 234  Gonnect toa Port vid SSH i re iaee rera a eiea areia ea ae canaris 235  Add Ports of Peers or Slaves to the Custom Menu                 escceeeeeeteeeeeees 235    Contents    Contents    Clustering push  COMMCLINATION  cece cnc sive  hare Rcd aoe we aya 236    Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface    About the Configuration M nu            ccccccecccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeesaaeeesnenaeeeeeeeeees 239  Access the Configuration Menu i cscgia sitet icy eee ako ees ae ae 239  Navigating in the 
275. t by  the Basic serial port configuration setting Automatic detection     Basic configuration      serial   serial_config   ports    All       basic    Apply all ports in a group All pots     Basic configuration  Enable Disable this port   Enable    RealPort support   Disable v  Host mode   Console server  Listening TCP port  1024 65535    7001    Protocol   Telnet  v    Automatic detection      Active       freeKVM configuration  Authentication  User access control    Advanced configuration    Save  amp  appl    The three automatic detection states have these effects     e Off  Automatic detection is not on  The Digi Passport will not attempt to  determine what is attached to the serial port        Active  The Digi Passport unit sends probe sequences to the serial port  according to the defined port automatic detection list        Passive  The Digi Passport unit does not send out probe sequences to the  port  Instead  it passively monitors the port at the defined settings and  attempts to discover the baud rate  operating system and hostname from  traffic sent from the port and while it is used    Important  For Active and Passive automatic detection to work  make sure    that the DNS configuration and the Port automatic detection configuration  are both properly configured        Chapter 5 Configure Ports 78    Configure Physical Serial Ports    Port logging and passive automatic detection    In Passive automatic detection  the Port logging option setting for the port  or p
276. t only     Both with arrows  Both server output and user input  with arrows to  indicate direction     Both without arrows  Both server output and user input  without  direction indicator arrows        Port management  Apply all ports settings  Automatic detection  Port title  Host mode configuration  Virtual KVM configuration  Serial port parameters  Port logging   Port logging  Enable      Logging direction   Memory g    Enable  v   Local       Port log buffer size  50    Specify below       Port log storage location   Port log to SYSLOG server   SYSLOG facility for port logging     Port logging filename option   Port logging filename  null as default file    name portxxdata     portidata            Disable       Time stamp to port log   Show last 10 lines of a log upon connect    Disable  i    Strip the  M from SYSLOG  Disable E    Port log view      bash 2 03   bash 2 03     bash 2 03     nonah 2 naa  Port event handling  Authentication   User access control    Alert configuration             Save to flash       Save  amp  apply Cancel             Both without arrows        Chapter 6 Alerts and Notifications    117    Configure Port Event Handling    7  Select Port event handling  The port event handling settings are  displayed     Keywords Configuration   1      serial   serial_config   ports    1 E  portevents   keywords   ig       Port management    Apply all ports settings  Automatic detection  Port title   Host mode configuration  Virtual KVM configuration   Serial p
277. t unit  can also be configured to automatically recognize the type of devices  connected to serial ports     Next  the chapter reviews basic and advanced serial port settings  which  can be modified or restored to the factory default settings  and resetting  port connections  It also covers configuring and removing remote ports     Chapter 5 Configure Ports 60    Configure Physical Serial Ports    Configure Physical Serial Ports   There are several ways to configure physical serial ports    e Using a quick start procedure that applies a set of configuration settings  to all serial ports  and configures the Automatic Device Recognition   ADR  feature  shown on page 62    e Setting basic configuration settings for individual serial ports  See   Basic Port Configuration Settings  on page 68    e Setting advanced configuration settings for selected serial ports as  needed  See  Advanced Port Configuration Settings  on page 92     Chapter 5 Configure Ports 61    Configure Physical Serial Ports    Quick Start Procedure    Configure Ports with Automatic Device Recognition  Optional     This procedure is the fastest way to configure Automatic Device  Recognition  ADR  for physical serial ports  It results in ports being  configured identically  starting from and retaining factory defaults for most  settings  and adjusting the most common parameters to fit the  requirements of typical installations  It also shows how to optionally  establish an automatic detection probe sequence to be
278. t value of the Recheck interval    setting  this value can be changed  or until a specified start time occurs  the    Start time setting      Automatic detection       Device detection method  Active   Detect device via    DSR w   Initial delay  A minutes  Recheck interval  every  1440 minutes  Start time  hh mm ss     Probe string   x0D   Detected OS    Use detected port title  Disable      Use detected type of console server   Enable M   Use detected freekVM   Enable M   Use detected serial parameters   Enable ME   Baudrate Data bit Parity bit Stop bit Probe string Wait time  No rules    Automatic detection     Note that the value for the Initial delay must be less than that for the    Recheck interval     Option to ignore the status of DSR signal  If you selected None for Detect  device via option  Passport will start ADR regardless of the status of the DSR    signal     Automatic detection can also be started manually by clicking the Start Now  button at the bottom of Automatic detection page  Automatic detection is  then performed according to the selected Device detection method     There are timing considerations when configuring automatic detection and  connecting devices to the Digi Passport unit  Specifically  if automatic    detection is set to Active and turned on aftera device is physically plugged in   to a serial port on the Digi Passport unit  automatic detection will not attempt to   probe the port until after the time specified by the Recheck Interval elapse
279. te that the ID for the first unit is set to 0 and for the second  unit it is set to 1        Digi CM 32    Serial       Console                Chapter 14 Power Controller 202    Allowed IDs for Digi RPM Unit  The figure shows all possible IDs that can be configured on the Digi RPM unit   and the switch settings to configure each ID     Unit ID Switch Configuration       TTT  Beg    8080    e889    A885  paap PEAR BGA  ABER       Unit ID 12 Unit ID 13 Unit ID 14 Unit ID 15    Managing Digi RPM from the Command Line    Managing Digi RPM from the Command Line    The Digi RPM can be managed using ASCII commands  For information  about these commands  see the Digi Knowledge Base article    Quick reference to the RPM command line  at   http   www digi com support kbase kbaseresultdetl jsp id 866    Third Party Power Controllers  In addition to the Digi RPM power controller  Digi supports several third   party power controllers  including controllers manufactured by ServerTech  and BayTech  The serial based controllers are configured in the same  manner as the Digi RPM  described previously  Additionally  Digi Passport  supports ServerTech network enabled power strips  The additional steps  for configuring network enabled power strips are described below     Additional Configuration  Network Enabled ServerTech Power Controller    Remote ServeTech Power Controller  To install a remote ServerTech power controller  follow the steps below     1  In the Web go to Power controller  gt  Co
280. the Digi Passport unit yourself  except  when following the instructions from Technical Support personnel  In such  a case  first perform the following actions     Safety Instructions    Turn off the Digi Passport unit     Ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface at the back of  the equipment before touching anything inside your equipment     CAUTION  Do not operate the Digi Passport unit with the cover removed     To avoid shorting out the Digi Passport unit when disconnecting the  network cable  first unplug the cable from the equipment and then from  the network jack  When reconnecting a network cable to the equipment   first plug the cable into the network jack and then into the equipment     To help prevent electric shock  plug the Digi Passport unit into a  properly grounded power source  The cable is equipped with 3 prong  plug to help ensure proper grounding  Do not use adapter plugs or  remove the grounding prong from the cable  If using an extension  cable  use a 3 wire cable with properly grounded plugs     To help protect the Digi Passport unit from transients in electrical power   use a Surge suppressor  line conditioner  or a continuous protected  a  power supply that cannot be interrupted  power supply     Be sure that nothing rests on the Digi Passport unit cables and that the  cables are not located where they can be stepped on or tripped over     Do not spill food or liquids on the Digi Passport unit  If it gets wet   contact Digi Technical Sup
281. the factory  default settings  However  if the Digi Passport unit fails to boot in spite of  being reset to the factory default settings  the firmware can be restored  using the Boot Loader program     Restore Digi Passport to Factory Default Settings  To restore the Digi Passport unit to the factory default configuration  settings  use a TFTP or BOOTP server  To use the Boot Loader program to  flash new firmware  do the following   1  Connect the console port on the rear panel of the Digi Passport unit to a  serial port on a workstation  Use an Ethernet cable with a DB 9 adapter     2  Setup a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal  Use the  following port parameters     bps 9600   data bits 8  parity none   stop bits 1   flow control none    3  Reboot or power on the Digi Passport unit     4  Press the ESC key within three seconds of applying power to the  device  The following screen is displayed  Use the ESC key to return to  an earlier menu screen  and the Enter key to refresh the menu screen     Press  lt ESC gt  key to enter the bios menu       Select menu    RTC configuration   May 10 0    13 54 44    Hardware test   Firmware upgrade  S W Version   v1 1 3   Exit and boot from flash   Exit and boot from flash in emergency mode  Exit and reboot     lt ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh   gt     Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface 270    Access the Boot Loader Program    5  Choose Firmware upgrade by entering 3  The following screen is  displayed     Firmw
282. tication    secondary SMTP server   None     Device mail address      lt ESC gt  Back   lt ENTER gt  Refresh     gt    gt                 3  Enter the desired parameters for the menu items     Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface    246    Configure Network IP Filtering    Configure Network IP Filtering    The Digi Passport unit offers built in firewall functionality to limit TCP IP  traffic to and from certain networks  TCP ports  and interfaces  The  functionality implemented is based on the Linux tool IP tables     The next scenario shows that access to the device connected to the Digi  Passport is allowed only on the  1 subnet  The device at 192 168 1 108 can  access the device connected to the Digi Passport because it is in the range  allowed by the IP Filter rule     Filter IP  192 168 1 0  Filter Mask  255 255 255 0          serial        192 168 5 10       Internet    192 168 1 108    It is also possible to enable or disable specific services of the Digi Passport  unit by creating IP Filtering rules for the following network services                 Network Service Network port number  Telnet console TCP IP port 23  SSH console TCP IP port 22  Web configuration interface TCP IP port 80             Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface 247       IP Filtering Settings    Configure Network IP Filtering    The IP filtering settings page looks like this     IP filtering    Chain rule Action    ees Option IP address Mask Protocol Port    1 Sal      Normal     0 0 0 0 0
283. tication for the Web Servel            ccccccceeseeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeteneees 152  Configure Authentication for the CLI           cccceeccceeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeesaeeseeeeeees 153  LDAP Authentication x siiccliceeit cescdtvans tancideaeetigetantetelaceaiaeieveae etdieeeneenaece 154  Gustom PAM Module isea See acta codon detained tie eda tans aerate redue eed ace 155  Configuration for a Samba Server          cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeenaeeeeenaes 156    Chapter9 Custom and Default Menus    Recommended Process for Implementing Custom Menus                 ceeeeereeeeees 157  Add Users to the SY SlOn yc   dese cedet curs ecad iret Cectes eae acer iets eeeeie laa deta tees 158  Greate Men   NAMES a iits 6 4 nude  seleud Seadgdestinateiceds va daieat a ai eee iri 159  Add Menu MOMS irsinin spanners a eaaa a neeaaeaii 160  Assign Users to a MOnU   ssisssisriscrrieciikirirrrninedrntiocekiiderak annia iincta duetidan na 161  Default Menu  The Port Access Menu                  ccccceseeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneeeeneeeseees 162   Access the port access Menu             c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeseeneeeees 162    Connect to Ports a ere Ea ey ce ere er 162    Change password 22 ccck Lack esc sidtes ad oe ee Ot ce tan Uoccyttaare Bhanchececaesadl eg dastadens 162  Display and connect to slave units              ee eeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeee 162  T  sear  h viaport TUG fh no teedesathdeaiet dese aeaa Aa Aaa aa iae a REST REN 162  P
284. ties oss ssscciveiissstedastedsapsaecetawnenanceoencberecenvaatcaadedetinenconedamaasaaadtaes 280  Important  Fil   LOCATIONS neman nta a a a aa aade 281  BLEED A DE e E E E A E S 281  Bo  ting Seguente snema aaan ee a E a 281  O16  91116 M aE E E E EN AAT E 281  User Storage Space  erce a ae a A E EEE ERE ieee 283  Example Serpien a E E S 284  Save IP tables options permanently             ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeeneeeteeees 284  Change RADIUS socket ports 2Ainsnctainease ce teddelanad Saas 284  Limit root access to the console on Digi Passport products  for SSH only  285  Send break from existing session with the Digi Passport unit              00 285  User Administration   esea tcerdescesvenstiatisstive evedsserieseaceseseacsdieasceeeies 286  e O KULE E E E E E E ands beedateeed orebvaaeas 286  Delete a USEr era a a e E E eee 286  Locator LED  Sri  sirerionacneo pe e a a a e a 287  Chapter 18 System Administration  Upgrade  FIrmMWa e ninnan annia ir a Godan E A 288  Web Interface             ccccccccccceccceccceeccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeteess 288  Configuration Management            sseessssesssserrrerrrntrrtnnttsrttrssttrnnterrnnttrnnrnssrrrnsernn nee 289  Automatically Save the Configuration            ssseeessserrssserreerrnererrressrrrnrerre 290  Option for auto backup configuration to use an auto file naming scheme    291  Configure the automatic backup Option        sssssssssseessserrsssrrrnsrrrrrrsrrrressrrnnee 291  Automatical
285. tings  the port automatic  detection list  the automatic detection state  and the rules for performing  automatic detection  Each of these elements has factory default settings that  can be modified through the Basic or Advanced serial port configuration  settings     Port automatic detection list    The Port automatic detection list  a set of serial characteristics used to  probe serial ports once automatic detection is active  Probe criteria include  baud rate  data  parity and stop bits  a string to be sent during the probe  and  how long to wait for a response  The port automatic detection list is defined by  selecting Port automatic detection configuration on the main Configuration  screen for ports  16 entries can be made in the list  and they will each be  tested in order listed when Automatic Device Recognition tests the port  Here  is an example port automatic detection list     Port automatic detection configuration    serial   serial_config   port_autodetect    Port automatic detection list    No  Baudrate Data bit Stop bit Probe string    All Y  8bits v Ibit    00  9600    8bits v 1bit     x0D  4800    8bits v 1bit     x0D  Sbits v 1 bit  8bits v 1 bit KOD    8 bits 1bit       Save  amp  apply    Chapter 5 Configure Ports 77    Configure Physical Serial Ports    Automatic detection state  Off  Active  Passive    The automatic detection state for all or individual ports can be set to one of  three states  Off  Active  or Passive  The automatic detection state is se
286. tion and encryption thus making it more  secure than SNMPv1 or SNMPv2  To configure SNMPv3 access control  and SNMPVv3 traps  follow these steps     1  Open the main SNMP configuration page     SNMP configuration    network   snmp       sysContact   sysName   sysLocation     sysService   Options      administrator     Digi Passport   my location   7   Trap Email    EnablePowerOnTrap Email   No VINo       EnableAuthenTrap Email    VINo       EnableLinkUpTrap Email    No     EnableLinkDownTrap Email  fi JIlNo       EnableLoginTrap Email  l No       Access control settings  NMS     No                          Trap receiver    IP address Community Permission    192 168 100 101  digipassport    ReadOnly          o foooo      e o    settings  SNMP V3   User Security level Auth Priv Permission    ettings  IP address Community User              0 0 0 0 ai        0 0 0 0 l             c  00 00 l       a E              2  Inthe Access control settings  SNMPv3   add a user     Chapter 6 Alerts and Notifications 113    Manage SNMP configuration    3  Select 1  The Access control settings  SNMP V3    1 page is  displayed     Access control settings  SNMP V3    1      network   snmp   snmpv3   1                    Access control  ral   User name  test   Security level  Auth Priv v  Authentication protocol   MD5 v   Authentication password  new            Authentication password  confirm   r  aa  Privacy protocol  DES      Privacy password  new     Privacy password  confirm            J  Pe
287. to peer group will receive information about the invited hosts     Peer to peer information      cluster   cluster_p2p_config   p2p_info    Peer to peer mode configuration  Peer to peer information    Peer to peer status   Joined Refresh    Action     Join   Withdraw   Update      Peer Authen  Web port Port access Slave    IP Source port i Action  no  method Protocol Source Protocol Source Unit    192 168 12 8 Local HTTPS 15000 Telnet 15001 15002   15010    Remove    192 168 19 6 Local HTTPS 15011 Telnet 15012 15013   15061 1 This     192 168 12 32   192 168 12 48    Invite I         Chapter 15 Port Clustering 231    Configure peer to peer Clustering    Peer to peer information      cluster   cluster_p2p_config   p2p_info    Peer to peer mode configuration    Peer to peer information    Peer to peer status   Joined Refresh    Action     Joir   Withdraw Update      Peer Authen  Web port Port access Slave    IP Source port   Action  no  method Protocol Source Protocol Source Unit  1 192 168 12 8 Local HTTPS 15000 Telnet 15001 15002   15010    Remove    2 192 168 19 6 Local HTTPS 15011 Telnet 15012 15013   15061 1 This  3  192 168 12 32  4  192 168 12 48  5  6  7  7  Invite      8  9          Peer to peer information after inviting peers     Withdraw  Withdraws the peer to peer group       Remove  Removes the peer from the peers list   e Update  Gets the information of the peers that have not responded     Peer to peer information      cluster   cluster_p2p_config   p2p_irfo    
288. ton on the unit  using the web interface   or entering a command through the command line interface     Using the Factory Reset Button    The quickest and simplest method is to push and hold the hardware factory  default reset button until the Ready light on the front panel goes out  The  reset button is located on the back panel of the unit next to the Ethernet  port  The arrow points to the reset button   s location   Digi Passport 32  shown      DIGI PASSPORT  gt        Factory reset button    Chapter 18 System Administration 296    Reset the Digi Passport unit to Factory Defaults    Using the Web Interface    The web interface provides the option of retaining the IP settings  To use  the web interface to reset the Digi Passport unit  do the following     1  Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface     2  Select System administration  gt  Configuration management  3  Under Configuration import  select Factory default     Configuration management    f admin   conf_manage  Configuration export  Location   CF Card USB storage Primary NFS server Samba server     User space  usr2     Local machine  Encrypt   Yes       File name   syscm    Configuration import  Location   CF Card USB storage Primary NFS server Samba server     User space  usr2     Local machine    Factory default  Configuration selection    Select all             C Network configuration   Including IP configuration         Serial port configu
289. ts and briefly describes some of the files that the root  user or system administrator may wish to view  monitor  and edit     Default Script    The default script file is executed whenever the Digi Passport unit is  booted  The file is  usr2 rc user and can be modified with the vi editor  The  modified script becomes effective when the system is rebooted     Booting Sequence    When the Digi Passport unit boots  it decompresses the  cnf cnf tar gz file  to  tmp cnf   and unmounts the  cnf file  If the configuration files are  modified in the  tmp cnf file and the configuration is saved to flash   saveconf   the unit mounts the  cnf file and compresses the  tmp cnf   to   enf cnf tar gz     Config Files    Configuration  Config  files for the most part reside in subdirectories of  tmp cnf  Config files include        File Name Description         ssh    SSH public key files  The format of key files is  name_auth_key2        active_detect    Active port detection configuration        passive_detect    Passive port detection configuration        rportcon    Remote port configuration          cluster_p2p    Directory for peer to peer clustering       cluster cnf    Basic cluster information         cluster_p2p cluster_p2p cnf    Basic peer to peer cluster information                          unit  cnf Basic slave information     etc Web Certificate   client pem   dhcpd opt DHCP certificate file    group User group information    hostname Passport host name    hosts Name resoluti
290. tus Port  Title Comments  Peripherals 1 Port Title  1  lt  Not used  gt   Custom menu    Power controller    Seriallgerminal Connection   v  View Port Log    System status  amp  log    System administration    Port Title  2  lt  Not used  gt   System statistics Port Title  3  lt  Not used  gt   Port Title  4  lt  Not used  gt   Port Title  5  lt  Not used  gt   Start device locating Port Title  6  lt  Not used  gt   Apply Changes Port Title  7  lt  Not used  gt   Login as a different user Port Title  8  lt  Not used  gt   Logout Port Title  9  lt  Not used  gt   Port Title  10  lt  Not used  gt    Reboot    Port Title  11  lt  Not used  gt   Port Title  12  lt  Not used  gt   Port Title  13  lt  Not used  gt   Port Title  14  lt  Not used  gt   Port Title  15  lt  Not used  gt   Port Title  16  lt  Not used  gt        Chapter 1 Introduction 19    Chapter 1    Options for Accessing the Digi Passport Ports    3  Select a port   A Java applet or Telnet window opens with a login prompt     Trying 10 8 115 251 7000 online    Welcome to Digi Passport 16 Port Access Menu  Digi_Passport     Digi Passport 16 Login   admin    Digi Passport 16 Password            Title 4 2 Port    Title  3   Port    Title  5 6 Port   Title  7 8 Port   Title  9 0 Port   Title   2 Port Title  12    Title  13 4 Port Title  1        Title  15 6 Port Title  16    Enter command  1 16 serial port  P passwd  Q exit         _ Local echo Connect Disconnect SendBreak    The web interface can also be configured to 
291. uffer size  KB  300 max   Log buffer size  in KB     Automatic backup on mounting  Defines the action taken if the  NFS partition or Flash media is mounted or re mounted     Enable  rename the existing log file by adding a  xx with xx being  an incrementing number     Disable  keep writing to the existing log file     Send system log by Email  Number of log messages to send in an  email  1 100   Number of messages     System log recipient   s mail address  Email address for log  recipient     4  Select to enable or disable email alerts and the number of log  messages to send  The default value is 5 seconds for the delay in log  email messages Enter the contact email address     5  Click Save  amp  apply     Chapter 4 System Status and Port Logging 55    View System Logs    View System Logs    The system logs can be viewed from the web interface on the System  logging page or from the location where they have been saved  The  following table lists the file locations of the system logs        System Logfile             Log Storage File Location  Digi memory  tmp logs  Compact flash card  mnt flash logs       Syslog server    must be viewed on the syslog server       NFS server     mnt nfs logs       USB        mnt usb             Chapter 4 System Status and Port Logging    56    Configure Port Logging    Configure Port Logging    If a serial port is configured for console server mode  the port logging  feature can be enabled  Port logging saves serial data to the memory of the 
292. uld be  started with      e g   share     Samba timeout  Sec  5 3600   5  this is a default value     Samba mount retrying interval  sec  5 3600   5  this a default  value     Samba server user  User name of Samba server  if the Samba  server is a Windows server  The user name must be prefixed with  the domain  for example   digi username     Samba server password  Password of the user    The Samba directory will be mounted in the Digi Passport unit   s file system  in the  mnt smb directory     Chapter 8 Users  Security  and Authentication 156    Recommended Process for Implementing Custom Menus  Chapter 9 Custom and Default Menus    The Digi Passport unit has several default menus for easy configuration  and access by different users  Depending on access privileges  the menus  available are the Web Interface  Configuration Menu  and Port Access  Menu  A Custom Menu feature for creating menus is also available through  the web interface    The Custom Menu feature enables system administrators to create menus  for specific users  in other words  system administrators can create a  customized interface to selected ports  Custom menus can only be  configured via the web  however  they can only be accessed via command  line  serial  telnet  or ssh  connections     Recommended Process for Implementing Custom Menus    Before making custom menus  plan the kind of menus and menu items to  make available for users  A good plan would include the following     1  Add users to the syste
293. uration Menu Interface 263    Clustering    Clustering    By default  clustered slave devices are configured using the Telnet protocol  and the following port parameters     e bps 9600   e data bits 8   e parity none   e stop bits 1   e flow control none    When the master device autoconfigures a slave device  it simply imports  the information from the slave unit  To use other protocols or port  parameters  configure the slave unit with those parameters before  autoconfiguring     Set Up Digi Passport for Clustering    To set up the Digi Passport unit for clustering    1  Access the configuration menu    2  Select Clustering configuration  gt  Unit position    3  Assign the unit as the master device  A new screen is displayed     Select menu    Network Configuration    Serial Port Configuration  Clustering Configuration  Power Controller  PC Card Configuration  System Status  amp  Log  System Administration  Save Changes  Exit without Saving     Exit and Apply Changes    Exit and Reboo   lt ENTER gt  Refresh    gt 3    oe GODNA WN e    Select menu      Unit position         4  Enter the number 1 for the first slave unit   5  Select Enable Disable unit clustering  gt  Enable     Select menu    1  Enable Disable unit clustering   Disable       Select unit clustering option  lt  1   Enable  2   Disable        6  Enter the values for Slave Unit IP  No  of ports  and Port  configuration     Chapter 16 Configuration Menu Interface 264    7  Select the port number to configure or 0
294. urce port  If not using AutoConfig  these ports can be set  manually  The base source port is the first port number on a master  unit  By default the base source port on the master unit is 7001  The  base source ports extend the master   s ports via the slave ports  For  example  starting the base source port number with 7101 results ina  32 port unit being numbered from 7101 to 7032  Port number 7100  is the port access menu of the slave  If configuring the device manu   ally  the port access menu must also be configured separately  How   ever  if the base source port number is changed to another number  and the rest of the ports on the unit will be sequentially numbered  from the base source port     Base destination port  The physical port numbers of the slave  device     225       Chapter 15 Port Clustering    Advanced         cluster   cluster_config   unit_info    1      advance          Enable Disable this unit   Slave unit address   No  of port     Slave authentication mode     Update master on changes     Enable v        10 4 102 52  48       Auto Configure    Master v Set Authentication  Yes M  Set Update Master                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Advanced   Web port configuration  No  Enable Source port Destination port Protocol  1 d 50249  s0  HTTP 
295. user s   Not available to sniff users   b Send break  Not functional for sniff users   d Disconnect a sniff session  Only functional to admin   g Create and use port group   l Show last 100 lines of log buffer  Must enable logging for this option   p Power device on off  Show only on or off only if power management is  available on this port    r Reboot device using power switch  Only if power management is available on this port   x Close current connection to port  Closes the current sniff session              Chapter 1 Introduction 23    Automatic Device Recognition    Automatic Device Recognition    The Automatic Device Recognition feature allows the Digi Passport unit to  automatically detect and recognize attached devices  The Digi Passport  unit sends a set of automatic detection criteria  including sets of serial  parameters and a probe string  default is  lt  Enter  gt    and analyzes the  response  lf Use detected port title is enabled  the Digi Passport unit  displays the detected OS  device  and port number in the format     CISCO Router port3  Sun nemo port5    Automatic Device Recognition also monitors each of the configured serial  ports  If there is a change in the expected response from the device  connected to the serial port  an email message or SNMP trap can be  issued  This means that notifications are sent if the device goes down or is  disconnected for any reason     To configure the alarm feature  see  Configure Ports  on page 60  Fora  further discuss
296. ver for sending the emails   The Digi Passport unit supports three types of SMTP servers  SMTP server  without authentication  SMTP server with authentication  and POP before  SMTP     The Digi Passport unit also supports SNMP  Simple Network Management  Protocol   a protocol used to manage a network and monitor devices ona  network  System and port alerts can also be sent using SNMP traps  The  Digi Passport unit supports versions 1  2  and 3 of the SNMP protocol  The  main function of SNMP on the Digi Passport unit is to allow a system  administrator to query remote devices for information          PANIC    _  ss  4 ge  SS   PC    Internet    Network  Ethernet     SMTP  server    Chapter 6 Alerts and Notifications 107    Configure SMTP Alerts    Configure SMTP Alerts    Most SMTP servers check the sender   s email address with the host  domain name to verify the address as authentic  Consequently  when  assigning an email address for the device email address  any arbitrary  username with the registered hostname may be used  An example is  username company com    To configure SMTP alerts on the Digi Passport unit  do the following     1  Enter the IP address of the Digi Passport unit in the address bar of a  web browser to access the web interface     2  Select Network  gt  SMTP configuration           3  Specify the SMTP settings as needed   e SMTP server  Use either the hostname or the IP address     e Device mail address  The sender   s email address for the log and  alar
297. verTech on Port 49 96       Chapter 14 Power Controller 208    Third Party Power Controllers    9  To configure the outlets on the controller  select a power controller from  the installed Power controllers and a new page will be displayed  similar  to the one shown below     Power controller configuration   ServerTech on Port 48    power   power_config   power_controller    Power controller    Manufacturer   ServerTech     Outlets          Title      ServerTech on Port 48  Web protocol   HTTPS      Destination IP address   71 216 228 119   Web source port   60048   Web port   443    Save 8 apply    Alarms  amp  thresholds  Outlets       10  From this page select the Outlets link and a new page will be  displayed  where you can configure the outlets  Select an outlet to  configure     Power controller configuration   ServerTech on Port 48         power   power_config   power_controller  Power controller  Alarms  amp  thresholds    Outlets  Outlet Port Title Unit Outlet   1 1 Port Title  1 AA 1  2 1 Port Title  1 AA 2  3 None None AA 3  4 None None AA 4  5 None None AA 5  6 None None AA 6  7 None None AA 7  8 None None AA 8  9 9 Port Title  9 AA 9  10 None None AA 10  11 None None AA 11  12 None None AA 12  13 None None AA 13  14 None None AA 14  15 None None AA 15  16 None None AA 16    Chapter 14 Power Controller 209    Third Party Power Controllers    11  A page and similar to the following is displayed     Power controller configuration   ServerTech on Port 48         powe
298. web interface   2  Select Configuration  gt  Peer to Peer configuration   3  Configure peer to peer mode settings       Peer to peer mode  select Enable     e Peer to peer authentication method  Select authentication  method to be used     Local authentication  this peer will continue to authenticate users  locally and independently of other peers     Peer authentication  the first peer contacted will perform the  authentication        Peer to peer password  new   confirm   Peered units must share  the same password     Peer to peer mode configuration    cluster   cluster_p2p_config   mode    Peer to peer mode configuration    Peer to peer mode  Enable 7     Peer to peer authentication method  Local      Peer to peer password  new   anew  Peer to peer password  confirm   pee    Peer to peer information       Save to flash    Save  amp  apply   Cancel  4  Click Save  amp  apply     Chapter 15 Port Clustering 228    Configure peer to peer Clustering    Peer to peer Information Page    The Peer to peer information page allows for joining and withdrawing  peer to peer connections  and displays status of peer to peer connections     Peer to peer information    cluster   cluster_p2p_config   p2p_info    Peer to peer mode configuration    Peer to peer information    Peer to peer status   Not joined Refresh      Action   D Join X   iate      Peer Authen  Web port Port access Slave    Source port   Action  no  method Protocol Source Protocol Source Unit    No peer found          Invit
299. y program knows the default password for the the  Digi Passport unit  If the password has been changed from the default   dbps  a prompt for entering the password is displayed    Configure the IP address  Once the Digi Passport is configured with a valid  IP address  log in to the Web user interface with username admin   password admin     Introduction 14    Configuration User Interface Options for Digi Passport    Configuration User Interface Options for Digi Passport    Web Interface    There are several interface options for configuring the Digi Passport unit   using the web interface  configuration menu  command line interface  or  Simple Network Management Protocol  SNMP      The Digi Passport web interface provides an easy way to configure the Digi  Passport unit  The root user and system administrator can configure all  features through the web  Port administrators can configure ports   including port clustering  but cannot modify system settings  Only users  with port or system administrative rights can use the web interface for  configuration  The Digi Passport web interface features HTTPS for secure  access  The web interface can be accessed either by using Digi   s device  discovery tool  Advanced Digi Discovery Protocol  ADDP   or by entering  the IP address of the Digi Passport unit or its hostname directly into the  address bar of a browser  Here is an example page of the web interface        Digi Passport    16 Configuration and Management    A             User
300. y to show the rest of the ports that are not displayed on  the first page     Serial port connection   Page 1     Move to           serial   serial_connect       Port title     Search      Port access menu connection  Port access menu connection    Individual port connection             Status Port  Title   of User Comments  1 Port Title  1 0  lt  Not used  gt   2 Port Title  2 0  lt  Not used  gt   3 Port Title  3 0  lt  Not used  gt   4 Port Title  4 0  lt  Not used  gt   5 Port Title  5 0  lt  Not used  gt   6 Port Title  6 0  lt  Not used  gt   7  PorTitle  7 0  lt  Not used  gt   8 PortTitle  8 0  lt  Not used  gt   9 Remote Port  9 0  lt  Not used  gt   2 1  TheFirst Peer 2   Master   Port 1 Source Port  15013  2 2 Port Title  2 Peer 2   Master   Port 2 Source Port  15014    Chapter 15 Port Clustering 233    Connect to Peers    Move to and Peer list    To limit those ports that belong to the selected peer  select a peer in the  Peer list box     The port number consists of the peer number  unit number and port  number     This example shows the first port of slave unit 4 of the second peer         Move to     X        Move to        2  Peer 2   Master   Port 42 Ls  3  Peer 3   Master   Port 17  4  Peer 4   Master   Port 36          4  192 168 12 48    Connect to a Port via connect asp  Connecting by URL  Users can access to ports using the connect asp tool on the Passport by  using the following URL construction rules  Connect asp supports  connections by Port Title  t 
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
OnCell G3470A-LTE User`s Manual  CD961K Manual Book    Rexel T71759 folder  Lenovo THINK CENTRE 9159 User's Manual      Owner`s Manual DiamondBack™ Orbital Weldhead  Haier HWM80-113S User's Manual  EnaSolar GT Series Solar Inverter Installation Manual    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file